2 Essential Safety Equipment

2 Essential Safety Equipment
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
A Word to Mazda Owners
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is
necessary, that's the place to go.
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best
possible service.
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.
Mazda Motor Corporation
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
Important Notes About This Manual
Keep this manual in the glove compartment as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda.
Should you resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
All speci¿cations and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in speci¿cations at any time without notice and without obligation.
Air-Conditioning and the Environment
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is ¿lled with a refrigerant that has been found not to damage the earth's
ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Perchlorate
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries,…] may
contain Perchlorate Material-- Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may ¿nd
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
©2016 Mazda Motor Corporation
July 2016 (Print2)
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
How to Use This Manual
We want to help you get the most driving
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's
manual, when read from cover to cover,
can do that in many ways.
Illustrations complement the words of
the manual to best explain how to enjoy
your Mazda. By reading your manual, you
can ¿nd out about the features, important
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions.
NOTE
A NOTE provides information and
sometimes suggests how to make better
use of your vehicle.
The following symbol, located on some
parts of the vehicle, indicates that this
manual contains information related to the
part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.
The symbol below in this manual means
"Do not do this" or "Do not let this
happen".
Index: A good place to start is the Index,
an alphabetical listing of all information in
your manual.
You'll ¿nd several WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Table of Contents
Pictorial Index
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Essential Safety Equipment
2
Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat belt
system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.
Before Driving
3
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
When Driving
4
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
Maintenance and Care
6
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
If Trouble Arises
7
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
Specifications
Technical information about your Mazda.
Index
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5
8
9
10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
1
Pictorial Index
Interior, exterior views and part identi¿cation of your Mazda.
Interior Overview............................................................................... 1-2
Interior Equipment (View A) ........................................................ 1-2
Interior Equipment (View B) ........................................................ 1-4
Interior Equipment (View C) ........................................................ 1-5
Exterior Overview .............................................................................. 1-6
1–1
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View A)
Door-lock knob ..................................................................................................... page 3-19
Lighting control..................................................................................................... page 4-53
Turn and lane-change signal ................................................................................. page 4-59
Wiper and washer lever ......................................................................................... page 4-60
Tire pressure monitoring system set switch ........................................................ page 4-162
DSC OFF switch ................................................................................................... page 4-79
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) OFF
switch .................................................................................................................. page 4-129
Outside mirror switch............................................................................................ page 3-31
Door-lock switch ................................................................................................... page 3-16
Power window lock switch ................................................................................... page 3-36
Power window switches ........................................................................................ page 3-34
1–2
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Audio control switches.......................................................................................... page 5-41
Instrument cluster.................................................................................................. page 4-12
Cruise control switch ...............................................................................page 4-118, 4-155
Dashboard illumination knob ................................................................................ page 4-17
Push button start ...................................................................................................... page 4-4
Heated steering wheel switch................................................................................ page 3-30
Hazard warning Àasher switch .............................................................................. page 4-65
Steering shift switches .......................................................................................... page 4-46
Lock release lever ................................................................................................. page 3-30
Hood release handle .............................................................................................. page 6-23
Remote fuel-¿ller lid release ................................................................................. page 3-28
Trunk release button .............................................................................................. page 3-21
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
1–3
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View B)
SRS air bags .......................................................................................................... page 2-40
Active driving display ........................................................................................... page 4-29
Climate control system............................................................................................ page 5-2
Rear window defogger switch............................................................................... page 4-63
Audio system......................................................................................................... page 5-13
Glove compartment ............................................................................................... page 5-92
Shift lever/Selector lever..............................................................................page 4-39, 4-42
Commander switch ............................................................................................... page 5-21
Electric parking brake switch................................................................................ page 4-71
Drive selection switch ........................................................................................... page 4-86
Fuse block ............................................................................................................. page 6-59
Storage pocket ....................................................................................................... page 5-91
1–4
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View C)
Seat belts ............................................................................................................... page 2-15
SRS air bag............................................................................................................ page 2-40
Bottle holder.......................................................................................................... page 5-90
Sunvisor ................................................................................................................ page 5-84
Vanity mirror ......................................................................................................... page 5-84
Overhead lights ..................................................................................................... page 5-85
Moonroof switch ................................................................................................... page 3-37
Rearview mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-32
Cup holders ........................................................................................................... page 5-89
External input terminal.......................................................................................... page 5-43
Accessory sockets ................................................................................................. page 5-88
Front seat ................................................................................................................. page 2-5
Center console ....................................................................................................... page 5-92
Rear seat ................................................................................................................ page 2-11
Seat warmer switches .............................................................................................. page 2-7
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
1–5
Pictorial Index
Exterior Overview
Hood ...................................................................................................................... page 6-23
Windshield wiper blades ....................................................................................... page 6-33
Moonroof .............................................................................................................. page 3-37
Doors and keys ...................................................................................................... page 3-14
Fuel-¿ller lid ......................................................................................................... page 3-28
Wheels and Tires ................................................................................................... page 6-40
Exterior lights........................................................................................................ page 6-45
Trunk lid ................................................................................................................ page 3-20
Child safety locks .................................................................................................. page 3-20
Outside mirror ....................................................................................................... page 3-31
1–6
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
2
Essential Safety Equipment
Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat belt
system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.
Seats..................................................................................................... 2-2
Seat Precautions ............................................................................ 2-2
Front Seat ...................................................................................... 2-5
Rear Seat ..................................................................................... 2-11
Head Restraints ........................................................................... 2-13
Seat Belt Systems.............................................................................. 2-15
Seat Belt Precautions .................................................................. 2-15
Seat Belt ...................................................................................... 2-18
Seat Belt Warning Systems ......................................................... 2-19
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems .......... 2-19
Seat Belt Extender....................................................................... 2-21
Child Restraint ................................................................................. 2-23
Child-Restraint Precautions ........................................................ 2-23
Child-Restraint System Installation ............................................ 2-28
Installing Child-Restraint Systems ............................................. 2-29
SRS Air Bags .................................................................................... 2-40
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions .................... 2-40
Supplemental Restraint System Components ............................. 2-47
How the SRS Air Bags Work ...................................................... 2-49
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria .............................................. 2-53
Limitations to SRS Air Bag ........................................................ 2-54
Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System* ...................... 2-56
Constant Monitoring ................................................................... 2-61
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
2–1
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Precautions
WARNING
Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that are not securely locked are dangerous. In a
sudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat are locked in place by attempting to slide the seat
forward and backward and rocking the seatback.
Never allow children to adjust a seat:
Allowing children to adjust a seat is dangerous as it could result in serious injury if a
child's hands or feet become caught in the seat.
Do not drive with the seatback unlocked:
All of the seatbacks play an important role in your protection in a vehicle. Leaving the
seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or thrown
around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision, resulting in severe
injury. After adjusting the seatback at any time, even when there are no other passengers,
rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.
Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stopped:
Adjusting the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Do not modify or replace the front seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or loosening
any bolts is dangerous. The front seats contain air bag components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such modifications could damage the supplemental
restraint system and result in serious injury. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if there
is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats, such as seat cushions torn or damaged down to the
urethane, is dangerous. A collision, even one not strong enough to inflate the air bags,
could damage the front seats which contain essential air bag components. If there was a
subsequent collision, an air bag may not deploy which could lead to injuries. Always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats, front seat belt pretensioners and air
bags after a collision.
Do not drive with either front seats reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you do not get
the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the
lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well back and upright.
2–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Do not place an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back:
Putting an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back is dangerous
because you will be unable to maintain a safe driving posture and the seat belt cannot
function at its full capacity in a collision, which could result in a serious accident, injury or
death.
Do not place objects under the seat:
The object could get stuck and cause the seat to not be fixed securely, and result in an
accident.
Do not stack cargo higher than the seatbacks:
Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatbacks is dangerous. During sudden
braking or a collision, objects can fly around and become projectiles that may hit and
injure passengers.
Make sure luggage and cargo is secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is dangerous as it could move or be crushed during
sudden braking or a collision and cause injury.
Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle is
moving:
Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous. Allowing a child to sit up
on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous. In a sudden
stop or even a minor collision, a child not in a proper seat or child-restraint system and
seat belt could be thrown forward, back or even out of the vehicle resulting in serious
injuries or death. The child in the baggage area could be thrown into other occupants
and cause serious injury.
Never give the car keys to children and do not allow them to play in the vehicle:
Playing with the folding rear seats is dangerous. Once the seatbacks are back up, a child
in the trunk would not be able to get out the way they had entered. If you have small
children, keep the seatbacks locked.
Always leave your car locked and keep the car keys safely away from children:
Leaving your car unlocked or the keys in reach of children is dangerous. Children who find
their way into the trunk through an unlocked rear seatback or an open trunk can become
accidentally locked in the trunk. This could result in death or brain damage from heat
prostration, particularly in the summer. Always lock the doors and the trunk, and as an
added measure, keep the rear seatbacks locked, whether you have children in your home
or not.
2–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
CAUTION
¾When operating a seat, be careful not to put your hands or fingers near the moving parts of
the seat or on the side trim to prevent injury.
¾When moving the seats, make sure there is no cargo in the surrounding area. If the cargo
gets caught it could damage the cargo.
¾(Manual Seat)
When moving the seats forward and rearward or returning a rear-reclined seatback to its
upright position, make sure you hold onto the seatback with your hand while operating. If
the seatback is not held, the seat will move suddenly and could cause injury.
NOTE
yWhen returning a rear seat to its original position, place the seat belt in its normal
position. Verify that the seat belt pulls out and retracts.
y(Power
Seat)
The seat-bottom power adjustment is operated by motors. Avoid extended operation
because excessive use can damage the motors.
yTo
prevent the battery from running down, avoid using the power adjustment when the
engine is stopped. The adjuster uses a large amount of electrical power.
yDo not use the switch to make more than one adjustment at a time.
2–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Front Seat
Seat Operation
Power operation
Seat Slide
(Manual Seat)
To move a seat forward or backward, raise the lever and slide the seat to the desired position
and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
(Power Seat)
To slide the seat, move the slide lifter switch on the outside of the seat to the front or back
and hold it. Release the switch at the desired position.
Height Adjustment
(Manual Seat)
To adjust the seat height, move the lever up or down.
(Power Seat)
To adjust the seat height, move the switch up or down.
Height Adjustment for Front Edge of Seat Bottom (Driver's Power Seat)
To adjust the front height of the seat bottom, raise or lower the front of the slide lifter
switch.
2–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Recline
(Manual Seat)
To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly while raising the lever. Then lean back
to the desired position and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
(Power Seat)
To change the seatback angle, press the front or rear side of the reclining switch. Release the
switch at the desired position.
Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver's Seat)
(Manual Operation)
To increase the seat ¿rmness, move the lever forward. Move the lever backward to decrease
¿rmness.
(Power Operation)
To increase the seat ¿rmness, press and hold the front part of the switch to the desired
position, then release it.
Press the rear part of the switch to decrease ¿rmness.
2–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Warmer*
The front seats are electrically heated. The
ignition must be switched ON.
Press the seat warmer switch while the
ignition is switched ON to operate the seat
warmer. The indicator lights turn on to
indicate that the seat warmer is operating.
The mode changes as follows each time
the seat warmer switch is pressed.
Front
OFF
High
Mid
Low
Rear*
OFF
High
Mid
Low
WARNING
Be careful when using the seat warmer:
The heat from the seat warmer may be
too hot for some people, as indicated
as follows, and could cause a lowtemperature burn.
¾Infants, small children, elderly
people, and physically challenged
people
¾People with delicate skin
¾People who are excessively fatigued
¾People who are intoxicated
¾People who have taken sleep
inducing medicine such as sleeping
pills or cold medicine
Do not use the seat warmer with
anything having high moistureretention ability such as a blanket or
cushion on the seat:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not use the seat warmer even when
taking a short nap in the vehicle:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not place heavy objects with sharp
projections on the seat, or insert
needles or pins into it:
This could cause the seat to become
excessively heated and result in injury
from a minor burn.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
2–7
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
CAUTION
¾Before folding a rear seatback, make
sure that the rear seat warmer switch is
off. If a rear seatback is folded while the
rear seat warmer is in operation, it may
heat the seat excessively and damage
the seat surface.
¾Do not use organic solvents to clean the
seat. It may damage the seat surface
and the heater.
NOTE
yUse the seat warmer when the engine
is running. Leaving the seat warmer
on for long periods with the engine not
running could cause the battery power
to be depleted.
y(Front)
If the ignition is switched off while the
seat warmer is operating (High, Mid or
Low) and then switched ON again, the
seat warmer will automatically operate
at the temperature set before switching
off the ignition.
y(Rear)
When the engine is stopped while
the seat warmers are operating and
then the ignition is switched ON, the
seat warmers will not turn back on
automatically. In addition, the seat
warmer operation stops automatically
after the seat warmers have operated
for about 90 minutes.
To turn the seat warmer back on, press
the switch.
yThe temperature of the seat warmer
cannot be adjusted beyond High, Mid
and Low because the seat warmer is
controlled by a thermostat.
2–8
Driving Position Memory*
The desired driving position can be called
up after programming the position.
The following driving positions can be
programmed.
y
Driver’s
seat position (seat slide, height
adjustment, front edge of seat bottom,
seat recline)
Refer to Seat Operation on page 2-5.
y
Active driving display (display position,
brightness level, display information)
Refer to Active Driving Display on page
4-29.
CAUTION
Do not place fingers or hands around
the bottom of the seat while the seat
memory function is operating. The
seat moves automatically while the
seat memory function is operating and
fingers or hands could get pinched and
injured.
SET button
The driving position can be programmed
or operated using the buttons on the side
of the seat or the key.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
yIndividual seat positions can be
programmed to the two available
programming buttons on the side of the
driver's seat, plus one seat position for
each registered key.
yIf the vehicle has been serviced and
the battery cables disconnected, the
programmed seat positions will have
been erased. Re-program the seat
positions.
Programming
1. Make sure the parking brake is on.
2. (Automatic transaxle)
Make sure the selector lever is in the P
position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Adjust the seat and the active driving
display to the desired driving position.
5. Press the SET button on the seat until a
beep sound is heard one time.
6. Perform one of the following settings
within 5 seconds of completing step 5
above:
Programming using a button on
the side of the seat
Press the button you want to program,
either button 1 or 2, until a beep
sound is heard one time.
y Programming using the key
Press the key button until a beep
sound is heard one time.
y
To move the driving position to a
programmed position
(Using a button on the side of the seat)
1. Make sure the parking brake is on.
2. (Automatic transaxle)
Make sure the selector lever is in the P
position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the programming button for the
driving position you want to call up
(button 1 or 2).
5. A beep sound is heard when the driving
position adjustment is completed.
NOTE
yIf the driving position movement is not
changed, only the beep sounds.
yA seat position can be called up even
with the engine not running.
yThe driving position adjustment is
canceled in the following cases:
yAny
of the seat adjustment switches
is operated.
yThe SET button is pressed.
yProgramming button 1 or 2 is
pressed.
yThe key
button or button is
operated.
yThe vehicle starts moving.
yThe active driving display is
adjusted.
NOTE
If a beep sound is heard three times, the
operation is canceled.
2–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
(Using a programmed key)
1. Unlock the doors by pressing a request
switch or the key button.
2. After unlocking the doors, the seat
position adjustment begins within 40
seconds of opening the driver's door,
and a beep sounds when the operation
is ¿nished.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
4. (Automatic transaxle)
Make sure the selector lever is in the P
position.
5. Start the engine.
6. The active driving display adjustment
begins.
Erasing programmed driving positions
(Erasing the driving positions
programmed to the key)
1. Switch the ignition OFF.
2. Press the SET button on the side of the
seat until a beep sound is heard one
time.
3. After the beep sounds, press the key
button within 5 seconds until a beep
sound is heard one time.
NOTE
If a beep sound is heard three times, the
operation is canceled.
NOTE
yIf there is no driving position movement,
a beep is not heard.
yThe driving position adjustment is
canceled in the following cases:
yAny
of the seat adjustment switches
is operated.
yThe SET button is pressed.
yProgramming button 1 or 2 is
pressed.
yThe key
button or button is
operated.
yThe vehicle starts moving.
yThe active driving display is
adjusted.
2–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Rear Seat
Split Folding
By lowering the rear seatbacks the luggage
compartment space can be expanded.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with occupants
on folded down seatbacks or in the
luggage compartment.
Putting occupants in the luggage
compartment is dangerous because
seat belts cannot be fastened which
could lead to serious injury or death
during sudden braking or a collision.
Do not allow children to play inside the
vehicle with the seatbacks lowered.
Allowing children to play in the
vehicle with the seatbacks folded
down is dangerous. If a child enters
the luggage compartment and the
seatbacks were raised back up, the
child may become trapped in the
luggage compartment which could
lead to an accident.
Tightly secure cargo in the luggage
compartment when it is transported
with the seatbacks folded down.
Driving without tightly securing cargo
and luggage is dangerous as it could
move and become an obstruction to
driving during emergency braking or
a collision resulting in an unexpected
accident.
When transporting cargo, do not allow
the cargo to exceed the height of the
seatbacks.
Transporting cargo stacked higher
than the seatbacks is dangerous as
visibility to the rear and sides of the
vehicle is reduced which could interfere
with driving operations and lead to an
accident.
2–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Lowering the seatbacks
CAUTION
Check the position of a front seat
before folding a rear seatback.
Depending on the position of a front
seat, it may not be possible to fold
a rear seatback all the way down
because it may hit the seatback of
the front seat which could scratch or
damage the front seat or its pocket.
Lower or remove the head restraint on
the rear outboard seat if necessary.
1. (With rear seat warmer)
Turn the rear seat warmer switch off.
Refer to Seat Warmer on page 2-7.
2. Open the trunk lid and pull the lever of
the seatback you want to fold down.
To return the seatback to its upright
position:
WARNING
When returning a seatback to its
upright position, make sure the 3-point
seat belt is not caught in the seatback
and the 3-point seat belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt is used while it is twisted
and caught in the seatback, the seat
belt cannot function at its full capacity,
which could cause serious injury or
death.
Press the seatback rearward and lock it in
place. After returning the seatback to its
upright position, make sure it is securely
locked.
Armrest
The rear armrest in the center of the rear
seatback can be used (no occupant in the
center seat) or placed upright.
3. Open a rear door and fold the rear seat
forward.
WARNING
Never put your hands and fingers
around the moving parts of the seat and
armrest:
Putting your hands and fingers around
the moving parts of the seat and
armrest is dangerous as they could get
injured.
2–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Head Restraints
Front outboard seat
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints on all outboard seats and the
rear center seat. The head restraints are
intended to help protect you and the
passengers from neck injury.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used and
make sure they are properly adjusted:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be seriously
injured in a collision.
Rear outboard seat
Height Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so that the center
is even with the top of the passenger's ears.
Rear center seat
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stopcatch release, then push the head restraint
down.
2–13
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Removal/Installation
To remove the head restraint, pull it up
while pressing the stop-catch.
To install the head restraint, insert the legs
into the holes while pressing the stopcatch.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used and
make sure they are properly installed:
Driving with the head restraints not
installed is dangerous. With no support
behind your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
After installing a head restraint, try
lifting it to make sure that it does not
pull out:
Driving with an unsecured head
restraint is dangerous as the
effectiveness of the head restraint will
be compromised which could cause it
to unexpectedly detach from the seat.
CAUTION
¾When installing a head restraint, make
sure that it is installed correctly with
the front of the head restraint facing
forward. If the head restraint is installed
incorrectly, it could detach from the seat
during a collision and result in injury.
¾The head restraints on each of the front
and rear seats are specialized to each
seat. Do not switch around the head
restraint positions. If a head restraint is
not installed to its correct seat position,
the effectiveness of the head restraint
during a collision will be compromised
which could cause injury.
2–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.
(U.S.A. and Canada)
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way when
not in use.
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a
collision.
However, the front passenger's seat and all rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in
two modes: emergency locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking
mode. While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front
passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make
sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.
WARNING
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown out of
the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same collision, occupants
wearing seat belts would be much safer.
Do not wear twisted seat belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not available to
absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt, which could cause
serious injury or death. So, if your seat belt is twisted, you must straighten the seat belt to
remove any twists and to allow the full width of the belt to be used.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could
be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly
restrained.
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt webbing
of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate protection in a
collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt systems in use during an
accident before they are used again.
2–15
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has been
expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately inspect the seat belt pretensioners
and air bags after any collision. Like the air bags, the seat belt pretensioners and load
limiters will only function once and must be replaced after any collision that caused them
to deploy. A seat belt with an expended pretensioner or load limiter is still better than
wearing no seat belt at all; however, if the seat belt pretensioners and load limiters are
not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase.
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder portion of the seat belt is dangerous. Always make
sure the shoulder portion of the seat belt is positioned across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on your neck, or on your upper arm.
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury. Wear
the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
CAUTION
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep them
clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to "Seat Belt Maintenance"
(page 6-70).
Ring
2–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Pregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for speci¿c
recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your doctor
for any special instructions regarding speci¿c medical conditions.
Emergency Locking Mode
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode.
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision.
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it out
slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again slowly.
(Seat Belt with Automatic Locking Mode)
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it is
switched to automatic locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt
feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it
may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return
the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped
in a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and
then extend it around you again.
Automatic Locking Mode
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will retract
down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child restraint
(page 2-23).
2–17
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Unfastening the Seat Belt
Seat Belt
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out
and check for kinks or twists. Then make
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Fastening the Seat Belt
Seat belt tongue
Seat belt
buckle
Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust the
shoulder belt so that it ¿ts snugly against
your body.
Button
NOTE
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect
it for kinks and twists. If it is still not
retracting properly, have it inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Take up slack
Keep low on
hip bone
Front Shoulder Belt Adjuster
To raise
To lower
Too high
Make sure the adjuster is locked.
2–18
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Warning Systems
If it detects that the occupant seat belt
is unfastened, the warning light or beep
alerts the occupant.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-32.
Refer to Seat Belt Warning Beep on page
7-36.
Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner and Load
Limiting Systems
For optimum protection, the driver and
front passenger seat belts are equipped
with pretensioner and load limiting
systems. For both these systems to work
properly you must wear the seat belt
properly.
Pretensioners:
When a collision is detected, the
pretensioners deploy simultaneously with
the air bags.
For deployment details, refer to the SRS
Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page
2-53).
The front seat belt retractors remove slack
quickly as the air bags are expanding.
Any time the air bags and seat belt
pretensioners have ¿red they must be
replaced.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-32.
Refer to Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Beep on
page 7-36.
(With Front Passenger Occupant
Classi¿cation System)
In addition, the pretensioner system for
the front passenger, like the front and side
passenger air bag, is designed to only
deploy when the front passenger occupant
classi¿cation sensor detects a passenger
sitting on the front passenger's seat.
For details, refer to the front passenger
occupant classi¿cation sensor (page
2-56).
2–19
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Load limiter:
The load limiting system releases belt
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce
belt force on the occupant's chest. While
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has
an automatic mechanical function and
can activate in any accident mode with
suf¿cient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not ¿red,
the load limiting function must be checked
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Wear seat belts only as recommended in
this owner's manual:
Incorrect positioning of the driver
and front passenger seat belts
is dangerous. Without proper
positioning, the pretensioner and
load limiting systems cannot provide
adequate protection in an accident
and this could result in serious injury.
For more details about wearing seat
belts, refer to "Fastening the seat belts"
(page 2-18).
Have your seat belts changed
immediately if the pretensioner or load
limiter has been expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer immediately inspect the seat
belt pretensioners and air bags after
any collision. Like the air bags, the seat
belt pretensioners and load limiters
will only function once and must be
replaced after any collision that caused
them to deploy. A seat belt with an
expended pretensioner or load limiter
is still better than wearing no seat
belt at all; however, if the seat belt
pretensioners and load limiters are not
replaced, the risk of injury in a collision
will increase.
Do not modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices
on the pretensioner system:
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices
is dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable which
would prevent it from activating in an
accident. The occupants or repairers
could be seriously injured.
Properly dispose of the pretensioner
system:
Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with nondeactivated pretensioners is
dangerous. Unless all safety
procedures are followed, injury
could result. Have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer safely dispose of
the pretensioner system or scrap a
pretensioner system equipped vehicle.
NOTE
yThe pretensioner system may not
operate depending on the type of the
collision. For details, refer to the SRS
Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page
2-53).
ySome smoke (non-toxic gas) will
be released when the air bags and
pretensioners deploy. This does not
indicate a ¿re. This gas normally has
no effect on occupants, however, those
with sensitive skin may experience
light skin irritation. If residue from the
deployment of the air bags or the front
pretensioner system gets on the skin
or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as
possible.
2–20
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Extender
If your seat belt is not long enough, even
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
may be available to you at no charge from
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.
This extender will be only for you and for
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold
in the critical moment of a crash.
When ordering an extender, only order
one that provides the necessary additional
length to fasten the seat belt properly.
Please contact your Authorized Mazda
Dealer for more information.
WARNING
Do not use a seat belt extender unless it
is necessary:
Using a seat belt extender when not
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt
will be too long and not fit properly.
In an accident, the seat belt will not
provide adequate protection and you
could be seriously injured. Only use the
extender when it is required to fasten
the seat belt properly.
Do not use an improper extender:
Using a seat belt extender that is for
another person or a different vehicle
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt will
not provide adequate protection and
the user could be seriously injured in
an accident. Only use the extender
provided for you and for the particular
vehicle and seat. NEVER use the
extender in a different vehicle or seat.
If you sell your Mazda, do not leave
your seat belt extender in the vehicle. It
could be used accidentally by the new
owner of the vehicle. After removing
the seat belt extender, discard it. Never
use the seat belt extender in any other
vehicle you may own in the future.
Do not use an extender that is too long:
Using an extender that is too long is
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit
properly. In an accident, the seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and you could be seriously injured.
Do not use the extender or choose
one shorter in length if the distance
between the extender's buckle and the
center of the user's body is less than 15
cm (6 in).
2–21
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Do not leave a seat belt extender
connected to the buckle:
Leaving a seat belt extender connected
to the buckle without using the seat
belt is dangerous. When the seat belt
extender is connected to the driver's
seat belt buckle (or front passenger's
seat belt buckle), the SRS driver's (or
front passenger's) air bag system will
determine that the driver (or front
passenger) is wearing the seat belt
even if the driver (or front passenger)
is not wearing it. This condition could
cause the driver's (or front passenger's)
air bag to not activate correctly and
result in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Always wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
Do not use the seat belt extender when
installing a child-restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat:
Using a seat belt extender to fasten
a child-restraint system on any seat
is dangerous. Always follow the
child-restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions and never use
a seat belt extender.
NOTE
When not in use, remove the seat belt
extender and store it in the vehicle. If the
seat belt extender is left connected, the
seat belt extender might get damaged
as it will not retract with the rest of the
seat belt and can easily fall out of the
door when not in use and be damaged. In
addition, the seat belt warning light will
not illuminate and function properly.
2–22
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Child-Restraint Precautions
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for speci¿c requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the
child is seated on the center seat.
Statistics con¿rm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other
child-restraint systems.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
front passenger occupant classi¿cation sensor works as a part of the supplemental restraint
system. This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the
front passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates.
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear
seats which are the best place for children.
For more details, refer to "Front passenger occupant classi¿cation sensor" (page 2-56).
2–23
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Use the correct size child-restraint system:
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly
restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and size. If not, the
child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system
buckled down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure any
child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it
with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint
systems and the corresponding tether anchor.
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a sudden
stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or other
occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag forces that
could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be slammed into an
adult, causing injury to both child and adult.
2–24
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward
resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
(Except Mexico)
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have the following warning label. The warning
label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger
seat at any time.
(Mexico)
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have the following warning label. The warning
label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger
seat at any time.
2–25
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unless it
is unavoidable:
In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to the
child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is
unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous
under certain conditions (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System):
Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger occupant classification sensor. Even with
the front passenger occupant classification sensor, if you must use the front passenger
seat to seat a child, using a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under the
following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying and
could result in serious injury or death to the child.
¾The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when
seating a child in the child-restraint system.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
¾A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger
seatback.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
¾The seat is washed.
¾Liquids are spilled on the seat.
¾The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
¾The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
¾Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.
¾An electric device is put on the front passenger's seat.
¾An additional electrical device, such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of the
front passenger seat.
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
2–26
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with
side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of the
front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both
sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint system
is used. The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause serious injury
or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over or against the front door
could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and the additional side air bag that comes out of the
front seat, the rear seat is always a better location for children. Take special care not to
allow a child to lean over or against the side window, even if the child is seated in a childrestraint system.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could
be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly
restrained.
Always remove the child-restraint system from the rear seat before operating the
remote handle levers for the rear seat:
Operating the remote handle levers while a rear-facing child-restraint system is in the
rear seat is dangerous. It could cause injury to a child seated in the child-restraint system
when the seatback suddenly flips forward.
CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during warm
weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your child touches
them.
NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. When using these anchors to secure a
child-restraint system, refer to "Using LATCH Lower Anchor" (page 2-36).
2–27
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Child-Restraint System
Installation
Child seat
A child seat restrains a child's body using
the harness.
Child-Restraint System Types
In this owner's manual, explanation of
child-restraint systems is provided for the
following three types of popular childrestraint systems: infant seat, child seat,
booster seat.
NOTE
yInstallation position is determined
by the type of child-restraint system.
Always read the manufacturer's
instructions and this owner's manual
carefully.
yDue to variations in the design of child
restraint systems, vehicle seats and
seat belts, all child-restraint systems
may not ¿t all seating positions. Before
purchasing a child-restraint system, it
should be tested in the speci¿c vehicle
seating position (or positions) where it
is intended to be used. If a previously
purchased child-restraint system does
not ¿t, you may need to purchase a
different one that will.
Booster seat
A booster seat is a child restraint accessory
designed to improve the ¿t of the seat belt
system around the child's body.
Infant seat
An infant seat provides restraint by
bracing the infant's head, neck and back
against the seating surface.
2–28
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Installing Child-Restraint
Systems
Accident statistics reveal that a child is
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's
seat is clearly the worst choice for any
child under 12, and with rear-facing childrestraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to
air bags.
NOTE
Even if your vehicle is equipped with
front passenger occupant classi¿cation
sensor (page 2-56), which automatically
deactivates the front passenger air bag, a
rear seat is the safest place for a child of
any age or size.
Some child-restraint systems now come
with tethers and therefore must be
installed on the seats that take tethers
to be effective. In your Mazda, tethered
child-restraint systems can only be
accommodated in the three positions on
the rear seat.
Some child-restraint systems also employ
specially designed LATCH attachments;
refer to "Using LATCH Lower Anchor"
(page 2-36).
WARNING
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:
Installation of a tether equipped
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat defeats the safety
design of the system and will result in
an increased chance of serious injury if
the child-restraint system goes forward
without benefit of being tethered.
Place tether equipped child-restraint
systems where there are tether
anchors.
Anchor Bracket
Anchor brackets for securing childrestraint systems are equipped in the
vehicle. Locate each anchor position using
the illustration.
To install a child-restraint system, remove
the head restraint. Always follow the
instruction manual accompanying the
child-restraint system.
Anchor bracket location
Use the indicated anchor bracket locations
when installing a child-restraint system
equipped with a tether.
For left
For center *1
For right
Anchor bracket
*1 Except Mexico
2–29
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page
2-13.
Using Automatic Locking Mode*
Follow these instructions when using
a child-restraint system, unless you are
attaching a LATCH-equipped childrestraint system to the rear LATCH lower
anchors. Refer to “Using LATCH Lower
Anchor” (page 2-36).
Tether strap
Anchor bracket
Tether strap
NOTE
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
If you are not sure whether you have a
LATCH system or tether, check in the
child-restraint system manufacturer's
instructions and follow them accordingly.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may use LATCH system instead
of seat belts or if the belt goes across the
child's chest, may recommend against
using automatic locking mode.
1. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
2. Remove the head restraint.
Refer to Head Restraints on page
2-13.
Anchor bracket
2–30
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
3. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions
on the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
4. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
NOTE
Inspect this function before each use of
the child-restraint system. You should
not be able to pull the shoulder belt out
of the retractor while the system is in the
automatic locking mode. When you remove
the child-restraint system, be sure the
belt fully retracts to return the system to
emergency locking mode before occupants
use the seat belts.
6. If your child-restraint system requires
the use of a tether strap, refer to the
manufacturer's instructions to hook and
tighten the tether strap.
WARNING
5. Push the child-restraint system ¿rmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the
belt retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will be
heard during retraction if the system is
in the automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat this step.
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or tether
anchor and result in injury.
2–31
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Tether strap
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page
2-13.
If You Must Use the Front Seat for
Children
Anchor bracket
Tether strap
Anchor bracket
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
If you cannot put all children in the rear
seat, at least put the smallest children
in the rear and be sure the largest child
up front uses the shoulder belt over the
shoulder.
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat whether
your vehicle is equipped with a occupant
classi¿cation sensor or not.
This seat is also not set up for tethered
child-restraint systems, put them in one of
the rear seat positions set up with tether
anchors.
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint
system cannot be secured in the front
passenger's seat and should be used in the
rear seat.
Do not allow anyone to sleep against the
side window since your vehicle has side
and curtain air bags, it could cause serious
injuries to an out of position occupant.
As children more often sleep in cars,
it is better to put them in the rear seat.
If installing the child-restraint system
on the front seat is unavoidable, follow
these instructions when using a frontfacing child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat.
2–32
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
NOTE
yTo check if your front seats have side air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air
bag will have a "SRS AIRBAG" tag on
the outboard shoulder of the front seats.
yTo check if your vehicle has curtain air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain
air bag will have an "SRS AIRBAG"
marking on the window pillars along
the roof edge.
WARNING
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible if installing a
front-facing child-restraint system on it
is unavoidable:
As your vehicle has front air bags and
doubly so because your vehicle has
side air bags, a front-facing childrestraint system should be put on the
front passenger seat only when it is
unavoidable.
Even if the front passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light
illuminates, always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force
of a deploying air bag could cause
serious injury or death to the child.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat with an air bag
that could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems
on the front seat are particularly
dangerous.
Even in a moderate collision, the
child-restraint system can be hit
by a deploying air bag and moved
violently backward resulting in
serious injury or death to the child.
Even though you may feel assured
that the front passenger air bag will
not deploy based on the fact that the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates, you should
not use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat.
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean
over or against the side window of a
vehicle with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean
over or against the side window, the
area of the front passenger seat, the
front and rear window pillars and the
roof edge along both sides from which
the side and curtain air bags deploy,
even if a child-restraint system is used.
The impact of inflation from a side or
curtain air bag could cause serious
injury or death to an out of position
child. Furthermore, leaning over or
against the front door could block the
side and curtain air bags and eliminate
the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and
the additional side air bag that comes
out of the front seat, the rear seat is
always a better location for children.
Take special care not to allow a child to
lean over or against the side window,
even if the child is seated in a childrestraint system.
2–33
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page
2-13.
Front Passenger's Seat Child-Restraint
System Installation (With Front
Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation
System)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off.
2. Slide the seat as far back as possible.
3. Remove the head restraint.
4. Place the child-restraint system on the
seat without putting your weight on
the seat and fasten the seat belt. See
the manufacturer's instructions on the
child-restraint system for belt routing
instructions.
5. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
6. Push the child-restraint system ¿rmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the
belt retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will
be heard during retraction if the system
is in automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat the previous step and also this
one.
2–34
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
NOTE
yInspect this function before each use of
the child-restraint system. You should
not be able to pull the shoulder belt
out of the retractor while the system is
in the automatic locking mode. When
you remove the child-restraint system,
be sure the belt fully retracts to return
the system to emergency locking mode
before occupants use the seat belts.
yFollow
the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may not employ seat belts
which are in automatic locking mode.
7. Seat your child safely in the childrestraint system and secure the child
according to the instructions from the
child-restraint system manufacturer.
8. Switch the ignition ON and make sure
the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates after
installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not
illuminate, remove the child-restraint
system, switch the ignition to OFF, and
then re-install the child-restraint system
(page 2-56).
WARNING
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat if the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light does not illuminate:
While it is always better to install any
child-restraint system on the rear seat,
it is imperative that a child-restraint
system ONLY be used on the front
passenger seat if the deactivation
indicator light illuminates when the
child is seated in the child-restraint
system (page 2-56). Seating a child
in a child-restraint system installed
on the front passenger seat with the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
dangerous. If this indicator light does
not illuminate, this means that the
front passenger front and side air
bags, and seat belt pretensioner are
ready for deployment. If an accident
were to deploy an air bag, a child in
a child-restraint system sitting in the
front passenger seat could be seriously
injured or killed. If the indicator light
does not illuminate after seating a
child in a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, seat a child
in a child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
2–35
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Using LATCH Lower Anchor
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you must
use it to better assure your child's safety.
WARNING
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure the
child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:
Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.
In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint system
attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the seat
position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is occupied,
use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow the childrestraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the seat just as you
would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in an improperly secured
seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or
latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint systems.
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH childrestraint system:
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and the
child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could move in a
sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants.
When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no seat belts or foreign
objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
2–36
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Installation on rear outboard seats
1. First, adjust the front seat to allow
clearance between the child-restraint
system and the front seat (page
2-5).
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
3. Expand the area between the seat
bottom and the seatback slightly to
verify the locations of the LATCH
lower anchors.
6. If your child-restraint system came
equipped with a tether, that means it is
very important to properly secure the
tether for child safety. Please carefully
follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions when
installing tethers.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or tether
anchor and result in injury.
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
NOTE
The markings above the LATCH lower
anchors indicate the locations of the
LATCH lower anchors for the attachment
of a child-restraint system.
4. Remove the head restraint.
Refer to Head Restraints on page
2-13.
5. Secure the child-restraint system
using BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instruction. Pull on the
child-restraint to be sure both anchors
are engaged.
Tether strap
Anchor bracket
2–37
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page
2-13.
Installation on rear center seat
The LATCH lower anchors at the center
of the rear seat are much further apart
than the sets of LATCH lower anchors
for child-restraint system installation at
other seating positions. Child-restraint
systems with rigid LATCH attachments
cannot be installed on the center seating
position. Some LATCH equipped childrestraint systems can be placed in the
center position and will reach the nearest
LATCH lower anchors which are 443 mm
(17.4 in) apart. LATCH compatible childrestraint systems (with attachments on
belt webbing) can be used at this seating
position only if the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions state that the
child-restraint system can be installed to
LATCH lower anchors that are 443 mm
(17.4 in) apart. Do not attach two childrestraint systems to the same LATCH
lower anchor. If your child-restraint
system has a tether, it must also be used
for your child's optimum safety.
The procedure for installation on the rear
outboard seats is the same.
LATCH lower anchor location
2–38
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Always remove the head restraint and
install child-restraint system:
Installing a child-restraint system
without removing the head restraint is
dangerous. The child-restraint system
cannot be installed correctly which
may result in death or injury to the
child in a collision.
Tether strap
Anchor bracket
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always install the head restraint and
adjust it to the appropriate position
after removing the child-restraint
system:
Driving with the head restraint
removed is dangerous as impact to the
occupant's head cannot be prevented
during emergency braking or in a
collision, which could result in a serious
accident, injury or death.
Refer to Head Restraints on page
2-13.
2–39
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include different types of air bags.
Please verify the different types of air bags which are equipped on your vehicle by
locating the “SRS AIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators are visible in the area
where the air bags are installed.
The air bags are installed in the following locations:
y
The
steering wheel hub (driver air bag)
front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)
y
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)
y
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)
y
The
Vehicles with the Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System have a sensor which
detects an impending roll-over accident.
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection
in certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways:
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
y
Keep
the occupant from being thrown into an inÀating air bag.
the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
inÀation, such as rear impact.
y
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal, near frontal or side collisions or roll-over
accidents that are not severe enough to activate the air bags.
y
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
y
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.
y
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
y
Reduce
2–40
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
If your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger occupant classi¿cation system,
refer to the Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System (page 2-56) for details.
If your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classi¿cation system, the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates for a speci¿ed time after the
ignition is switched ON.
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint
system (page 2-23).
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow
the installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous. Alone,
air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be expected to
inflate only in the first accident, such as frontal, near frontal or side collisions or roll-over
accidents that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be hit
by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child is more
likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in moderate collision to the
front-passenger side of the vehicle. Whenever possible, always secure a child 12 years and
under on the rear seats with an appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and
size.
2–41
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward
resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands or
feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags inflate with
great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too close. The driver
should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The front seat passenger
should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should adjust their seats as
far back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn
properly.
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them, or sleeping up
against the door or hanging out the windows is extremely dangerous. The side and
curtain air bags inflate with great force and speed directly expanding along the door
on the side the car is hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the
door or leaning against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front
seatbacks. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting in the center of the
seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air bags
deploy:
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere with air
bag inflation and injure the occupants.
2–42
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is dangerous.
Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front seats.
Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules in your
front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge
and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the curtain
air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge,
impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting the air bag in
a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free to
deploy in the event of a side collision or roll-over accident.
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated:
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags have
inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could get burned.
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar, bull
bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The air bag
crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate unexpectedly,
or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident. Front occupants could
be seriously injured.
Do not modify the suspension:
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the suspension is
modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision or roll-over accident
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious
injuries.
2–43
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
To prevent false detection by the air bag sensor system, heed the following:
¾Do not use tires or wheels other than those specified for your Mazda:
Use of any tire or wheel other than those specified for your Mazda (page 9-8) is
dangerous. Use of such wheels will prevent the vehicle's accident detections system
from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or
unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
¾Do not overload your vehicle:
Overloading your vehicle is dangerous as it could prevent the air bag crash sensor
system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect
or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries. The gross axle
weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are
on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver's door frame. Do not exceed
these ratings.
¾Do not drive the vehicle off-road:
Driving your Mazda off-road is dangerous because the vehicle has not been designed
to do so. Driving the vehicle off-road could prevent the air bag crash sensor system
from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or
unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
Do not modify a front door or leave any damage unrepaired. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect a damaged front door:
Modifying a front door or leaving any damage unrepaired is dangerous. Each front
door has a side crash sensor as a component of the supplemental restraint system. If
holes are drilled in a front door, a door speaker is left removed, or a damaged door is left
unrepaired, the sensor could be adversely affected causing it to not detect the pressure
of an impact correctly during a side collision. If a sensor does not detect a side impact
correctly, the side and curtain air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner may not
operate normally which could result in serious injury to occupants.
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is dangerous.
You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make any modifications
to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim, badges, or anything
else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra electrical equipment on or
near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda Dealer can provide the special
care needed in the removal and installation of front seats. It is important to protect the air
bag wiring and connections to assure that the bags do not accidentally deploy, and that
the front passenger occupant classification system and the seats retain an undamaged
air bag connection.
2–44
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the supplemental
restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats.
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
components:
Expended or damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components must be
replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them. Only a trained
Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that they will work in
any subsequent accident. Driving with an expended or damaged air bag or pretensioner
unit will not afford you the necessary protection in the event of any subsequent accident
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not remove interior air bag parts:
Removing any components such as the front seats, front dashboard, the steering wheel
or parts on the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge, containing air bag
parts or sensors is dangerous. These parts contain essential air bag components. The air
bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer remove these parts.
Properly dispose of the air bag system:
Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremely
dangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury could result. Have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer safely dispose of the air bag system or scrap an air bag
equipped vehicle.
2–45
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
yIf it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modi¿ed to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certi¿ed physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to
“Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)” (page 8-2).
yWhen an air bag deploys, a loud inÀation noise can be heard and some smoke will be
released. Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause
light skin injuries on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
yShould you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems
and that familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is
important.
yThis highly-visible label is displayed which warns against the use of a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat.
(Except Mexico)
(Mexico)
2–46
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System Components
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
(Without Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
2–47
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Driver/Front passenger inÀators and air bags
Roll-over sensor*, crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Seat belt pretensioners (page 2-19)
Front air bag sensors
Side crash sensors
Air bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 4-33)
Side and curtain inÀators and air bags
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light* (page 2-56)
Front passenger occupant classi¿cation sensor* (page 2-56)
Front passenger occupant classi¿cation module*
2–48
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
How the SRS Air Bags Work
Your Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags. SRS air bags are
designed to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident.
The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to the
seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly.
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
The front seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near
frontal collisions.
In addition, the pretensioners operate when a side collision (only on the side in which the
collision occurs) or a roll-over accident is detected. The pretensioners operate differently
depending on what types of air bags are equipped. For more details about seat belt
pretensioner operation, refer to the SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page 2-53).
Driver Air Bag
The driver's air bag is mounted in the steering wheel.
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, the
driver's air bag inÀates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver's head or chest
caused by directly hitting the steering wheel.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
The driver's dual-stage air bag controls air bag inÀation in two energy stages. During an
impact of moderate severity, the driver's air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas during
more severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.
2–49
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front Passenger Air Bag
The front passenger air bag is mounted in the front passenger dashboard.
The inÀation mechanism for the front passenger air bag is the same as the driver's air bag.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
In addition, the front passenger air bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger
occupant classi¿cation sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat. For
details, refer to the front passenger occupant classi¿cation system (page 2-56).
2–50
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Side Air Bags
The side air bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
system inÀates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit. The side
air bag inÀates quickly to reduce injury to the driver or front passenger's chest caused by
directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
In addition, the front passenger side bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger
occupant classi¿cation sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat. For
details, refer to the front passenger occupant classi¿cation system (page 2-56).
2–51
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Curtain Air Bags
The curtain air bags are mounted in the front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge
along both sides.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
curtain air bag inÀates quickly and helps to reduce injury mainly to the rear outboard
passenger's head caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53).
In a side impact:
Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle will cause the curtain air bag on that
side only to inÀate.
Only one side curtain air bag will deploy on the
side of the vehicle that receives the force of an
impact.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
In a roll-over:
In response to a vehicle roll-over, both curtain air bags inÀate.
Both curtain air bags will deploy after
the roll-over accident is detected.
Warning Light/Beep
A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-32.
Refer to Warning Sound is Activated on page 7-36.
2–52
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria
This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of
collision.
(The illustrations are the representative cases of collisions.)
Types of collision
A severe frontal/near frontal
collision
A severe side
collision*2
A roll-over/near
roll-over*3
Front
seat belt
pretensioner
X*1 (both sides)
X*1 (impact side
only)
X*1 (both sides)
Driver air
bag
X
Front
passenger
air bag
X*1
A rear collision
SRS
equipment
Side air bag*
X*1 (impact side
only)
Curtain air
bag*
X (impact side
only)
No air bag and
front seat belt
pretensioner will be
activated in a rear
collision.
X (both sides)
X: The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.
*1 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
The front passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to deploy when the front
passenger occupant classi¿cation sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat.
*2 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side/curtain air bags deploy (only on the side in which the
collision occurs).
*3 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
In a roll-over accident, the seat belt pretensioners and the curtain air bags deploy.
NOTE
In a frontal offset collision, the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy
depending on the direction, angle, and rate of impact.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
2–53
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Limitations to SRS Air Bag
In severe collisions such as those described previously in "SRS Air Bag Deployment
Criteria", the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents,
the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity.
Limitations to front/near front collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of front/near front collisions that may not be
detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Impacts involving trees or poles
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate
2–54
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Limitations to side collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected as severe
enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Side impacts involving trees or poles
Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles
Roll-over (Without Driver and Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
Limitations to roll-over detection:
The following illustration is an example of an accident that may not be detected as a rollover accident. Therefore, the front seat belt pretensioners and curtain air bags may not
deploy.
Pitch end over end
2–55
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System*
First, please read "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions" (page 2-40)
carefully.
Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation Sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classi¿cation sensor as a part
of the supplemental restraint system. This sensor is equipped in the front passenger's seat
cushion. This sensor measures the electrostatic capacity of the front passenger's seat. The
SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner system from deploying if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator
light turns on.
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag,
the system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt
pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns
on. Refer to the following table for the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
illumination conditions.
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on
according to the following table.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light Àashes and the front passenger
air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible malfunction.
If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system
will not deploy.
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
This indicator light turns on to remind you that the front passenger front and side air bags
and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.
2–56
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
If the front passenger occupant classi¿cation sensor is normal, the indicator light turns
on when the ignition is switched ON. The light turns off after a few seconds. Then, the
indicator light turns on or is off under the following conditions:
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart
Front passenger air
bag deactivation
indicator light
Front passenger front
and side air bags
Front passenger seat
belt pretensioner
system
Empty (Not occupied)
On
Deactivated
Deactivated
A child less than 1 year old is
seated in a child-restraint system
On
Deactivated
Deactivated
On or off
Deactivated or ready
Deactivated or ready
Off
Ready
Ready
Condition detected by the
front passenger occupant
classi¿cation system
Child
*1
Adult*2
*1 The occupant classi¿cation sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child-restraint system, or a
junior seat depending on the child's physical size and seated posture.
*2 If a smaller adult sits on the front passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending
on the person's physique.
The curtain air bag is ready for inÀating regardless of what the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart indicates.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition
is switched ON and does not turn on as indicated in the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the front passenger
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work
properly in an accident.
2–57
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
WARNING
Do not allow an occupant in the front passenger's seat to sit with a posture which
makes it difficult for the front passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the
occupant correctly:
Sitting in the front passenger's seat with a posture which makes it difficult for the front
passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the occupant correctly is dangerous.
If the front passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect the occupant sitting
on the front passenger's seat correctly, the front passenger front and side air bags and
pretensioner system may not operate (deploy) or they may operate (deploy) accidentally.
The front passenger will not have the supplementary protection of the air bags or the
accidental operation (deployment) of the air bags could result in serious injury or death.
Under the following conditions, the front passenger occupant classification sensor
cannot detect a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat correctly and the
deployment/non-deployment of the air bags cannot be controlled as indicated in the
front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart. For example:
¾A front passenger is seated as shown in the following figure:
¾A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.
¾Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the front
passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat bottom.
2–58
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
¾An object, such as a seat cushion, is put on the front passenger's seat or between the
passenger's back and the seatback.
¾A seat cover is put on the front passenger's seat.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
¾A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.
¾Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
¾The seat is washed.
¾Liquids are spilled on the seat.
¾The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
¾The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
¾Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.
¾An electric device is put on the front passenger's seat.
¾An additional electrical device, such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of the
front passenger seat.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on.
CAUTION
¾To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the sensor in
the front seat cushion:
¾Do not place sharp objects on the front seat cushion or leave heavy luggage on them.
¾Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.
¾To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:
¾Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
¾If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint system
properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page 2-30).
2–59
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
yThe system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger
front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.
yThe front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on repeatedly if luggage
or other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's
interior changes suddenly.
yThe front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on for 10 seconds if the
electrostatic capacity on the front passenger seat changes.
yThe air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light might turn on if the front
passenger seat receives a severe impact.
yIf the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on after installing
a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, ¿rst, re-install your child-restraint
system according to the procedure in this owner's manual. Then, if the front passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light still does not turn on, install the child-restraint system on
the rear seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
yIf the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on when an occupant
is seated directly in the front passenger seat, have the passenger re-adjust their posture
by sitting with their feet on the Àoor, and then re-fastening the seat belt. If the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light remains turned on, move the passenger to
the rear seat. If sitting in the rear seat is not possible, slide the front passenger seat as far
back as possible. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
2–60
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Constant Monitoring
The following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system:
y
Crash
sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
air bag sensors
y
Air bag modules
y
Side crash sensors
y
Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner system warning light
y
Front seat belt pretensioners
y
Related wiring
y
Front
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classi¿cation System)
y
Front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
passenger occupant classi¿cation sensor
y
Front passenger occupant classi¿cation module
y
Front
The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the
ignition is switched ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.
2–61
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
MEMO
2–62
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
3
Before Driving
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
Keys ...................................................... 3-2
Keys ............................................... 3-2
Keyless Entry System .................... 3-3
Advanced Keyless Entry System ..... 3-10
Advanced Keyless Entry
System .......................................... 3-10
Operational Range ....................... 3-11
Doors and Locks................................ 3-12
Door Locks................................... 3-12
Trunk Lid ..................................... 3-20
Inside Trunk Release Lever* ........ 3-23
Fuel and Emission ............................. 3-25
Fuel and Engine Exhaust
Precautions ................................... 3-25
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ................ 3-28
Steering Wheel................................... 3-30
Steering Wheel ............................. 3-30
Security System ................................. 3-40
Modi¿cation and Add-On
Equipment .................................... 3-40
Immobilizer System ..................... 3-40
Theft-Deterrent System*............... 3-42
Driving Tips ....................................... 3-44
Break-In Period ............................ 3-44
Saving Fuel and Protection of the
Environment ................................. 3-44
Hazardous Driving ....................... 3-45
Floor Mat ..................................... 3-45
Rocking the Vehicle ..................... 3-46
Winter Driving ............................. 3-46
Driving In Flooded Area .............. 3-48
Overloading.................................. 3-48
Driving on Uneven Road ............. 3-49
Towing ................................................ 3-50
Trailer Towing .............................. 3-50
Recreational Towing .................... 3-50
Mirrors ............................................... 3-31
Mirrors ......................................... 3-31
Windows............................................. 3-34
Power Windows ........................... 3-34
Moonroof * ................................... 3-37
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
3–1
Before Driving
Keys
Keys
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with
children and keep them in a place where
your children will not find or play with
them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. Children may find these keys to
be an interesting toy to play with and
could cause the power windows or
other controls to operate, or even make
the vehicle move.
CAUTION
¾Because the key (transmitter) uses
low-intensity radio waves, it may not
function correctly under the following
conditions:
¾The key is carried with
communication devices such as
cellular phones.
¾The key contacts or is covered by a
metal object.
¾The key is near electronic devices such
as personal computers.
¾Non-Mazda genuine electronic
equipment is installed in the vehicle.
¾There is equipment which discharges
radio waves near the vehicle.
¾The key (transmitter) may consume
battery power excessively if it receives
high-intensity radio waves. Do not place
the key near electronic devices such as
televisions or personal computers.
¾To avoid damage to the key
(transmitter), DO NOT:
¾Drop the key.
¾Get the key wet.
¾Disassemble the key.
¾Expose the key to high temperatures
on places such as the dashboard or
hood, under direct sunlight.
¾Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
¾Place heavy objects on the key.
¾Put the key in an ultrasonic cleaner.
¾Put any magnetized objects close to
the key.
3–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Keys
A code number is stamped on the plate
attached to the key set; detach this plate
and store it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle) for use if you need to make a
replacement key (auxiliary key).
Also write down the code number and
keep it in a separate safe and convenient
place, but not in the vehicle.
If your key (auxiliary key) is lost, consult
your Authorized Mazda Dealer and have
your code number ready.
NOTE
The driver must carry the key to ensure the
system functions properly.
Transmitter
Auxiliary key
Keyless Entry System
This system uses the key buttons to
remotely lock and unlock the doors and
the trunk lid, and opens the trunk lid.
The system can start the engine without
having to take the key out of your purse or
pocket.
It can also help you signal for attention or
help.
Operating the theft-deterrent system is
also possible on theft-deterrent systemequipped vehicles.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning lights
or beeps.
For vehicles with the type A instrument
cluster, check the displayed message for
more information and, if necessary, have
the vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer, according to the indication.
y
KEY Warning
Light (Red)
to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-32.
y
Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep
Refer to Ignition Not Switched Off
(STOP) Warning Beep on page 7-37.
y
Key Removed from Vehicle Warning
Beep
Refer to Key Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep on page 7-37.
Refer
Key code number plate
To use the auxiliary key, pull out the
auxiliary key from the transmitter while
pressing the knob.
Knob
If you have a problem with the key,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If your key is lost or stolen, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make the
lost or stolen key inoperative.
3–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Keys
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE
yThe keyless entry system operation may
vary due to local conditions.
yThe keyless entry system is fully
operational (door lock/unlock) when the
ignition is switched off. The system does
not operate if the ignition is switched to
any position other than off.
yIf the key does not operate when
pressing a button or the operational
range becomes too small, the battery
may be weak. To install a new battery,
refer to Key Battery Replacement (page
6-38).
yBattery life is about one year. Replace
the battery with a new one if the KEY
indicator light (green) Àashes in the
instrument cluster (for vehicles with
a type A instrument cluster (page
4-32), messages are displayed in
the instrument cluster). Replacing
the battery about once a year is
recommended because the KEY warning
light/indicator light may not illuminate
or Àash depending on the rate of battery
depletion.
yAdditional
keys can be obtained at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to
6 keys can be used with the keyless
functions per vehicle. Bring all keys
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer when
additional keys are required.
3–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Keys
Transmitter
Operation indicator light
Operation buttons
NOTE
y(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights Àash when
the theft-deterrent system is armed or
turned off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page
3-42.
y(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound can be heard for
con¿rmation when the doors are locked/
unlocked using the key. If you prefer, the
beep sound can be turned off.
The volume of the beep sound can also
be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the trunk lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
LOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer.
All of the doors lock and the beep
sound activates at the currently set
volume. The setting changes each time
the LOCK button on the key is pressed
and the beep sound activates at the set
volume. (If the beep sound has been
set to not activate, it will not activate.)
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the trunk lid.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
LOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
3–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Keys
The operation indicator light Àashes when
the buttons are pressed.
Lock button
To lock the doors , press the lock button
and the hazard warning lights will Àash
once.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard once.
To con¿rm that all doors have been
locked, press the lock button again within
5 seconds. If they are closed and locked,
the horn will sound.
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button and the hazard warning
lights will Àash twice.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard twice.
To unlock all doors , press the unlock
button again within 3 seconds and two
more beep sounds will be heard.
NOTE
yThe doors can be locked by pressing the
lock button while any other door or the
trunk lid is open. The hazard warning
lights will not Àash.
When the lock button is pressed while
any door is open and then the door is
closed, all the doors are locked.
yCon¿rm that all doors are locked
visually or audibly by use of the double
click.
yMake sure all doors are locked after
pressing the button.
y(With theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are locked by pressing
the lock button on the key while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the
hazard warning lights will Àash once to
indicate that the system is armed.
3–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Keys
NOTE
yThe system can be set to unlock all
doors by performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the trunk lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
UNLOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer (the sound of
the doors locking/unlocking can be
heard).
After this, the system switches the
setting each time the UNLOCK
button is pressed (the sound of the
doors locking/unlocking can be
heard).
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the trunk lid.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
UNLOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
y(Auto
re-lock function)
After unlocking with the key, all doors
will automatically lock if any of the
following operations are not performed
within about 60 seconds. If your
vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,
the hazard warning lights will Àash for
con¿rmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yA
door or the trunk lid is opened.
ignition is switched to any
position other than off.
yThe
y(With
theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are unlocked by
pressing the unlock button on the key
while the theft-deterrent system is
turned off, the hazard warning lights
will Àash twice to indicate that the
system is turned off.
Trunk button
To open the trunk lid, press and hold the
trunk button until the trunk lid opens.
3–7
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Keys
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, press and hold the panic button
to activate the vehicle's alarm. Call
emergency services if necessary.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether any
door or the trunk lid is open or closed.
(Turning on the alarm)
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the following
will occur:
y
The
y
The
horn sounds intermittently.
hazard warning lights Àash.
Operational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
Starting the Engine
NOTE
yStarting the engine may be possible
even if the key is outside of the vehicle
and extremely close to a door and
window, however, always start the
engine from the driver's seat.
If the vehicle is started and the key
is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will
not restart after it is shut off and the
ignition is switched to off.
yThe trunk is out of the assured
operational range, however, if the key
(transmitter) is operable the engine will
start.
With the advanced keyless function
Interior antenna
(Turning off the alarm)
The alarm stops by pressing any button on
the key.
Operational range
3–8
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Keys
Without the advanced keyless function
Interior antenna
Operational range
NOTE
The engine may not start if the key is
placed in the following areas:
yAround
the dashboard
the storage compartments such as
the glove compartment or the center
console
yOn the rear parcel shelf
yIn
Key Suspend Function
If a key is left in the vehicle, the
functions of the key left in the vehicle are
temporarily suspended to prevent theft of
the vehicle.
To restore the functions, press the unlock
button on the functions-suspended key in
the vehicle.
3–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
Advanced Keyless Entry
System
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may affect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your physician
if radio waves from the key will affect
the device.
The advanced keyless function allows you
to lock/unlock the door , or open the trunk
lid while carrying the key.
NOTE
The advanced keyless entry system
functions can be deactivated to prevent
any possible adverse effect on a user
wearing a pacemaker or other medical
device. If the system is deactivated, you
will be unable to start the engine by
carrying the key. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer for details. If the advanced
keyless entry system has been deactivated,
you can start the engine by following the
procedure indicated when the key battery
goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead on page 4-8.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning beeps.
y
Request
switch Inoperable Warning
Beep
Refer to Request Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function) on page 7-38.
y
Key Left-in-Trunk Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-luggage
Compartment Warning Beep (With the
advanced keyless function) on page
7-38.
y
Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-vehicle Warning
Beep (With the advanced keyless
function) on page 7-38.
3–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
Operational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
NOTE
When the battery power is low, or in
places where there are high-intensity radio
waves or noise, the operational range
may become narrower or the system may
not operate. For determining battery
replacement, Refer to Keyless Entry
System on page 3-3.
Locking, Unlocking the Doors
80cm (31in)
Exterior antenna
NOTE
yThe system may not operate if you
are too close to the windows or door
handles.
yIf the key is left in the following areas
and you leave the vehicle, the doors
may be locked depending on the radio
wave conditions even if the key is left in
the vehicle.
yAround
the dashboard
the storage compartments such as
the glove compartment or the center
console
yOn the rear parcel shelf
yNext to a communication device such
as a mobile phone
yIn
Opening the Trunk Lid
Exterior antenna
80cm (31in)
Operational range
80cm (31in)
Operational range
3–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
WARNING
Always take all children and pets with
you or leave a responsible person with
them:
Leaving a child or a pet unattended in
a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot
weather, temperatures inside a vehicle
can become high enough to cause
brain damage or even death.
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with
children and keep them in a place where
your children will not find or play with
them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed.
Keep all doors locked when driving:
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle
are dangerous. Passengers can fall out
if a door is accidentally opened and
can more easily be thrown out in an
accident.
After closing the doors, always verify
that they are securely closed:
Doors not securely closed are
dangerous, if the vehicle is driven with
a door not securely closed, the door
could open unexpectedly resulting in
an accident.
Always confirm the safety around the
vehicle before opening a door:
Suddenly opening a door is dangerous.
A passing vehicle or a pedestrian could
be hit and cause an accident.
CAUTION
Always confirm the conditions around
the vehicle before opening/closing the
doors and use caution during strong
winds or when parked on an incline.
Not being aware of the conditions
around the vehicle is dangerous
because fingers could get caught in
the door or a passing pedestrian could
be hit, resulting in an unexpected
accident or injury.
Always close all the windows and
moonroof, lock the doors and take the
key with you when leaving your vehicle
unattended:
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, which
could result in death. Also, a vehicle left
unlocked becomes an easy target for
thieves and intruders.
3–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
yAlways stop the engine and lock the
doors. In addition, to prevent theft of
valuables, do not leave them inside the
cabin.
yIf the key is left in the following areas
and you leave the vehicle, the doors
may be locked depending on the radio
wave conditions even if the key is left in
the vehicle.
yAround
the dashboard
the storage compartments such as
the glove compartment or the center
console
yOn the rear parcel shelf
yNext to a communication device such
as a mobile phone
yIn
yWhen
the ignition is switched to ACC
or ON, the vehicle lock-out prevention
feature prevents you from locking
yourself out of the vehicle.
All doors will automatically unlock if
they are locked using the power door
locks with any door open.
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
does not operate while the ignition is
switched off.
When any door is opened from the
outside while the key is inside the
vehicle, the closed doors are locked. All
the doors are automatically unlocked by
closing the open door.
(With the advanced keyless function)
The beep sound is heard for about 10
seconds to notify the driver that the key
has been left in the vehicle.
(Without the advanced keyless function)
The horn sound is heard twice to notify
the driver that the key has been left in
the vehicle.
y(Door
unlock (control) system with
collision detection)
This system automatically unlocks the
doors in the event the vehicle is involved
in an accident to allow passengers to
get out of the vehicle immediately and
prevent being trapped inside. While the
ignition is switched ON and in the event
the vehicle receives an impact strong
enough to inÀate the air bags, all the
doors are automatically unlocked after
about 6 seconds have elapsed from the
time of the accident.
The doors may not unlock depending on
how an impact is applied, the force of
the impact, and other conditions of the
accident.
If door-related systems or the battery
is malfunctioning, the doors will not
unlock.
3–13
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Locking, Unlocking with Auxiliary
Key
Turn the auxiliary key toward the front to
lock, toward the back to unlock.
To lock
All doors lock automatically when the
driver's door is locked using the auxiliary
key.
To unlock
The driver’s door unlocks when the
auxiliary key is turned brieÀy to the
unlock position and then immediately
returned to the center position.
All doors unlock when the driver's door
is unlocked and the auxiliary key is held
in the unlock position for one second or
longer.
Lock
Unlock
Locking, Unlocking with Request
Switch, Door Handle (With the
advanced keyless function)
All doors can be locked/unlocked by
pressing the request switch on the front
doors while the key is being carried.
Front doors
Request switch
To lock
To lock the doors , press the request switch
and the hazard warning lights will Àash
once.
A beep sound will be heard once.
To unlock
Driver's door request switch
To unlock the driver's door, press the
request switch. A beep sound will be heard
twice and the hazard warning lights will
Àash twice.
To unlock all doors, press the request
switch again within 3 seconds and two
more beep sounds will be heard.
Front passenger door request switch
To unlock all doors, press the request
switch. A beep sound will be heard twice
and the hazard warning lights will Àash
twice.
3–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
yThe system can be set to unlock all
doors by performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the trunk lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
UNLOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer (the sound of
the doors locking/unlocking can be
heard).
After this, the system switches the
setting of pressing the driver's
request switch once or twice
to unlock all doors each time
the UNLOCK button is pressed
(the sound of the doors locking/
unlocking can be heard).
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the trunk lid.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
UNLOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
yCon¿rm
that all doors are securely
locked.
For the trunk lid, move it without
pressing the electric trunk lid opener to
verify that the trunk lid has not been left
ajar.
yAll doors cannot be locked when any
door is open.
yIt
may require a few seconds for the
doors to unlock after the request switch
is pressed.
yA beep sound is heard for con¿rmation
when the doors are locked/unlocked
using the request switch. If you prefer,
the beep sound can be turned off.
The volume of the beep sound can also
be changed. Refer to Personalization
Features on page 9-10.
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the trunk lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
LOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer.
All of the doors lock and the beep
sound activates at the currently set
volume. The setting changes each
time the LOCK button on the key is
pressed and the beep sound activates
at the set volume. (If the beep sound
has been set to not activate, it will
not activate.)
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
ySwitching
the ignition to ACC or
ON.
yClosing the driver's door.
yOpening the trunk lid.
yNot operating the key for 10
seconds.
yPressing any button except the
LOCK button on the key.
yPressing a request switch.
3–15
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
y(With
theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights Àash when
the theft-deterrent system is armed or
turned off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page
3-42.
yThe setting can be changed so that the
doors are locked automatically without
pressing the request switch.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
(Auto-lock function)
A beep sound is heard when all doors are
closed while the advanced key is being
carried. All doors are locked automatically
after about three seconds when the
advanced key is out of the operational
range. Also, the hazard warning lights
Àash once. (Even if the driver is in the
operational range, all doors are locked
automatically after about 30 seconds.)
If you are out of the operational range
before the doors and the trunk lid are
completely closed or another key is left in
the vehicle, the auto-lock function will not
work. Always make sure that all doors and
the trunk lid are closed and locked before
leaving the vehicle. The auto-lock function
does not close the power windows.
yAuto re-lock function
After unlocking with the request switch,
all doors will automatically lock if any
of the following operations are not
performed within about 30 seconds.
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent
system, the hazard warning lights will
Àash for con¿rmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yOpening
a door or the trunk lid.
the ignition to any position
other than off.
Locking, Unlocking with
Transmitter
All doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-3).
Locking, Unlocking with DoorLock Switch
All doors lock automatically when the
lock side is pressed. They unlock when the
unlock side is pressed.
Driver's door
Lock
Unlock
Front passenger's door
Lock
Unlock
To lock all the doors from an open front
door, press the lock side of the door lock
switch and then close the door.
ySwitching
3–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
When locking the doors this way, be
careful not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
Auto Lock/Unlock Function
WARNING
Do not pull the inner handle on a front
door:
Pulling the inner handle on a front
door while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. Passengers can fall
out of the vehicle if the door opens
accidentally , which could result in
death or serious injury.
the vehicle speed exceeds
20 km/h (12 mph), all doors lock
automatically.
y
When the ignition is switched off, all
doors unlock automatically.
NOTE
yFunction number 3 in the following
table is the factory setting for your
vehicle.
yThere are only a total of six auto lock/
unlock settings available for automatic
transaxle vehicles, and three for manual
transaxle vehicles. Be sure to press the
unlock side of the driver's door-lock
switch the correct number of times
according to the selected function
number. If the switch is mistakenly
pressed seven times on an automatic
transaxle vehicle or four times on a
manual transaxle, the procedure will
be cancelled. If this occurs, start the
procedure from the beginning.
y
When
These functions can also be disabled so
that they do not operate.
Auto lock/unlock function setting
change using door-lock switch
The doors can be set to lock or unlock
automatically by selecting any one of the
functions from the following table and
using the driver's door-lock switch on the
interior door panel.
Function
number
Function*1
1
The auto door-lock function is
disabled.
2
All the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle speed is about 20 km/h (12
mph) or more.
3 (Factory
Setting)
All the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle speed is about 20 km/h (12
mph) or more. All the doors unlock
when the ignition is switched from
ON to Off.
4
(Automatic transaxle vehicles only)
When the ignition is switched ON and
the selector lever is shifted from park
(P) to any other gear position, all the
doors lock automatically.
5
(Automatic transaxle vehicles only)
When the ignition is switched ON and
the selector lever is shifted from park
(P) to any other gear position, all the
doors lock automatically.
When the selector lever is shifted
to park (P) while the ignition is
switched ON, all the doors unlock
automatically.
3–17
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Function
number
Function*1
6
(Automatic transaxle vehicles only)
All the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle speed is about 20 km/h (12
mph) or more.
When the selector lever is shifted
to park (P) while the ignition is
switched ON, all the doors unlock
automatically.
*1 Other settings for the auto door lock function are
available at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For
details consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Refer
to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Settings can be changed using the
following procedure.
1. Safely park the vehicle. All doors must
remain closed.
2. Switch the ignition ON.
3. Press and hold the lock side of the
driver's door-lock switch within 20
seconds of switching the ignition ON,
and make sure a beep sound is heard
about eight seconds afterwards.
4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock function
setting table, determine the function
number for the desired setting. Press
the unlock side of the driver's door-lock
switch the same number of times as the
selected function number (Ex. If you
select function 2, press the unlock side
of the switch only 2 times).
5. Three seconds after the function setting
has been changed, a beep sound will
beep in the amount of the selected
function number. (Ex. Function number
3 = 3 beep sounds)
(Manual transaxle vehicles)
Current Function Number
Press unlock side of
lock switch once
Function Number 1
Press lock side of
lock switch
Press 2 times
Function Number 2
Press 3 times
Cancel setting
Wait for 3 second
Function Number 3
Press 4 times
Cancel setting
Function set (The
number of beeps
heard is the same as
the selected function
number)
(Automatic transaxle vehicles)
Current Function Number
Press unlock side of
lock switch once
Function Number 1
Press 2 times
Press lock side of
lock switch
Function Number 2
Press 3 times
Function Number 3
Cancel setting
Wait for 3 second
Press 4 times
Function Number 4
Press 5 times
Function Number 5
Press 6 times
Function set (The
number of beeps
heard is the same as
the selected function
number)
Function Number 6
Press 7 times
Cancel setting
3–18
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
yThe doors cannot be locked or unlocked
while the setting function is being
performed.
yThe procedure can be cancelled by
pressing the lock side of the driver's
door-lock switch.
Locking, Unlocking with DoorLock Knob
Operation from outside
To lock the rear and front passenger
doors with the door-lock knob from the
outside, press the door-lock knob to the
lock position and close the door (holding
the door handle in the open position is not
required).
This does not operate the other door locks.
Door-lock knob
Operation from inside
To lock any door from the inside, press the
door-lock knob.
To unlock, pull it outward.
This does not operate the other door locks.
Lock
NOTE
When locking the door this way:
Unlock
yBe
careful not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
yThe driver's door lock knob cannot be
used while the driver's door is open.
NOTE
The red indication can be seen when the
door-lock knob is unlocked.
Red indication
3–19
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Rear Door Child Safety Locks
These locks are intended to help prevent
children from accidentally opening the
rear doors. Use them on both rear doors
whenever a child rides in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
If you slide the child safety lock to the
lock position before closing that door, the
door cannot be opened from the inside.
The door can only be opened by pulling
the outside handle.
Unlock
Lock
Trunk Lid
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
trunk:
Allowing a person to ride in the trunk
is dangerous. The person in the trunk
could be seriously injured or killed
during sudden braking or a collision.
Do not drive with the trunk lid open:
Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle
is dangerous. An open trunk lid in a
moving vehicle will cause exhaust
gas to be drawn into the cabin. This
gas contains CO (carbon monoxide),
which is colorless, odorless, and highly
poisonous, and it can cause loss of
consciousness and death. Moreover, an
open trunk lid could cause occupants
to fall out in an accident.
CAUTION
¾Before opening the trunk lid, remove
any snow and ice accumulation on it.
Otherwise, the trunk lid could close
under the weight of the snow and ice
resulting in injury.
¾Be careful when opening/closing the
trunk lid during strong winds. If a strong
gust blows against the trunk lid, it could
close suddenly resulting in injury.
¾Fully open the trunk lid and make sure
that it stays open. If the trunk lid is only
opened partially, it could slam shut
by vibration or wind gusts resulting in
injury.
¾When loading or unloading luggage in
the trunk, turn off the engine. Otherwise,
you could get burned by the heat of the
exhaust gas.
3–20
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Lid
Opening the trunk lid
Using the remote release button
Push the remote release button.
Using the electric trunk lid opener
(With the advanced keyless function)
A locked trunk lid can also be opened
while the key is being carried.
Press the electric trunk lid opener on the
trunk lid, then raise the trunk lid when the
latch releases.
NOTE
yWhen opening the trunk lid with the
doors locked, it may require a few
seconds for the trunk lid latch to release
after the electric trunk lid opener is
pressed.
yThe trunk lid can be closed when the
doors are locked with the key left in the
vehicle. However, to prevent locking the
key in the vehicle, the trunk lid can be
opened by pressing the electric trunk lid
opener. If the trunk lid cannot be opened
despite doing this procedure, press the
electric trunk lid opener to fully open
the trunk lid after pushing the trunk lid
completely closed.
yIf the vehicle battery is dead or there
is a malfunction in the electrical
system and the trunk lid cannot be
unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened by
performing the emergency procedure.
Refer to When Trunk Lid Cannot be
Opened on page 7-40.
Closing the trunk lid
To close, lower the trunk lid slowly using
the trunk lid grip recess, and then push the
trunk lid closed using both hands.
Do not slam it. Pull up on the trunk lid to
make sure it is secure.
Trunk lid grip recess
Electric trunk lid
opener
3–21
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Luggage Compartment
Loading golf bags
Golf bags can be carried in the luggage
compartment.
Up to three golf bags can be carried in the
luggage compartment.
Place each of the three golf bags into the
luggage compartment with the bottom of
each bag pointed to the left, and then set
the top of each bag so that it is pointed to
the right.
3–22
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Some golf bags cannot ¿t depending on
their size.
Inside Trunk Release
Lever*
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside
trunk release lever that provides a means
of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
No matter how careful adults might be
with keys and locking their cars, parents
should be aware that children may be
tempted to play around vehicles and use
the trunk as a hiding place.
Adults are advised to familiarize
themselves with the operation and location
of the inside trunk release lever so that
all children can be told about it in an
appropriate way, keeping in mind that
most vehicles do not have such levers.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
3–23
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
WARNING
Close the trunk lid, be sure the seat
backs are latched and do not allow
children to play inside the vehicle:
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting
in possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
Opening the Trunk Lid from the
Inside
Slide the inside trunk release lever in the
direction of the arrow. The lever is made
of material that will glow for hours in the
darkness of the trunk following a brief
exposure to ambient light.
The inside trunk release lever is located on
the inside of the trunk lid.
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by latching the
rear seats, doors and the trunk, and
keeping the keys where children can not
play with them:
Leaving children or animals
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars or
trunks can die very quickly from heat
prostration. Do not leave your children
or pets alone in a car at any time. Do
not leave the car, the rear folding seats
or the trunk unlocked.
3–24
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Fuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.
This vehicle will perform best with fuel listed in the table.
Fuel
Octane Rating* (Anti-knock index)
Regular unleaded fuel
87 [(R M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) will negatively affect the emission control
system performance and could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.
CAUTION
¾USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead to
deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.
¾This vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10 % ethanol by
volume. Damage to the vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this recommendation, or
if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of any kind if your vehicle engine
is performing poorly.
¾Never add fuel system additives, otherwise the emission control system could be damaged.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10 %. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name "Gasohol".
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not be
covered by the warranty.
y
Gasohol
containing more than 10 % ethanol.
or gasohol containing methanol.
y
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
y
Gasoline
3–25
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Emission Control System
This vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is
part of this system) that enables the vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.
WARNING
Never park over or near anything flammable:
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with the
engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and could ignite
anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst inside
the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will damage the
converter and cause poor performance.
¾USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
¾Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
¾Do not coast with the ignition switched off.
¾Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switched off.
¾Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.
¾Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must
be made by a qualified technician.
¾Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
NOTE
yUnder U.S. federal law, any modi¿cation to the original-equipment emission control
system before the ¿rst sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some
states, such modi¿cation made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.
yWhile the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear
of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. The vehicle has a selfchecking device and it operates while the engine is off.
3–26
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Engine Exhaust (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness and
death. If you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, keep all windows fully open and contact
an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss of
consciousness or even death could occur.
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when
idling the engine:
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When the vehicle is stopped with the windows closed and
the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which contains
poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or even death
could occur.
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe, before
starting the engine:
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The exhaust
pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin. Because
exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of consciousness or
even death to occupants in the cabin.
3–27
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap
WARNING
When removing the fuel-filler cap,
loosen the cap slightly and wait for any
hissing to stop, then remove it:
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
if ingested. Fuel spray is released
when there is pressure in the fuel tank
and the fuel-filler cap is removed too
quickly.
Before refueling, stop the engine, and
always keep sparks and flames away
from the filler neck:
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or flames causing
serious burns and injuries.
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuelfiller cap or not using a fuel-filler cap
may result in a fuel leak, which could
result in serious burns or death in an
accident.
Do not continue refueling after the fuel
pump nozzle shuts off automatically:
Continuing to add fuel after the
fuel pump nozzle has shut off
automatically is dangerous because
overfilling the fuel tank may cause
fuel overflow or leakage. Fuel overflow
and leakage could damage the vehicle
and if the fuel ignites it could cause a
fire and explosion resulting in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Always use only a genuine Mazda fuelfiller cap or an approved equivalent,
available at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer. The wrong cap can result in
a serious malfunction of the fuel and
emission control systems. It may also
cause the check engine light in the
instrument cluster to illuminate.
Fuel-Filler Lid
To open, pull the remote fuel-¿ller lid
release.
To close, press the fuel-¿ller lid until it
locks securely.
Remote fuel-filler
lid release
3–28
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel-Filler Cap
To remove the fuel-¿ller cap, turn it
counterclockwise.
Attach the removed cap to the inner side
of the fuel lid.
To close the fuel-¿ller cap, turn it
clockwise until a click is heard.
Open
Close
CAUTION
(U.S.A. and Canada)
If the check fuel cap warning light
illuminates, the fuel-filler cap may not
be properly installed. If the warning
light illuminates, park your vehicle
safely off the right-of-way, remove the
fuel-filler cap and reinstall it correctly.
After the cap has been correctly
installed, the fuel cap warning light
may continue to illuminate until a
number of driving cycles have been
completed. A drive cycle consists of
starting the engine (after four or more
hours with the engine off ) and driving
the vehicle on city and highway roads.
Continuing to drive with the check
fuel cap warning light illuminated
could cause the check engine light to
illuminate as well.
3–29
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel
Heated Steering Wheel*
The grips on the left and right of the
steering wheel can be warmed up.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving:
Adjusting the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the
driver to abruptly turn to the left or
right. This can lead to loss of control or
an accident.
Heating area
Heated steering
wheel switch
Steering Wheel Adjustment
To change the angle or length of the
steering wheel:
1. Stop the vehicle, and then pull down
the lock release lever under the steering
column.
The ignition must be switched ON.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The heated steering wheel
operates for about 30 minutes and then
turns off automatically.
The indicator light illuminates when the
heater is operating.
To turn off the heated steering wheel
before the 30 minutes has elapsed, press
the switch again.
CAUTION
Lock release lever
2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the
steering column length to the desired
positions, then push the lever up to lock
the column.
3. Attempt to push the steering wheel
up and down to make sure it's locked
before driving.
3–30
The following types of persons should
be careful not to touch the steering
wheel. Otherwise, it could cause a lowtemperature burn.
¾Infants, small children, elderly
people, and physically challenged
people
¾People with delicate skin
¾People who are excessively fatigued
¾People who are intoxicated
¾People who have taken sleep
inducing medicine such as sleeping
pills or cold medicine
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Mirrors
Mirrors
Before driving, adjust the inside and
outside mirrors.
Outside Mirrors
WARNING
Be sure to look over your shoulder
before changing lanes:
Changing lanes without taking
into account the actual distance of
the vehicle in the convex mirror is
dangerous. You could have a serious
accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears.
Mirror type
Flat type (driver's side)
Flat surface mirror.
Convex type (front passenger side)
The mirror has single curvature on its
surface.
Power mirror adjustment
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON position.
To adjust:
1. Rotate the mirror switch to the left or
right to choose the left or right side
mirror.
2. Press the mirror switch in the
appropriate direction.
Mirror switch
Center position
After adjusting the mirror, lock the
control by rotating the switch in the center
position.
3–31
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Mirrors
Folding mirror
WARNING
Always return the outside mirrors to
the driving position before you start
driving:
Driving with the outside mirrors folded
in is dangerous. Your rear view will
be restricted, and you could have an
accident.
Manually fold the outside mirror rearward
until it is Àush with the vehicle.
Driver's side auto-dimming door
mirror*
The movement of the auto-dimming
door mirror is interlocked with the autodimming rearview mirror in the interior
to automatically reduce glare from rear
on-coming vehicles.
Refer to Rearview Mirror on page 3-32.
Rearview Mirror
WARNING
Do not stack cargo or objects higher
than the seatbacks:
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror, which
might cause you to hit another car
when changing lanes.
Rearview mirror adjustment
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to center on the scene through the rear
window.
NOTE
For the manual day/night mirror, perform
the adjustment with the day/night lever in
the day position.
NOTE
The front passenger-side door mirror does
not have the auto-dimming feature.
3–32
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Mirrors
Reducing glare from headlights
Manual day/night mirror
Push the day/night lever forward for day
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of
headlights from vehicles at the rear.
NOTE
yDo not use glass cleaner or suspend
objects on or around the light sensor.
Otherwise, light sensor sensitivity
will be affected and may not operate
normally.
Day/Night lever
Light sensor
Day
Night
yFor
Auto-dimming mirror
The auto-dimming mirror automatically
reduces the glare of headlights from
vehicles at the rear when the ignition is
switched ON.
Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel the
auto-dimming function. The indicator light
will turn off.
To reactivate the auto-dimming function,
press the ON button ( ). The indicator
light will illuminate.
Indicator light
information regarding the 3 buttons
( , , ) on the auto-dimming
mirror.
Refer to HomeLink Wireless Control
System on page 4-66.
yThe auto-dimming function is canceled
when the ignition is switched ON and
the shift/selector lever is in reverse (R).
OFF button
ON button
3–33
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Windows
Power Windows
The ignition must be switched ON for the
power windows to operate.
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
Closing a power window is dangerous.
A person's hands, head, or even neck
could be caught by the window and
result in serious injury or even death.
This warning applies especially to
children.
Never allow children to play with power
window switches:
Power window switches that are not
locked with the power window lock
switch would allow children to operate
power windows unintentionally, which
could result in serious injury if a child's
hands, head or neck becomes caught
by the window.
Operating the Power Windows
NOTE
yEach passenger window can be
operated with each door switch when
the power window lock switch on the
driver's door is in the unlocked position
(page 3-36).
yEach passenger window can also be
operated using the master control
switches on the driver's door.
Master control switches
Driver's window
Left rear window
Front
passenger's
window
Right rear window
CAUTION
To prevent burning out the fuse and
damaging the power window system,
do not open or close more than three
windows at once.
NOTE
A power window may no longer open/close
if you continue to press the switch after
fully opening/closing the power window.
If the power window does not open/close,
wait a moment and then operate the switch
again.
3–34
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Windows
Normal opening/closing
To open the window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
Master control switches
Driver's window
Close
Open
Close
Open
Auto-opening/closing
To fully open the window automatically,
press the switch completely down.
To fully close the window automatically,
pull the switch completely up.
To stop the window partway, pull or press
the switch in the opposite direction and
then release it.
Power window system initialization
procedure
If the battery was disconnected during
vehicle maintenance, or for other reasons
(such as a switch continues to be operated
after the window is fully open/closed),
the window will not fully open and close
automatically.
Resetting of the automatic function can
be performed using the master control
switches or each passenger door switch.
The power window auto function reset
procedure can be done on all door
switches. The power window auto function
will only resume on the power window
that has been reset.
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Make sure that the power window lock
switch located on the driver's door is
not depressed.
3. Press the switch and fully open the
window.
4. Pull up the switch to fully close the
window and continue holding the
switch for about 2 seconds after the
window fully closed.
5. Repeat Steps 3-4 for the front
passenger power window while seated
in the front passenger seat.
6. Repeat Steps 3-4 for both the left and
right rear power windows while seated
in the rear seat.
7. Make sure that the power windows
operate correctly using the door switches.
3–35
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Windows
After the system has been re-initialized,
each passenger window can be fully
opened or closed automatically using the
master control switches.
Jam-safe window
If a person's hands, head or an object
blocks the window during the manual
closing operation or the auto-closing
operation, the window will stop and open
halfway.
WARNING
Make sure nothing blocks the window
just before it reaches the fully closed
position or while fully holding up the
power window switch:
Blocking the power window just before
it reaches the fully closed position
or while fully holding up the power
window switch is dangerous.
In this case, the jam-safe function
cannot prevent the window from
closing all the way. If fingers are
caught, serious injuries could occur.
NOTE
yDepending on driving conditions, a
closing power window could stop and
start opening when the window feels
a shock that is similar to something
blocking it.
In the event the jam-safe function
activates and the power window cannot
be closed automatically, pull and hold
the switch fully and the window will
close.
yThe jam-safe window function does not
operate until the system has been reset.
Engine-off power window operation
The power window can be operated for
about 40 seconds after the ignition is
switched from ON to off with all doors
closed. If any door is opened, the power
window will stop operating.
NOTE
For engine-off operation of the power
window, the switch must be held up ¿rmly
throughout window closure because the
auto-closing function will be inoperable.
Power Window Lock Switch
This feature prevents all power windows
from operating, except the driver's power
window. Keep this switch in the locked
position while children are in the vehicle.
Locked position (button depressed):
Only the driver's power window can be
operated.
Unlocked position (button not
depressed):
All power windows on each door can be
operated.
Locked position
Unlocked position
3–36
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Windows
NOTE
When the power window lock switch is
in the locked position, the light on each
power window switch, except for the
driver's power window switch, turns off.
The light may be dif¿cult to see depending
on the surrounding brightness.
Moonroof *
The moonroof can be opened or closed
electrically only when the ignition is
switched ON.
Tilt/Slide switch
WARNING
Do not let passengers stand up or
extend part of the body through the
open moonroof while the vehicle is
moving:
Extending the head, arms, or other
parts of the body through the
moonroof is dangerous. The head or
arms could hit something while the
vehicle is moving. This could cause
serious injury or death.
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing the moonroof:
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The
hands, head, or even neck of a person,
especially a child, could be caught in
it as it closes, causing serious injury or
even death.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
3–37
Before Driving
Windows
NOTE
Before washing your Mazda, make sure
the moonroof is completely closed so that
water does not get inside the cabin area.
After washing your Mazda or after it rains,
wipe the water off the moonroof before
operating it to avoid water penetration
which could cause rust and water damage
to your headliner.
Slide Operation
To fully open automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch in the backward
direction.
To fully close automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch in the forward
direction.
To stop sliding partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
Tilt Operation
Open
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted
open to provide more ventilation.
To fully tilt automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch.
To fully close automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch in the forward
direction.
To stop tilting partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
Tilt up
Close (Tilt down)
Close
Power Moonroof Reset Procedure
If the battery is disconnected, the
moonroof will not operate. The moonroof
will not operate correctly until it is reset.
Carry out the following procedure to reset
the moonroof and resume operation:
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Press the tilt switch, to partially tilt
open the rear of the moonroof.
3. Repeat Step 2. The rear of the
moonroof tilts open to the fully open
position, then closes a little.
NOTE
If the reset procedure is performed while
the moonroof is in the slide position
(partially open) it will close before the
rear tilt opens.
3–38
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Windows
Jam-safe Moonroof
If a person's hands, head or an object
blocks the moonroof while it is closing,
the moonroof will stop and move in the
reverse direction.
WARNING
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed
by hand.
The sunshade opens automatically when
the moonroof is opened, but must be
closed by hand.
Make sure nothing blocks the moonroof
just before it reaches the fully closed
position:
Blocking the moonroof just before
it reaches the closed position is
dangerous.
In this case, the jam-safe function
cannot prevent the moonroof from
closing. If fingers are caught, serious
injuries could occur.
NOTE
yDepending on driving conditions, a
closing moonroof could stop and start
opening when the moonroof feels a
shock that is similar to something
blocking it.
yThe moonroof's jam-safe function does
not function while the moonroof is
initializing.
Sunshade
CAUTION
¾The sunshade does not tilt. To avoid
damaging the sunshade, do not push up
on it.
¾Do not close the sunshade while the
moonroof is opening. Trying to force the
sunshade closed could damage it.
3–39
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Security System
Modi¿cation and Add-On
Equipment
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems' operation
if the system has been modi¿ed or if any
add-on equipment has been installed.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems or the
vehicle.
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system allows the
engine to start only with a key the system
recognizes.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized key, the engine
will not start, thereby helping to prevent
vehicle theft.
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
¾To avoid damage to the key, do not:
¾Drop the key.
¾Get the key wet.
¾Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
¾Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
¾If the engine does not start with
the correct key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating
or flashing, the system may have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
3–40
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Security System
NOTE
yThe keys carry a unique electronic code.
For this reason, and to assure your
safety, obtaining a replacement key
requires some waiting time. They are
only available through an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
yAlways keep a spare key in case one
is lost. If a key is lost, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
yIf you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of
your remaining keys and immobilizer
system. Bring all the remaining keys to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has
not been reset is not possible.
Operation
NOTE
yThe engine may not start and security
indicator light may illuminate or Àash
if the key is placed in an area where it
is dif¿cult for the system to detect the
signal, such as on the dashboard or in
the glove compartment. Move the key
to a location within the signal range,
switch the ignition off, and then restart
the engine.
ySignals from a TV or radio station, or
from a transceiver or mobile telephone
could interfere with your immobilizer
system. If you are using the proper key
and the engine fails to start, check the
security indicator light.
Arming
The system is armed when the ignition is
switched from ON to off.
The security indicator light in the
instrument cluster Àashes every 2 seconds
until the system is disarmed.
Disarming
The system is disarmed when the
ignition is switched ON with the correct
programmed key. The security indicator
light illuminates for about 3 seconds and
then turns off. If the engine does not start
with the correct key, and the security
indicator light remains illuminated or
Àashing, try the following:
Make sure the key is within the
operational range for signal transmission.
Switch the ignition off, and then restart the
engine. If the engine does not start after
3 or more tries, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
yIf the security indicator light Àashes
continuously while you are driving,
do not shut off the engine. Go to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer and have it
checked. If the engine is shut off while
the indicator light is Àashing, you will
not be able to restart it.
yBecause the electronic codes are
reset when the immobilizer system
is repaired, the keys are needed.
Make sure to bring all the keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer so that they
can be programmed.
3–41
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Security System
Theft-Deterrent System*
If the theft-deterrent system detects an
inappropriate entry into the vehicle,
which could result in the vehicle or its
contents being stolen, the alarm alerts the
surrounding area of an abnormality by
sounding the horn and Àashing the hazard
warning lights.
The system will not function unless it's
properly armed. So when you leave the
vehicle, follow the arming procedure
correctly.
Operation
System triggering conditions
The horn sounds intermittently and the
hazard warning lights Àash for about 30
seconds when the system is triggered by
any one of the following:
y
Unlocking
a door with the key, door
lock switch, or an inside door-lock knob.
y
Forcing open a door, the hood or the
trunk lid.
y
Opening the hood by operating the hood
release handle.
y
Switching the ignition ON without using
the push button start.
If the system is triggered again, the lights
and horn will activate until the driver's
door or the trunk lid is unlocked with the
transmitter.
(With the advanced keyless function)
The lights and horn can also be
deactivated by pressing the request switch
on a door.
3–42
NOTE
If the battery goes dead while the theftdeterrent system is armed, the horn will
activate and the hazard warning lights
will Àash when the battery is charged or
replaced.
How to Arm the System
1. Close the windows and the moonroof *
securely.
2. Switch the ignition OFF.
3. Make sure the hood, the doors, and the
trunk lid are closed.
4. Press the lock button on the transmitter
or lock the driver's door from the
outside with the auxiliary key.
The hazard warning lights will Àash
once.
The following method will also arm the
theft-deterrent system:
Press the door-lock switch “ ” while
any door is open and then close all of
the doors.
(With the advanced keyless function)
Press a request switch.
The security indicator light in the
instrument cluster Àashes twice per
second for 20 seconds.
5. After 20 seconds, the system is fully
armed.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Security System
NOTE
yThe theft-deterrent system can also be
armed by activating the auto relock
function with all the doors, the trunk lid
and the hood closed.
Refer to Transmitter on page 3-5.
yThe system will disarm if one of the
following operations takes place within
20 seconds after pressing the lock
button:
yUnlocking
any door.
yOpening any door.
yOpening the hood.
ySwitching the ignition ON.
To Stop the Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
y
Pressing
the unlock button or the trunk
button on the transmitter.
y
Starting the engine with the push button
start.
y
(With the advanced keyless function)
y
y
Pressing a request switch on the doors.
Pressing the electric trunk lid opener
while the key is being carried.
The hazard warning lights will Àash twice.
To rearm the system, do the arming
procedure again.
yWhen the doors are locked by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter
or using the auxiliary key while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the
hazard warning lights will Àash once to
indicate that the system is armed.
To Turn Off an Armed System
An armed system can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
y
Pressing
the unlock button on the
transmitter.
y
Starting the engine with the push button
start.
y
(With the advanced keyless function)
y
Pressing a request switch on the doors.
The hazard warning lights will Àash twice.
NOTE
When the doors are unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the transmitter while
the theft-deterrent system is turned off, the
hazard warning lights will Àash twice to
indicate that the system is turned off.
3–43
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Break-In Period
No special break-in is necessary, but a
few precautions in the ¿rst 1,000 km
(600 miles) may add to the performance,
economy, and life of the vehicle.
y
Do
not race the engine.
not maintain one constant speed,
either slow or fast, for a long period of
time.
y
Do not drive constantly at full-throttle or
high engine rpm for extended periods of
time.
y
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
y
Avoid full-throttle starts.
y
Do
Saving Fuel and Protection
of the Environment
How you operate your Mazda determines
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
these suggestions to help save fuel and
reduce CO2.
y
Avoid
long warm-ups. Once the engine
runs smoothly, begin driving.
y
Avoid fast starts.
y
Drive at lower speeds.
y
Anticipate when to apply the brakes
(avoid sudden braking).
y
Follow the maintenance schedule
(page 6-4) and have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer perform inspections and
servicing.
y
Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
y
Slow down on rough roads.
y
Keep the tires properly inÀated.
y
Do not carry unnecessary weight.
y
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
y
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
y
Keep windows closed at high speeds.
y
Slow down when driving in crosswinds
and headwinds.
WARNING
Never stop the engine when going down
a hill:
Stopping the engine when going
down a hill is dangerous. This causes
the loss of power steering and power
brake control, and may cause damage
to the drivetrain. Any loss of steering
or braking control could cause an
accident.
3–44
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Hazardous Driving
WARNING
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to
downshift on slippery surfaces:
Downshifting into lower gear
while driving on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
When driving on ice or in water, snow,
mud, sand, or similar hazards:
y
Be
cautious and allow extra distance for
braking.
y
Avoid sudden braking and sudden
maneuvering.
y
Do not pump the brakes. Continue to
press down on the brake pedal.
Refer to Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-76.
y
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front
wheels.
y
For more traction in starting on slippery
surfaces such as ice or packed snow,
use sand, rock salt, chains, carpeting, or
other nonslip material under the front
wheels.
Floor Mat
We recommend the use of Genuine
Mazda Àoor mats.
WARNING
Make sure the floor mats are hooked on
the retention pins to prevent them from
bunching up under the foot pedals:
Using a floor mat that is not secured is
dangerous as it will interfere with the
accelerator and brake pedal operation,
which could result in an accident.
Do not install two floor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side:
Installing two floor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side is
dangerous as the retention pins can
only keep one floor mat from sliding
forward.
If using an all weather mat for winter
use always remove the original floor
mat.
Loose floor mat(s) will interfere with
the foot pedal and could result in an
accident.
NOTE
Use snow chains only on the front wheels.
When setting a Àoor mat, position the Àoor
mat so that its grommets are inserted over
the pointed end of the retention posts.
3–45
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Rocking the Vehicle
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at more than
56 km/h (35 mph), and do not allow
anyone to stand behind a wheel when
pushing the vehicle:
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning the
wheels at high speed is dangerous.
The spinning tire could overheat and
explode. This could cause serious
injuries.
CAUTION
Too much rocking may cause engine
overheating, transaxle failure, and tire
damage.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand or mud, depress the accelerator
slightly and slowly move the shift lever
from 1 (D) to R.
Winter Driving
Carry emergency gear, including tire
chains, window scraper, Àares, a small
shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag of
sand or salt.
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to check
the following:
y
Have
the proper ratio of antifreeze in the
radiator.
Refer to Engine Coolant on page
6-29.
y
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold
reduces battery capacity.
y
Use an engine oil appropriate for the
lowest ambient temperatures that the
vehicle will be driven in (page 6-26).
y
Inspect the ignition system for damage
and loose connections.
y
Use washer Àuid made with antifreeze—
but do not use engine coolant antifreeze
for washer Àuid (page 6-31).
NOTE
yRemove snow before driving. Snow left
on the windshield is dangerous as it
could obstruct vision.
yDo not apply excessive force to a
window scraper when removing ice or
frozen snow on the mirror glass and
windshield.
yNever use warm or hot water for
removing snow or ice from windows and
mirrors as it could result in the glass
cracking.
yDrive slowly. Braking performance
can be adversely affected if snow or
ice adheres to the brake components. If
this situation occurs, drive the vehicle
slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal
and lightly applying the brakes several
times until the brake performance
returns to normal.
3–46
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Snow Tires
Use snow tires on all four wheels
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)
while driving with snow tires. InÀate snow
tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi) more
than recommended on the tire pressure
label (driver's door frame), but never
more than the maximum cold-tire pressure
shown on the tires.
Except Mexico
The vehicle is originally equipped with
all season radials designed to be used all
year around. In some extreme climates you
may ¿nd it necessary to replace them with
snow tires during the winter months to
further improve traction on snow and ice
covered roads.
Mexico
The vehicle is originally equipped with
summer tires designed for optimum
traction on wet and dry roads. If your
vehicle is to be used on snow and ice
covered roads, Mazda recommends that
you replace the tires originally equipped
on your vehicle with snow tires during the
winter months.
WARNING
Use only the same size and type tires
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four
wheels:
Using tires different in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling
could be greatly affected and result in
an accident.
Tire Chains
Check local regulations before using tire
chains.
CAUTION
¾Chains may affect handling.
¾Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30
mph) or the chain manufacturer's
recommended limit, whichever is lower.
¾Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes,
and sharp turns.
¾Avoid locked-wheel braking.
¾Do not use chains on a temporary spare
tire; it may result in damage to the
vehicle and to the tire.
¾Do not use chains on roads that are free
of snow or ice. The tires and chains could
be damaged.
¾Chains may scratch or chip aluminum
wheels.
NOTE
The tire pressure monitoring system may
not function correctly when using tire
chains.
Install the chains on the front tires only.
Do not use chains on the rear tires.
Please consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Installing the chains
1. Secure the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible.
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Retighten the chains after driving
1/2—1 km (1/4—1/2 mile).
CAUTION
Check local regulations before using
studded tires.
3–47
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Driving In Flooded Area
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
Overloading
WARNING
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of the vehicle are on the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident
or vehicle damage. You can estimate
the weight of the load by weighing the
items (or people) before putting them
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded
roads as it could cause short circuiting
of electrical/electronic parts, or
engine damage or stalling from
water absorption. If the vehicle has
been immersed in water, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
3–48
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Driving on Uneven Road
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or mufÀer(s) when driving under
the following conditions:
y
Ascending
y
Ascending
or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle
or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle
This vehicle is equipped with low pro¿le tires allowing class-leading performance and
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use care
and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.
3–49
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Before Driving
Towing
Trailer Towing
Your Mazda is not designed for towing.
Never tow a trailer with your Mazda.
Recreational Towing
An example of "recreational towing" is
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.
The transaxle is not designed for towing
this vehicle on all 4 wheels.
When doing recreational towing refer
to "Towing Description" (page 7-19)
and "Tiedown Hook" (page 7-20) and
carefully follow the instructions.
3–50
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4
When Driving
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
Start/Stop Engine ................................ 4-4
Ignition Switch ............................... 4-4
Starting the Engine ......................... 4-5
Turning the Engine Off ................ 4-10
Instrument Cluster and Display ...... 4-12
Meters and Gauges ....................... 4-12
Multi-Information Display and INFO
Switch* ......................................... 4-21
Active Driving Display* ............... 4-29
Warning/Indicator Lights ............. 4-32
Manual Transaxle Operation ........... 4-39
Manual Transaxle Shift Pattern .... 4-39
Automatic Transaxle ......................... 4-42
Automatic Transaxle Controls ..... 4-42
Shift-Lock System ....................... 4-43
Transaxle Ranges ......................... 4-44
Manual Shift Mode ...................... 4-45
Direct Mode ................................. 4-51
Driving Tips ................................. 4-52
Switches and Controls ...................... 4-53
Lighting Control........................... 4-53
Fog Lights* ................................... 4-58
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .... 4-59
Windshield Wipers and Washer ... 4-60
Rear Window Defogger ............... 4-63
Horn ............................................. 4-65
Hazard Warning Flasher............... 4-65
HomeLink Wireless Control
System*......................................... 4-66
Brake .................................................. 4-70
Brake System ............................... 4-70
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ............ 4-74
ABS/TCS/DSC ................................... 4-76
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ..... 4-76
Traction Control System (TCS) ... 4-77
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC) ........................................... 4-78
i-ELOOP ............................................ 4-80
i-ELOOP* ..................................... 4-80
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–1
Fuel Economy Monitor ..................... 4-83
Fuel Economy Monitor ................ 4-83
Cruise Control ................................. 4-155
Cruise Control* ........................... 4-155
Drive Selection................................... 4-86
Drive Selection* ........................... 4-86
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ... 4-159
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ........................................ 4-159
Power Steering................................... 4-87
Power Steering ............................. 4-87
Rear View Monitor.......................... 4-163
Rear View Monitor..................... 4-163
i-ACTIVSENSE................................. 4-88
i-ACTIVSENSE*.......................... 4-88
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS)* .......................................... 4-90
High Beam Control System
(HBC)*.......................................... 4-91
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)* .... 4-94
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System
(TSR)* ........................................ 4-100
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS)* ...................................... 4-107
Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert
(RCTA)* ..................................... 4-111
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC)* .................................... 4-115
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)* .................................... 4-125
Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS)* ...................................... 4-138
Smart Brake Support (SBS)* ...... 4-143
Forward Sensing Camera
(FSC)*......................................... 4-146
Radar Sensor (Front)*................. 4-150
Radar Sensors (Rear)* ................ 4-153
4–2
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
MEMO
4–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Ignition Switch
Push Button Start Positions
The system operates only when the key is
within operational range.
Each time the push button start is pressed,
the ignition switches in the order of off,
ACC, and ON. Pressing the push button
start again from ON switches the ignition
off.
Indicator light
Push button start
NOTE
yThe engine starts by pressing the push
button start while depressing the clutch
pedal (manual transaxle) or the brake
pedal (automatic transaxle). To switch
the ignition position, press the push
button start without depressing the
pedal.
yDo not leave the ignition switched ON
while the engine is not running. Doing
so could result in the battery going
dead. If the ignition is left in ACC (For
automatic transaxle, the selector lever
is in the P position, and the ignition
is in ACC), the ignition switches off
automatically after about 25 minutes.
Off
The power supply to electrical devices
turns off and the push button start indicator
light (amber) also turns off.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
switch the ignition off, set the parking
brake, and make sure the selector lever
is in P (automatic transaxle) or in 1st
gear or R (manual transaxle):
Leaving the driver's seat without
switching the ignition off, setting the
parking brake, and shifting the selector
lever to P (automatic transaxle) or
to 1st gear or R (manual transaxle)
is dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur which could
result in an accident.
In addition, if your intention is to leave
the vehicle for even a short period, it
is important to switch the ignition off,
as leaving it in another position will
disable some of the vehicle's security
systems and run the battery down.
ACC (Accessory)
Some electrical accessories will operate
and the indicator light (amber) illuminates.
NOTE
The keyless entry system does not function
while the push button start has been
pressed to ACC, and the doors will not
lock/unlock even if they have been locked
manually.
4–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
ON
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The indicator light
(amber) turns off. (The indicator light
(amber) illuminates when the ignition
is switched ON and the engine is not
running.)
Some indicator lights/warning lights
should be inspected before the engine is
started (page 4-32).
NOTE
When the push button start is pressed to
ON, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard.
This does not indicate an abnormality.
Starting the Engine
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may affect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your physician
if radio waves from the key will affect
the device.
NOTE
yThe key must be carried because the key
carries an immobilizer chip that must
communicate with the engine controls at
short range.
yThe engine can be started when the
push button start is pressed from off,
ACC, or ON.
yThe push button start system functions
(function which can start the engine
by only carrying the key) can be
deactivated to prevent any possible
adverse effect on a user wearing a
pacemaker or other medical device. If
the system is deactivated, you will be
unable to start the engine by carrying
the key. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details. If the push button
start system functions have been
deactivated, you can start the engine by
following the procedure indicated when
the key battery goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When
Key Battery is Dead on page 4-8.
yAfter starting a cold engine, the engine
speed increases and a whining sound
from the engine compartment can be
heard.
This is for improved exhaust gas
puri¿cation and does not indicate any
parts defect.
4–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
yEngine-starting
is controlled by the
spark ignition system.
This system meets all Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical ¿eld strength of radio
noise.
1. Make sure you are carrying the key.
2. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
4. Continue to press the brake pedal
¿rmly until the engine has completely
started.
5. (Manual transaxle)
Continue to press the clutch pedal
¿rmly until the engine has completely
started.
(Automatic transaxle)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
NOTE
(Manual transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the clutch
pedal is not depressed suf¿ciently.
(Automatic transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the selector
lever is not in P or N and the brake pedal
is not depressed suf¿ciently.
6. Verify that the KEY indicator light
(green) (if equipped) in the instrument
cluster and the push button start
indicator light (green) illuminate.
Indicator light
Push button start
NOTE
yIf the push button start indicator
light (green) Àashes, make sure that
the key is being carried (for vehicles
with a type A instrument cluster (page
4-32), messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster).
yIf the push button start indicator light
(green) Àashes with the key being
carried, touch the key to the push button
start and start the engine (for vehicles
with a type A instrument cluster (page
4-32), messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster). Refer to Engine
Start Function When Key Battery is
Dead on page 4-8.
4–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
CAUTION
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button start
indicator light (amber) flashes, this
could indicate a problem with the
engine starting system. This may
prevent the engine from starting
or from switching the ignition to
ACC or ON (for vehicles with a type
A instrument cluster (page 4-32),
messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster). Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
yUnder the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) Àashes after
the push button start is pressed. This
informs the driver that the push button
start will not switch to ACC, even
if it is pressed from off (for vehicles
with a type A instrument cluster (page
4-32), messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster).
yThe
key battery is dead.
key is out of operational range.
yThe key is placed in areas where it is
dif¿cult for the system to detect the
signal (page 3-8).
yA key from another manufacturer
similar to the key is in the
operational range.
yThe
y(Forced
engine starting method)
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button start
indicator light (amber) Àashes, this
could indicate that the engine may not
start using the usual starting method
(for vehicles with a type A instrument
cluster (page 4-32), messages are
displayed in the instrument cluster).
Have your vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible. If this occurs, the engine can
be force-started. Press and hold the
push button start until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting
the engine, such as having the key in the
cabin, and depressing the clutch pedal
(manual transaxle) or the brake pedal
(automatic transaxle) are required.
yWhen the engine is force-started, the
KEY warning light (red) (if equipped)
remains illuminated and the push button
start indicator light (amber) remains
Àashing.
y(Automatic transaxle)
When the selector lever is in the neutral
(N) position, the KEY indicator light
(green) (if equipped) and the push
button start indicator light (green) do
not illuminate.
7. Press the push button start after both
the KEY indicator light (green) (if
equipped) in the instrument cluster and
the push button start indicator light
(green) illuminate.
4–7
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead
NOTE
yAfter starting the engine, the push
button start indicator light (amber)
turns off and the ignition switches to the
ON position.
yAfter pressing the push button start and
before the engine starts, the operation
sound of the fuel pump motor from near
the fuel tank can be heard, however, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
When starting the engine by holding
the transmitter over the push button
start due to a dead key battery or a
malfunctioning key, be careful not
to allow the following, otherwise the
signal from the key will not be received
correctly and the engine may not start.
8. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about ten seconds.
¾Metal parts of other keys or metal
NOTE
yWhether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without the use of the
accelerator.
yIf the engine does not start the ¿rst
time, refer to Starting a Flooded Engine
under Emergency Starting. If the engine
still does not start, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer (page 7-16).
objects touch the key.
¾Spare keys or keys for other vehicles
equipped with an immobilizer
system touch or come near the key.
¾Devices for electronic purchases,
or security passage touch or come
near the key.
4–8
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
If the engine cannot be started due to a
dead key battery, the engine can be started
using the following procedure:
1. Continue to depress the brake pedal
¿rmly until the engine has completely
started.
2. (Manual transaxle)
Continue to depress the clutch pedal
¿rmly until the engine has completely
started.
3. Verify that the push button start
indication light (green) Àashes.
4. Touch the push button start using the
backside of the key (as shown) while
the push button start indicator light
(green) Àashes.
Indicator light
Key
Push button start
NOTE
When touching the push button start using
the backside of the key as shown in the
illustration, touch the push button start
with the lock switch side of the key facing
up.
NOTE
yThe engine cannot be started unless the
clutch pedal is fully depressed (manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal is fully
depressed (automatic transaxle).
yIf there is a malfunction with the push
button start function, the push button
start indicator light (amber) Àashes.
In this case, the engine may start,
however, have the vehicle checked at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
yIf the push button start indicator light
(green) does not illuminate, perform the
operation from the beginning again. If
it does not illuminate, have the vehicle
checked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yTo switch the ignition position without
starting the engine, perform the
following operations after the push
button start indicator light (green) turns
on.
1. Release the clutch pedal (manual
transaxle) or brake pedal (automatic
transaxle).
2. Press the push button start to switch
the ignition position. The ignition
switches in the order of ACC, ON,
and off each time the push button
start is pressed. To switch the
ignition position again, perform the
operation from the beginning.
5. Verify that the push button start
indicator light (green) turns on.
6. Press the push button start to start the
engine.
4–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Emergency Operation for Starting
the Engine
If the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,
or the push button start indicator light
(amber) Àashes, this could indicate that
the engine may not start using the usual
starting method. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible. If this occurs, the
engine can be force-started. Press and hold
the push button start until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting the
engine such as having the key in the cabin,
and depressing the clutch pedal (manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal (automatic
transaxle) are required.
Turning the Engine Off
WARNING
Do not stop the engine while the vehicle
is moving:
Stopping the engine while the vehicle
is moving for any reason other than in
an emergency is dangerous. Stopping
the engine while the vehicle is moving
will result in reduced braking ability
due to the loss of power braking, which
could cause an accident and serious
injury.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. (Manual transaxle)
Shift into neutral and set the parking
brake.
(Automatic transaxle)
Shift the selector lever to the P position
and set the parking brake.
3. Press the push button start to turn off
the engine. The ignition position is off.
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the push button start is off.
4–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
NOTE
yThe cooling fan in the engine
compartment could turn on for a few
minutes after the ignition is switched
from ON to OFF, whether or not the
A/C is on or off, to cool the engine
compartment quickly.
yIf the system detects that the remaining
battery power of the key is low when the
ignition is switched from ON to ACC or
OFF, the following is indicated.
Replace with a new battery before the
key becomes unusable.
Refer to Key Battery Replacement on
page 6-38.
(Vehicle equipped with Type A
instrument cluster)
A message is indicated in the display of
the instrument cluster.
(Vehicle equipped with Type B
instrument cluster)
The KEY indicator light (green) Àashes
for approximately 30 seconds.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-32.
y(Automatic transaxle)
If the engine is turned off while the
selector lever is in a position other than
P, the ignition switches to ACC.
Emergency Engine Stop
Continuously pressing the push button
start or quickly pressing it any number of
times while the engine is running or the
vehicle is being driven will turn the engine
off immediately. The ignition switches to
ACC.
4–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Meters and Gauges
Instrument Cluster
Type A
Type B
Steering Switch
4–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Speedometer .......................................................................................................... page 4-14
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................... page 4-14
Tachometer ............................................................................................................ page 4-15
Dashboard Illumination......................................................................................... page 4-17
Trip Computer and INFO Switch .......................................................................... page 4-19
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ..................................................................... page 4-16
Fuel Gauge ............................................................................................................ page 4-16
Outside Temperature Display ................................................................................ page 4-18
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display ............................................................ page 4-19
Multi-information Display and INFO Switch ....................................................... page 4-21
Active Driving Display ......................................................................................... page 4-29
4–13
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of the
vehicle.
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip
Meter Selector (Without Multiinformation Display)
The display mode can be changed from
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B
and then back to odometer by pressing the
selector while one of them is displayed.
The selected mode will be displayed.
Selector
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
The trip meter can record the total distance
of two trips. One is recorded in trip meter
A, and the other is recorded in trip meter
B.
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and
trip meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is ¿lled.
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
Odometer
Press the selector
Trip meter A
Press the selector
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter
is again reset. Return it to “0.0” by
depressing and holding the selector for
one second or more. Use this meter to
measure trip distances and to compute fuel
consumption.
Trip meter B
Press the selector
4–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
NOTE
yIf the fuel economy data is reset using
the fuel economy monitor, or trip A
is reset using the trip meter when the
function which synchronizes the fuel
economy monitor and the trip meter is
on, the fuel economy data and trip A are
reset simultaneously.
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page
4-83.
yOnly the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
yThe trip record will be erased when:
power supply is interrupted
(blown fuse or the battery is
disconnected).
yThe vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km
(mile).
Tachometer
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
CAUTION
Do not run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine damage.
STRIPED
ZONE
yThe
RED ZONE
NOTE
When the tachometer needle enters the
STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the
driver that the gears should be shifted
before entering the RED ZONE.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–15
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge (Without Multi-information
Display)
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
The white gauge indicates that the engine
coolant temperature is low, and the red
gauge indicates that the engine coolant
temperature is high and overheating.
CAUTION
If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicator flashes, there is a
possibility of overheating. Park the
vehicle in a safe place immediately
and take appropriate measures. If the
vehicle continues to be driven, it could
cause damage to the engine.
Refer to Overheating on page 7-17.
NOTE
yThe temperature unit (Centigrade/
Fahrenheit) of the engine coolant gauge
display changes in conjunction with
the temperature unit of the outside
temperature display.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yDuring normal driving, the engine
coolant temperature stabilizes at 100
°C (210 °F) or less, and the gauge
indicates a range lower than 100 °C
(210 °F).
yIf the engine load increases and the
engine coolant temperature exceeds 100
°C (210 °F), the gauge indicates the
engine coolant temperature.
Fuel Gauge (Without Multiinformation Display)
The fuel gauge shows approximately
how much fuel is remaining in the tank
when the ignition is switched ON. We
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.
Full
1/4 Full
Empty
If the low fuel warning light illuminates or
the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as
possible.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-33.
4–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
NOTE
yAfter refueling, it may require some
time for the indicator to stabilize. In
addition, the indicator may deviate
while driving on a slope or curve since
the fuel moves in the tank.
yThe display indicating a quarter or less
remaining fuel has more segments to
show the remaining fuel level in greater
detail.
yThe direction of the arrow (
)
indicates that the fuel-¿ller lid is on the
left side of the vehicle.
Dashboard Illumination
(Without auto-light control)
When the position lights are turned
on with the ignition switched ON, the
brightness of the dashboard illumination is
dimmed.
(With auto-light control)
When the position lights are turned
on with the ignition switched ON, the
brightness of the dashboard illumination
is dimmed. However, when the light
sensor detects that the surrounding area is
bright such as when the position lights are
turned on in the daytime, the dashboard
illumination does not dim.
NOTE
y(With auto-light control)
When the ignition is switched ON in the
early evening or at dusk, the dashboard
illumination is dimmed for several
seconds until the light sensor detects
the brightness of the surrounding area,
however, the dimmer may cancel after
the brightness is detected.
yWhen the position lights are turned on,
the position lights indicator light in the
instrument cluster turns on.
Refer to Headlights on page 4-53.
The brightness of the instrument cluster
and dashboard illuminations can be
adjusted by rotating the knob.
y
The
brightness decreases by rotating the
knob to the left. A beep sound will be
heard when the knob has been rotated to
the maximum dim position.
y
The brightness increases by rotating the
knob to the right.
Dim
Bright
4–17
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Function for cancelling illumination
dimmer
The illumination dimmer can be canceled
by rotating the dashboard illumination
knob to the right until a beep sound is
heard while the instrument cluster is
dimmed with the ignition switched ON.
If the instrument cluster's visibility is
reduced due to glare from surrounding
brightness, cancel the illumination
dimmer.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
outside temperature display may differ
from the actual outside temperature
depending on the surroundings and vehicle
conditions:
NOTE
y(With Multi-information Display)
The illumination dimmer can be
canceled by pressing the dashboard
illumination knob.
yWhen the illumination dimmer is
canceled, the instrument cluster cannot
be dimmed even if the position lights are
turned on.
yWhen the illumination dimmer is
canceled, the screen in the center
display switches to constant display of
the daytime screen.
Changing the Temperature Unit of the
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature unit can be
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Settings can be changed by operating the
center display screen.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Outside Temperature Display
(Without Multi-information
Display)
ySigni¿cantly
cold or hot temperatures.
changes in outside temperature.
yThe vehicle is parked.
yThe vehicle is driven at low speeds.
ySudden
NOTE
When the temperature unit indicated in the
outside temperature display is changed,
the temperature unit indicated in the
engine coolant gauge display changes in
conjunction with it.
When the ignition is switched ON, the
outside temperature is displayed.
4–18
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display (Without Multiinformation Display)
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise
control is displayed.
Trip Computer and INFO Switch
(Without Multi-information
Display)
The following information can be selected
by pressing the INFO switch with the
ignition switched ON.
y
Distance-to-empty
mode
fuel economy mode
y
Current fuel economy mode
y
Compass mode
y
Average
If you have any problems with your trip
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Distance-to-empty mode
This mode displays the approximate
distance you can travel on the remaining
fuel based on the fuel economy.
The distance-to-empty will be calculated
and displayed every second.
NOTE
yEven though the distance-to-empty
display may indicate a suf¿cient amount
of remaining driving distance before
refueling is required, refuel as soon as
possible if the fuel level is very low or
the low fuel warning light illuminates.
yThe display may not change unless you
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.
yThe distance-to-empty is the
approximate remaining distance the
vehicle can be driven until all the
graduation marks in the fuel gauge
(indicating the remaining fuel supply)
disappear.
yIf there is no past fuel economy
information such as after ¿rst
purchasing your vehicle or the
information is deleted when the battery
cables are disconnected, the actual
distance-to empty/range may differ from
the amount indicated.
Average fuel economy mode
This mode displays the average fuel
economy by calculating the total fuel
consumption and the total traveled
distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection,
or resetting the data. The average fuel
economy is calculated and displayed every
minute.
To clear the data being displayed, press the
INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds.
After pressing the INFO switch, - - - L/100
km (- - - mpg) will be displayed for about
1 minute before the fuel economy is
recalculated and displayed.
4–19
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Current fuel economy mode
This mode displays the current fuel
economy by calculating the amount of fuel
consumption and the distance traveled.
Current fuel economy will be calculated
and displayed every 2 seconds.
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3
mph), - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will be
displayed.
Compass mode
The direction the vehicle is moving is
displayed in one of the eight cardinal
directions while the vehicle is being
driven.
4–20
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Multi-Information Display and INFO Switch*
Multi-information Display
INFO switch
The multi-information display indicates the following information.
y
Odometer
y
Trip
meter
coolant temperature gauge
y
Fuel gauge
y
Outside temperature
y
Distance-to-empty
y
Average fuel economy
y
Current fuel economy
y
Maintenance Monitor
y
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Display
y
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) Display
y
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Display
y
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Display
y
Cruise Control Display
y
Compass Display
y
Warning message
y
Engine
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–21
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
The screen content changes each time the INFO switch is pressed.
Press the INFO switch
*1
Current Fuel Economy,
Trip Meter A, Average
Fuel Economy, Outside
Temperature, Odometer,
Distance-to-empty, Fuel
Gauge
Warning message,
Outside Temperature,
Odometer,
Distance-to-empty, Fuel
Gauge
Press the INFO switch
Press the INFO switch
*2
Current Fuel Economy,
Trip Meter B, Average
Fuel Economy, Outside
Temperature, Odometer,
Distance-to-empty, Fuel
Gauge
Compass, Outside
Temperature,
Odometer,
Distance-to-empty,
Fuel Gauge
Press the INFO switch
Press the INFO switch
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge,
Maintenance Monitor,
Outside Temperature,
Odometer,
Distance-to-empty, Fuel
Gauge
i-ACTIVSENSE
display, Outside
Temperature,
Odometer,
Distance-to-empty,
Fuel Gauge
Press the INFO switch
*1:Displayed only when a warning occurs.
*2:Displayed only while vehicle is being driven.
4–22
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip
Meter Selector
The odometer is constantly displayed on
the screen when the ignition is switched
ON, and the TRIP A or TRIP B screen
can be displayed by operating the INFO
switch.
INFO switch
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
The trip meter and average fuel economy
can be reset by pressing the INFO switch
for 1.5 second or more while in each
mode.
NOTE
yOnly the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
yThe trip record will be erased when:
yThe
Odometer,
Trip meter A
power supply is interrupted
(blown fuse or the battery is
disconnected).
yThe vehicle is driven over 1999 km
(mile).
Press the INFO switch
Odometer,
Trip meter B
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
The driving distance for a speci¿ed
interval is indicated. Two types (TRIP
A, TRIP B) of interval distance and the
average fuel economy for each can be
measured.
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and
trip meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is ¿lled.
4–23
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
The blue gauge indicates that the engine
coolant temperature is low, and the red
gauge indicates that the engine coolant
temperature is high and overheating.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows approximately
how much fuel is remaining in the tank
when the ignition is switched ON. We
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.
Full
CAUTION
If the high engine coolant temperature
warning light (red) turns on, there is
a possibility of overheating. Park the
vehicle in a safe place immediately
and take appropriate measures. If the
vehicle continues to be driven, it could
cause damage to the engine.
Refer to Overheating on page 7-17.
NOTE
yThe temperature unit (Centigrade/
Fahrenheit) of the engine coolant gauge
display changes in conjunction with
the temperature unit of the outside
temperature display.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yDuring normal driving, the engine
coolant temperature stabilizes at 100
°C (210 °F) or less, and the gauge
indicates a range lower than 100 °C
(210 °F).
yIf the engine load increases and the
engine coolant temperature exceeds 100
°C (210 °F), the gauge indicates the
engine coolant temperature.
1/4 Full
Empty
If the fuel level is low, ( ) and ( ) turn an
amber color. Refuel as soon as possible.
Refer to Taking Action on page 7-29 .
NOTE
yAfter refueling, it may require some
time for the indicator to stabilize. In
addition, the indicator may deviate
while driving on a slope or curve since
the fuel moves in the tank.
yThe display indicating a quarter or less
remaining fuel has more segments to
show the remaining fuel level in greater
detail.
yThe direction of the arrow (
)
indicates that the fuel-¿ller lid is on the
left side of the vehicle.
4–24
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Outside Temperature Display
When the ignition is switched ON, the
outside temperature is displayed.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
outside temperature display may differ
from the actual outside temperature
depending on the surroundings and vehicle
conditions:
ySigni¿cantly
cold or hot temperatures.
changes in outside temperature.
yThe vehicle is parked.
yThe vehicle is driven at low speeds.
ySudden
Changing the Temperature Unit of the
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature unit can be
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit
using the following procedure.
Settings can be changed by operating the
center display screen.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
NOTE
When the temperature unit indicated in the
outside temperature display is changed,
the temperature unit indicated in the
engine coolant gauge display changes in
conjunction with it.
Distance-to-empty
This displays the approximate distance
you can travel on the remaining fuel based
on the fuel economy.
The distance-to-empty will be calculated
and displayed every second.
NOTE
yEven though the distance-to-empty
display may indicate a suf¿cient amount
of remaining driving distance before
refueling is required, refuel as soon as
possible if the fuel level is very low or
the low fuel warning light illuminates.
yThe display will not change unless you
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.
yThe distance-to-empty is the
approximate remaining distance the
vehicle can be driven until all the
graduation marks in the fuel gauge
indicating the remaining fuel supply
disappear.
yIf there is no past fuel economy
information such as after ¿rst
purchasing your vehicle or the
information is deleted when the battery
cables are disconnected, the actual
distance-to empty/range may differ from
the amount indicated.
4–25
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Average Fuel Economy
The average fuel economy is calculated
every minute from the total traveled
distance on the trip meter and the total
fuel consumption, and the average fuel
economy for either TRIP A or TRIP B is
displayed.
For the setting method and indications
for the maintenance monitor, refer to the
Maintenance Monitor.
Refer to Maintenance Monitor on page
6-18.
The maintenance monitor displays the
information when the ignition is switched
ON.
NOTE
This function is inoperable while the
vehicle is being driven.
The average fuel economy and trip
meters can be reset by pressing the INFO
switch for 1.5 s or more while in each
mode. After the data is cleared, the fuel
consumption is recalculated and the - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) for the one minute
prior to it being displayed is indicated.
Current Fuel Economy
This displays the current fuel economy
by calculating the amount of fuel
consumption and the distance traveled.
Maintenance Monitor
The following maintenance period
noti¿cations can be displayed by turning
the Maintenance Monitor on.
y
Scheduled
Maintenance
Rotation
y
Oil Change
Message display
When the remaining time or the distance
approaches 0, a message is displayed each
time the ignition is switched ON.
NOTE
yIf any of the INFO switch is pressed
while a message is displayed, it will no
longer be displayed the next time the
ignition is switched ON.
yAfter the vehicle is serviced and the
remaining time/distance is reset, the
message for the next maintenance
period will be displayed when the
remaining distance or time to the next
maintenance period approaches 0
(displays when engine is started).
yIf there are multiple messages, they are
displayed according to their order.
yIf OFF is set for Messages, messages
are not displayed.
y
Tire
4–26
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
Display
Displays the system status.
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Display*
Displays the system status.
Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) on
page 4-94.
Distance Recognition Support
System (DRSS) Display*
Displays the distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Refer to Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)
& Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) on page 4-125.
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display*
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise
control is displayed.
Refer to Distance Recognition Support
System (DRSS) on page 4-107.
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) Display*
Displays the currently set system status.
Compass Display
The direction the vehicle is moving is
displayed while the vehicle is being
driven.
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) on page 4-115.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–27
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Warning (Display Indication)
A message is displayed to notify the user of the system operation status and malfunctions or
abnormalities.
If the warning light turns on/Àashes simultaneously or a symbol is indicated in the display,
check the information regarding the warning light or symbol. (page 4-32)
When only a message is displayed, refer to Message Indicated in Multi-information Display.
(page 7-35)
4–28
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Active Driving Display*
Mirror
Combiner
Optical receiver
WARNING
Always adjust the display brightness and position with the vehicle stopped:
Adjusting the display brightness and position while driving the vehicle is dangerous as
doing so could distract your attention from the road ahead and lead to an accident.
CAUTION
¾Do not try to adjust the angle or open/close the active driving display manually.
Fingerprints on the display will make it difficult to view and using excessive force when
operating it could cause damage.
¾Do not place objects in the vicinity of the active driving display. The active driving display
may not operate or any interference with its operation could cause damage.
¾Do not place beverages near the active driving display. If water or other liquids are splashed
on the active driving display, it could cause damage.
¾Do not place objects above the active driving display screen or apply stickers to the
combiner as they will cause interference.
¾A sensor is integrated to control the display's luminosity. If the optical receiver is covered,
the display's luminosity will lower making the display difficult to view.
¾Do not allow intense light to hit the optical receiver. Otherwise, it could cause damage.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–29
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
NOTE
yIt may be dif¿cult to view the display when wearing sunglasses. Take off your sunglasses
or adjust the luminosity.
yIf the battery terminal has been disconnected and re-connected or the battery voltage is
low, the adjusted position may deviate.
yThe display may be dif¿cult to view or temporarily affected by weather conditions such as
rain, snow, light, and temperature.
yIf the audio system is removed, the active driving display cannot be operated.
The active driving display indicates the following information:
y
Blind
Refer
Spot Monitoring (BSM) Operation Conditions and Warnings
to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) on page 4-94.
y
Distance
Refer
Recognition Support System (DRSS) Operation Conditions and Warnings
to Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) on page 4-107.
y
Traf¿c
Refer
Sign Recognition System (TSR) traf¿c signs and Warnings
to Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) on page 4-100.
y
Mazda
Refer
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Operation Conditions and Warnings
to Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) on page 4-115.
y
Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Operation
Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) on
page 4-125.
y
Smart
Refer
y
Smart
Refer
City Brake Support (SCBS) Warnings
to Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) on page 4-138.
Brake Support (SBS) Operation Conditions and Warnings
to Smart Brake Support (SBS) on page 4-143.
y
Cruise
Refer
Control Operation Conditions
to Cruise Control on page 4-155.
y
Navigation
y
Speed
Guidance (vehicles with navigation system)
limit indicator (vehicles with navigation system)
y
Vehicle
Speed
4–30
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Each setting/adjustment for the active driving display can be performed on the center
display.
1. Select the
icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the AD-Disp tab.
3. Select the desired item and perform the setting/adjustment.
Method for adjusting screen brightness (automatically/manually)
Screen brightness initial settings (automatic adjustment is selected)
y Screen brightness adjustment (manual adjustment is selected)
y Display position of active driving display (display height)
y The combination of street name display, lane guidance, and turn by turn (TBT) can be
changed. (navigation guidance)
y Active driving display ON/OFF (indication)
y Reset settings (reset)
y
y
NOTE
The desired driving position (display position, brightness level, display information) can be
called up after programming the position.
Refer to Driving Position Memory on page 2-8.
4–31
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Warning/Indicator Lights
Instrument Cluster varies depending on model and speci¿cations.
Instrument Cluster
Type A
(With Multi-information Display)
Type B
(Without Multi-information Display)
Center of Dashboard
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
4–32
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Warning Indication/Warning Lights
These lights turn on or Àash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system
malfunction.
Signal
Warning
Page
Brake System Warning Light*1*2
7-22
Electronic
Brake Force
Distribution
System Warning
7-22,
ABS warning
7-25
ABS Warning Light*1
(Red)
Charging System Warning Light*1
7-22
Engine Oil Warning Light*1
7-22
*
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Indication/
Warning Light*1
7-22
Power Steering Malfunction Indication/Malfunction
Indicator Light*1
7-22
Master Warning Indication/Warning Light*1
7-25
Electric Parking Brake Warning Light
7-25
Check Engine Light*1
7-25
Automatic Transaxle Warning Indication/Warning Light*1
7-25
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning
Light*1
7-25
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light*1
Flashing
7-25,
Illuminate
7-29
KEY Warning Indication
7-25
*
(Amber)
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–33
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal
Warning
KEY Warning Light*1
*
(Red)
i-ELOOP Warning Indication
(Amber)
Page
Malfunction
7-25,
Except
malfunction
7-29
*
7-25
*
High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Indication/
Warning Light*1
7-25
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Warning Indication
7-25
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) Warning Indication
7-25
LED Headlight Warning Light
7-25
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/
SCBS) Warning Indication
7-29
(Amber)
(Amber)
*
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Warning Light*1
7-29
Low Fuel Warning Indication/Warning Light
7-29
*
Check Fuel Cap Warning Light*1
7-29
Seat Belt Warning Light
7-29
*
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication/Warning
Light
7-29
(Amber)
4–34
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal
Warning
Page
Door-Ajar Warning Indication
7-29
Trunk lid-Ajar Warning Indication
7-29
Door-Ajar Warning Light
7-29
*
*
*
*1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
*2 The light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–35
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Indication/Indicator Lights
These lights turn on or Àash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system
malfunction.
Signal
Indicator
Page
Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light*1
2-56
KEY Indication/Indicator Light
4-5
Security Indicator Light*1
3-41
Wrench Indication/Indicator Light*1
4-38
Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light
4-38
Shift Position Indication
4-45
Lights-On Indication/Indicator Light
4-53
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light
Headlight HighLow Beam
4-56,
Flashing the
Headlights
4-56
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights
Turn and LaneChange Signals
4-59,
Hazard Warning
Flasher
4-65
(White/Green)
*
(Blue)
Brake Pedal Operation demand Indicator Light
4–36
4-71
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal
Indicator
Page
TCS/DSC Indicator Light*1
(Flashes)
Traction Control
System (TCS)
4-77,
Dynamic
Stability Control
(DSC)
4-78
(Turns on)
7-25
DSC OFF Indicator Light*1
4-79
*
Select Mode Indication
4-86
*
High Beam Control System (HBC) Indicator Light
4-93
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Main Indication
4-118
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Set Indication
4-118
(Green)
(White)
(Green)
(White/Green)
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Indication
4-129
*
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Indication
4-141
*
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Indicator Light
4-141
(Red)
*
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) OFF Indicator
Light*1
Smart City
Brake Support
(SCBS) System
4-141,
Smart Brake
Support (SBS)
System
4-145
*
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) OFF Indicator Light*1
4-134
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–37
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal
Indicator
Page
*
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF Indicator Light*1
4-99
*
i-ELOOP Indication Light
4-82
*
Cruise Main Indication
4-156
*
Cruise Set Indication
4-156
(Green)
(White)
(Green)
*1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Wrench Indicator Light*
When the ignition is switched ON, the
wrench indicator light turns on and then
turns off after a few seconds.
The wrench indicator light turns on under
the following conditions:
Low Engine Coolant Temperature
Indicator Light (Blue)*
The light illuminates continuously when
the engine coolant temperature is low and
turns off after the engine is warm.
y
When
the preset maintenance period has
arrived.
y
When its time to replace the engine oil.
Refer to Maintenance Monitor on page
6-18.
4–38
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Manual Transaxle Operation
Manual Transaxle Shift
Pattern
Neutral position
The shift pattern of the transaxle is
conventional, as shown.
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down
while shifting; then release it slowly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a device to
prevent shifting to R (reverse) by mistake.
Push the shift lever downward and shift
to R.
WARNING
Do not use sudden engine braking on
slippery road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while driving
at high speeds causes sudden engine
braking, which is dangerous. The
sudden change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid. This could
lead to loss of vehicle control and an
accident.
Always leave the shift lever in 1 or R
position and set the parking brake when
leaving the vehicle unattended:
Otherwise the vehicle could move and
cause an accident.
CAUTION
¾Keep your foot off the clutch pedal
except when shifting gears. Also, do not
use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an
upgrade. Riding the clutch will cause
needless clutch wear and damage.
¾Do not apply any excessive lateral force
to the shift lever when changing from
5th to 4th gear. This could lead to the
accidental selection of 2nd gear, which
could result in damage to the transaxle.
¾Make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting to R.
Shifting to R while the vehicle is still
moving may damage the transaxle.
NOTE
If shifting to R is dif¿cult, shift back into
neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try
again.
4–39
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Manual Transaxle Operation
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI)
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) supports
you to obtain optimum fuel economy and
smooth driving. It displays the selected
gear position in the instrument cluster as
well as noti¿es the driver to change to the
most suitable gear position corresponding
to the actual driving condition.
Selected gear position
Indication
NOTE
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) turns
off when the following operations are
performed.
yThe
vehicle is stopped.
vehicle is put in neutral.
yThe vehicle is driven in reverse.
yThe clutch is not fully engaged when
accelerating from a stop.
yThe clutch pedal remains depressed for
2 seconds or longer while driving.
yThe
Suitable gear position
Condition
Numeral
The selected gear position is
displayed.
and numeral
Shift up or down to the indicated
gear position is recommended.
CAUTION
Do not rely solely on the shift-up/
shift-down recommendations by
indications. The actual driving
situation might require shift operations
different from indication. To avoid the
risk of accidents, the road and traffic
conditions have to be judged correctly
by the driver before shifting.
4–40
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Manual Transaxle Operation
Recommendations for Shifting
Upshifting
For normal acceleration, Mazda
recommends these shift points:
Gear
Vehicle speed
1 to 2
24 km/h (15 mph)
2 to 3
42 km/h (26 mph)
3 to 4
60 km/h (37 mph)
4 to 5
75 km/h (46 mph)
5 to 6
79 km/h (49 mph)
For cruising, Mazda recommends these
shift points:
Gear
Vehicle speed
1 to 2
13 km/h (8 mph)
2 to 3
29 km/h (18 mph)
3 to 4
49 km/h (30 mph)
4 to 5
63 km/h (39 mph)
5 to 6
70 km/h (43 mph)
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf¿c
or on a steep upgrade, downshift before
the engine starts to overwork. This reduces
the chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you need more speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
4–41
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Automatic Transaxle Controls
Lock-release button
Various Lockouts:
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal and hold in the lock-release
button to shift (The ignition must be switched ON).
Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.
Indicates that you must hold in the lock-release button to shift.
NOTE
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle that
gives the driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to
shift gears. Even if you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional
automatic, you should also be aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode
and an inappropriate gear may be retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the
engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing, con¿rm you have not accidentally
slipped into manual shift mode (page 4-45).
4–42
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Shift-Lock System
Shift-Lock Override
The shift-lock system prevents shifting out
of P unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If the selector lever will not move from P
using the proper shift procedure, continue
to hold down the brake pedal.
To shift from P:
1. Remove the shift-lock override cover
using a cloth-wrapped Àat head
screwdriver.
2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Start the engine.
Press and hold the lock-release button.
Move the selector lever.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC or
the ignition is switched off, the selector
lever cannot be shifted from P.
yThe ignition cannot be switched to OFF
if the selector lever is not in P.
Cover
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.
4. Move the selector lever.
Take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer to have the system checked.
4–43
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Transaxle Ranges
y
The
shift position indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates. Refer
to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-32.
y
The selector lever must be in P or N to
operate the starter.
P (Park)
P locks the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING
Always set the selector lever to P and set
the parking brake:
Only setting the selector lever to the
P position without using the parking
brake to hold the vehicle is dangerous.
If P fails to hold, the vehicle could move
and cause an accident.
CAUTION
WARNING
If the engine is running faster than idle,
do not shift from N or P into a driving
gear:
It's dangerous to shift from N or P
into a driving gear when the engine
is running faster than idle. If this is
done, the vehicle could move suddenly,
causing an accident or serious injury.
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle:
Shifting into N while driving is
dangerous. Engine braking cannot
be applied when decelerating which
could lead to an accident or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle
damage.
¾Shifting into P, N or R while the vehicle is
moving can damage your transaxle.
¾Shifting into a driving gear or reverse
when the engine is running faster than
idle can damage the transaxle.
R (Reverse)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
backward. You must be at a complete
stop before shifting to or from R, except
under rare circumstances as explained in
Rocking the Vehicle (page 3-46).
N (Neutral)
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or brakes are on.
NOTE
Apply the parking brake or depress the
brake pedal before moving the selector
lever from N to prevent the vehicle from
moving unexpectedly.
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position. From a
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence.
M (Manual)
M is the manual shift mode position. Gears
can be shifted up or down by operating the
selector lever. Refer to Manual Shift Mode
on page 4-45.
4–44
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Shift Position Indication
The selector position is indicated when the
ignition is switched ON.
Gear position indication
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indication illuminates and the
numeral for the selected gear is displayed.
Manual Shift Mode
The manual shift mode gives you the feel
of driving a manual transaxle vehicle by
allowing you to operate the selector lever
manually. This allows you to control
engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels
much like a manual transaxle when more
control is desired.
To change to manual shift mode, shift the
lever from D to M.
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
automatically controls the transaxle shift
points to best suit the road conditions
and driver input. This improves driving
feel. The transaxle may switch to AAS
mode when driving up and down slopes,
cornering, driving at high elevations,
or depressing the accelerator pedal
quickly while the selector lever is in the
D position. Depending on the road and
driving conditions/vehicle operations, gear
shifting could be delayed or not occur,
however, this does not indicate a problem
because the AAS mode will maintain the
optimum gear position.
NOTE
Changing to manual shift mode while
driving will not damage the transaxle.
To return to automatic shift mode, shift the
lever from M to D.
NOTE
yIf you change to manual shift mode
when the vehicle is stopped, the gear
will shift to M1.
yIf you change to manual shift mode
without depressing the accelerator
pedal when driving in D range, 5th
gear/6th gear, the gear will shift to M4/
M5.
4–45
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Indicators
Manually Shifting Up
Manual shift mode indication
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indication in the instrument panel
illuminates.
Gear position indication
The numeral for the selected gear
illuminates.
You can shift gears up by operating
the selector lever or the steering shift
switches*.
M1 ĺ M2 ĺ M3 ĺ M4 ĺ M5 ĺ M6
Using selector lever
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the
selector lever back once.
Manual shift mode indicator
Gear position indicator
NOTE
yIf the gears cannot be shifted down
when driving at higher speeds, the gear
position indication will Àash twice to
signal that the gears cannot be shifted
down (to protect the transaxle).
yIf the automatic transaxle Àuid (ATF)
temperature becomes too high, there
is the possibility that the transaxle
will switch to automatic shift mode,
canceling manual shift mode and
turning off the gear position indication
illumination. This is a normal function
to protect the AT. After the ATF
temperature has decreased, the gear
position indication illumination turns
back on and driving in manual shift
mode is restored.
4–46
Using steering shift switch*
To shift up to a higher gear with the
steering shift switches, pull the UP switch
) toward you once with your
(
¿ngers.
UP switch (+/OFF)
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
WARNING
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers on the steering
shift switches:
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
NOTE
yWhen driving slowly, the gears may not
shift up.
yDo not drive the vehicle with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE
while in manual shift mode. In
addition, manual shift mode switches
to automatic shift mode while the
accelerator pedal is completely
depressed.
This function is canceled while the DSC
is turned off. However, if the vehicle
is continuously driven at a high rpm,
the gears may automatically shift up to
protect the engine.
yThe steering shift switch can be used
temporarily even if the selector lever is
in the D position while driving. In
addition, it returns to automatic shift
) is
mode when the UP switch (
pulled rearward for a suf¿cient amount
of time.
Manually Shifting Down
You can shift gears down by operating
the selector lever or the steering shift
switches*.
M6 ĺ M5 ĺ M4 ĺ M3 ĺ M2ĺ M1
Using selector lever
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the
selector lever forward once.
Using steering shift switch*
To shift down to a lower gear with the
steering shift switches, pull the DOWN
switch toward you once with your
¿ngers.
DOWN switch (-)
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–47
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
WARNING
Do not use engine braking on slippery
road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while driving
at high speeds causes sudden engine
braking, which is dangerous. The
sudden change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid. This could
lead to loss of vehicle control and an
accident.
Second Gear Fixed Mode
When the selector lever is moved back
while the vehicle speed is about 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) or less, the transaxle is set in the
second gear ¿xed mode. The gear is ¿xed
in second while in this mode for easier
acceleration from a stop and driving on
slippery roads such as snow-covered
roads.
If the selector lever is moved back or
forward while in the second gear ¿xed
mode, the mode will be canceled.
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers on the steering
shift switches:
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
NOTE
yWhen driving at high speeds, the gear
may not shift down.
yDuring deceleration, the gear may
automatically shift down depending on
vehicle speed.
yWhen depressing the accelerator fully,
the transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed. However,
the gears do not kickdown while the
DSC is turned off.
4–48
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Shift Gear (Shifting) Speed Limit
For each gear position while in the manual mode, the speed limit is set as follows: When the
selector lever is operated within the range of the speed limit, the gear is shifted.
Shift up
The gear does not shift up while the vehicle speed is lower than the speed limit.
Shift down
The gear does not shift down while the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit and the gear does not shift down, the gear
position indication Àashes 2 times to notify the driver that the gear cannot be shifted.
Kickdown
When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully while driving, the gear shifts down.
However, the gears do not kickdown while the DSC is turned off.
NOTE
The gear also shifts down using kickdown while in the second gear ¿xed mode.
Auto-shift down
The gear shifts down automatically depending on the vehicle speed during deceleration.
NOTE
If the vehicle comes to a stop while in the second gear ¿xed mode, the gear remains in
second.
4–49
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Recommendations for Shifting
Upshifting
For normal acceleration and cruising, Mazda recommends these shift points:
Gear
Vehicle speed*1
M1 to M2
24 km/h (15 mph)
M2 to M3
40 km/h (25 mph)
M3 to M4
65 km/h (40 mph)
M4 to M5
73 km/h (45 mph)
M5 to M6
81 km/h (50 mph)
*1 Always observe local speed limit regulations.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf¿c or on a steep upgrade, downshift before the
engine starts to overwork. This gives better acceleration when you need more speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.
4–50
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Direct Mode
Direct mode can be used for temporarily
switching gears by operating the steering
shift switch while the vehicle is being
driven with the selector lever in the D
range.
While in direct mode, the D and M
indication illuminate and the gear position
in use is illuminated.
Direct mode is canceled (released) under
the following conditions.
NOTE
Shifting up and down while in direct mode
may not be possible depending on the
vehicle speed. In addition, because direct
mode is canceled (released) depending
on the rate of acceleration or if the
accelerator is fully depressed, use of the
manual shift mode is recommended if you
need to drive the vehicle in a particular
gear for long periods.
y
The
UP switch (
) is pulled
rearward for a certain amount of time or
longer.
y
The vehicle is driven for a certain
amount of time or longer (time differs
depending on the driving conditions
while operating).
y
The vehicle is stopped or moving at a
slow speed.
Gear position indicator
Direct mode indicator
4–51
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Automatic Transaxle
Driving Tips
WARNING
Do not let the vehicle move in a
direction opposite to the direction
selected by the selector lever:
Do not let the vehicle move backward
with the selector lever in a forward
position, or do not let the vehicle
move forward with the selector lever
in the reverse position. Otherwise, the
engine may stop, causing the loss of
the power brake and power steering
functions, and make it difficult to
control the vehicle which could result
in an accident.
Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
3. Release the brake pedal while gradually
accelerating.
Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to
lower gears, depending on load weight and
grade steepness. Descend slowly, using the
brakes only occasionally to prevent them
from overheating.
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
NOTE
yThe accelerator pedal may initially feel
heavy as it is being depressed, then feel
lighter as it is depressed further. This
change in pedal force aids the engine
control system in determining how
much the accelerator pedal has been
depressed for performing kickdown,
and functions to control whether or not
kickdown should be performed.
yWhile
the selector lever is in the M
position and the DSC is turned off,
manual shift mode does not switch
to automatic shift mode even if the
accelerator pedal is completely
depressed. Operate the selector lever.
4–52
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Lighting Control
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights and other exterior lights on or off.
When the lights are turned on, the lights-on indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on.
NOTE
yIf the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off approximately 30
seconds after switching the ignition off.
The time setting can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
yTo prevent discharging the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is off unless
safety requires them.
Without auto-light control
Switch Position
ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
Headlights
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On*2
Daytime running lights
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Off
Off
On
On*2
On
On*2
Ignition Position
*1
*1
*1 The lights are turned on while the vehicle is driven.
*2 The lights are turned on for the speci¿ed period by the auto headlight off function.
4–53
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
With auto-light control
Switch Position
ON
ACC
or OFF
Off
On
On*5
Off
Off
Off
On*5
On
On*5
ON
ACC
or OFF
Auto*4
Off
Off
On*1
Auto*4
On
ON
ACC
or OFF
ON
ACC
or OFF
Headlights
Off
Off
Auto*2
Daytime running lights
On*1
Off
On*3
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Off
Off
Auto*2
Ignition Position
*1 The lights are turned on while the vehicle is driven.
*2 The lights are turned on by the auto light function.
*3 The lights are turned on while the vehicle is driven, and turned off when the headlights are turned on by the auto
light function.
*4 The lights are turned on continuously if the ignition is switched from ON to any other position with the lights
turned on. The lights are turned on for the speci¿ed period by the auto headlight off function.
*5 The lights are turned on for the speci¿ed period by the auto headlight off function.
4–54
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Auto-light control*
position and the ignition is switched ON, the light
When the headlight switch is in the
sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns the headlights
and other exterior lights on or off.
CAUTION
¾Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield. Otherwise
the light sensor will not operate correctly.
¾The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep hands and
position and the
scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the
ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades could be
damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off completely when it is particularly tempting to leave the
engine running. This is particularly important when clearing ice and snow.
NOTE
yThe headlights and other exterior lights may not turn off immediately even if the
surrounding area becomes well-lit because the light sensor determines that it is night
time if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as inside long
tunnels, traf¿c jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.
In this case, the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the
position.
yIf the headlight switch and the windshield wiper switch are in
, and the wipers are
operated at low or high speed by the auto wiper control for several seconds, bad weather
conditions are determined and the headlights may be turned on.
yThe sensitivity of the auto-light control may be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–55
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Headlight High-Low Beam
The headlights switch between high and
low beams by moving the lever forward or
backward.
Flashing the Headlights
Can be used when the ignition is switched
ON.
To Àash the headlights, pull the lever fully
towards you (the headlight switch does not
need to be on).
High beam
OFF
Low beam
Headlight
flashing
When the headlight high-beams are on,
the headlight high-beam indicator light is
turned on.
The headlight high-beam indicator light
in the instrument cluster illuminates
simultaneously. The lever will return to the
normal position when released.
4–56
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Coming Home Light
The coming home light turns on the
headlights (low beams) when the lever is
operated.
To turn on the lights
When the lever is pulled with the ignition
switched to ACC or OFF, the low beam
headlights turn on.
The headlights turn off after a certain
period of time has elapsed after the doors
are closed.
Leaving Home Light
The leaving home light turns on the lights
when the transmitter unlock button is
pressed while away from the vehicle.
The following lights turn on when the
leaving home light is operated.
Low beams, Parking lights, Taillights,
License lights.
To turn on the lights
When the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are in the following conditions,
the headlights will illuminate when the
transmitter unlock button is pressed and
the vehicle receives the transmitter signal.
The headlights turn off after a certain
period of time has elapsed (30 seconds).
y
Ignition
switch: off
switch:
y
Headlight
NOTE
yThe time until the headlights turn off
after all of the doors are closed can be
changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yIf no operations are done for 3 minutes
after the lever is pulled, the headlights
turn off.
yThe headlights turn off if the lever is
pulled again while the headlights are
illuminated.
or
or
Unlock button
Lock button
NOTE
yOperation of the leaving home light can
be turned on or off.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yWhen the transmitter lock button is
pressed and the vehicle receives the
transmitter signal, the headlights turn
off.
yWhen the headlight switch is turned to
position, the headlights turn off.
the
4–57
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Headlight Leveling*
The number of passengers and weight of
cargo in the luggage compartment change
the angle of the headlights.
The angle of the headlights will be
automatically adjusted when turning on
the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights
Some countries require moving vehicles
to have their lights on (daytime running
lights) during the daytime.
The daytime running lights turn on when
the vehicle is driven and turn off when the
parking brake is operated or the selector
lever is shifted to the P position (automatic
vehicle).
NOTE
(Except Canada)
The daytime running lights can be
deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
4–58
Fog Lights*
The fog lights can be turned on with the
ignition switched ON and the headlights
turned on.
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.
The fog lights will improve visibility at
night and during foggy conditions.
The fog lights turn on when the fog light
switch is turned to the position and turn
off when the switch is turned to the
position.
Fog light switch
NOTE
The fog lights will turn off when the
headlights are set at high beams.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the turn and lane-change signals.
Turn Signals
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.
If the indicator light continues to Àash
after a turn, manually return the lever to its
original position.
Right turn
Right lane change
OFF
Left lane change
Left turn
The turn signal indicators in the instrument
cluster Àash according to the operation of
the turn signal lever to show which signal
is working.
NOTE
yIf an indicator light stays on without
Àashing or if it Àashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out.
yA personalized function is available to
change the turn indicator sound volume.
(page 9-10)
Lane-Change Signals
Move the lever halfway toward the
direction of the lane change—until the
indicator Àashes— and hold it there. It will
return to the off position when released.
Three-Flash Turn Signal
After releasing the turn signal lever, the
turn signal indicator Àashes three times.
The operation can be cancelled by moving
the lever in the direction opposite to which
it was operated.
NOTE
The three-Àash turn signal function can be
switched to operable/inoperable using the
personalization function.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
4–59
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Windshield Wipers and
Washer
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the wipers.
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the windshield,
affect your visibility, and could result in
an accident.
Only use windshield washer fluid mixed
with anti-freeze protection in freezing
weather conditions:
Using windshield washer fluid without
anti-freeze protection in freezing
weather conditions is dangerous as
it could freeze on the windshield and
block your vision which could cause
an accident. In addition, make sure
the windshield is sufficiently warmed
using the defroster before spraying the
washer fluid.
NOTE
If the windshield wipers are operated
under cold weather conditions or
during snowfall, they could stop due to
accumulated snow on the windshield.
If the windshield wipers stop due to
accumulated snow on the windshield,
park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the
wiper switch off, and then remove the
accumulated snow. If the wiper switch is
turned to another position other than OFF,
the wipers will operate. If the wipers do
not operate even though the wiper switch
is turned to a position other than OFF,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
Windshield Wipers
Turn the wipers on by pressing the lever
up or down.
With intermittent wiper
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
Operation while pulling up lever
Stop
Intermittent
Low speed
High speed
4–60
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Variable-speed intermittent wipers
Set the lever to the intermittent position
and choose the interval timing by rotating
the ring.
INT ring
Slow
Auto-wiper control
When the wiper lever is in the
position, the rain sensor senses the amount
of rainfall on the windshield and turns the
wipers on or off automatically (off—
intermittent—low speed—high speed).
Fast
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted by turning the switch on the
wiper lever.
From the center position (normal), rotate
the switch upward for higher sensitivity
(faster response) or rotate it downward for
less sensitivity (slower response).
With auto-wiper control
Switch
Less sensitivity
Center
position
Higher sensitivity
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
Operation while pulling up lever
Stop
Auto control
Low speed
High speed
4–61
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CAUTION
¾Do not shade the rain sensor by
adhering a sticker or a label on the
windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor
will not operate correctly.
¾When the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with a
cloth.
¾If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object from either outside or
inside the vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of the
windshield when the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is
switched ON as fingers could be pinched
or the wipers and wiper blades damaged
when the wipers activate automatically.
If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off
completely (when it is most likely
that the engine is left running) this is
particularly important when clearing ice
and snow.
NOTE
ySwitching the auto-wiper lever from the
to the
position while driving
activates the windshield wipers once,
after which they operate according to
the rainfall amount.
yThe auto-wiper control may not operate
when the rain sensor temperature is
about -10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or about
85 °C (185 °F) or higher.
yIf the windshield is coated with water
repellent, the rain sensor may not be
able to sense the amount of rainfall
correctly and the auto-wiper control
may not operate properly.
yIf dirt or foreign matter (such as ice or
matter containing salt water) adheres
to the windshield above the rain sensor,
or if the windshield is iced, it could
cause the wipers to move automatically.
However, if the wipers cannot remove
this ice, dirt or foreign matter, the autowiper control will stop operation. In
this case, set the wiper lever to the low
speed position or high speed position
for manual operation, or remove the ice,
dirt or foreign matter by hand to restore
the auto-wiper operation.
yIf the auto-wiper lever is left in the
position, the wipers could operate
automatically from the effect of strong
light sources, electromagnetic waves, or
infrared light because the rain sensor
uses an optical sensor. It is
recommended that the auto-wiper lever
position other
be switched to the
than when driving the vehicle under
rainy conditions.
4–62
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
yIf
the headlight switch and the
,
windshield wiper switch are in
and the wipers are operated at low or
high speed by the auto wiper control for
several seconds, bad weather conditions
are determined and the headlights may
be turned on.
yThe auto-wiper control functions can
be turned off. Refer to Personalization
Features on page 9-10.
Windshield Washer
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
spray washer Àuid.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger clears fog from
the rear window.
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the defogger.
Press the switch to turn on the rear
window defogger. The rear window
defogger operates for about 15 minutes
and then turns off automatically.
The indicator light illuminates when the
defogger is operating.
To turn off the rear window defogger
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press
the switch again.
Manual Climate Control
OFF
Washer
Indicator light
NOTE
If the windshield washer is turned on when
the windshield wipers are not operating,
the windshield wipers operate a few times.
If the washer does not work, inspect the
Àuid level (page 6-31). If the Àuid level
is normal, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Fully Automatic Climate Control
Indicator light
4–63
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defogger grid inside the window.
NOTE
yThis defogger is not designed
for melting snow. If there is an
accumulation of snow on the rear
window, remove it before using the
defogger.
yThe rear window defogger setting
can be changed. After changing the
setting, the rear window defogger
stops automatically after 15 minutes
have elapsed and when the ambient
temperature is high. When the ambient
temperature is low, it continues to
operate until the switch is pressed
again.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
4–64
Mirror Defogger*
The mirror defoggers defrost the outside
mirrors.
The mirror defoggers operate in
conjunction with the rear window
defogger.
To turn on the mirror defoggers, switch
the ignition ON and press the rear window
defogger switch (page 4-63).
Manual Climate Control
Indicator light
Fully Automatic Climate Control
Indicator light
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Horn
To sound the horn, press the
the steering wheel.
Hazard Warning Flasher
mark on
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traf¿c hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning Àasher and
all the turn signals will Àash. The hazard
warning indicator lights in the instrument
cluster Àash simultaneously.
NOTE
yThe turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
yCheck local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle
is being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
4–65
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
HomeLink Wireless
Control System*
NOTE
HomeLink and HomeLink house icon
are registered trademarks of Gentex
Corporation.
The HomeLink system replaces up to
3 hand-held transmitters with a single
built-in component in the auto-dimming
mirror. Pressing the HomeLink button on
the auto-dimming mirror activates garage
doors, gates and other devices surrounding
your home.
Indicator light
HomeLink button
WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink system with
any garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature:
Using the HomeLink system with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety standards
is dangerous. (This includes garage
doors manufactured before April 1,
1982.)
Using these garage door openers can
increase the risk of serious injury or
death. For further information, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or www.
homelink.com or an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Always check the areas surrounding
garage doors and gates for people
or obstructions before programming
or during operation of the HomeLink
system:
Programming or operating the
HomeLink system without verifying
the safety of areas surrounding garage
doors and gates is dangerous and
could result in an unexpected accident
and serious injury if someone were to
be hit.
NOTE
The programming will not be erased even
if the battery is disconnected.
4–66
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Pre-programming the HomeLink
System
NOTE
It is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink
for quicker training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
y
Verify
that there is a remote control
transmitter available for the device you
would like to program.
y
Disconnect the power to the device.
Programming the HomeLink
System
CAUTION
When programming a garage door
opener or a gate, disconnect the power
to these devices before performing
programming. Continuous operation
of the devices could damage the
motor.
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons
which can be individually selected and
programmed using the transmitters for
current, on-market devices as follows:
1. Disconnect the power to the garage
door opener or gate programmed to the
hand-held transmitter.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 2.5—7.5 cm (1—3 inches)
away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both
the chosen HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter buttons. Do not release
the buttons until step 3 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace this
Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian
Programming” section.
4–67
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4. After the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light, release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
NOTE
If the HomeLink indicator light does not
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call
1-800-355-3515 for assistance.
5. Connect the power to the garage door
opener or gate programmed to the
hand-held transmitter.
6. Firmly press and hold the programmed
HomeLink button for ¿ve seconds,
and then release it. Perform this
operation two times to activate the door
or gate. If the door or gate does not
activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming”—
step 1
If the indicator light blinks rapidly
for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with
“Programming” steps 7—9 to
complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly
a garage door opener).
7. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit.
8. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE
Complete the programming within 30
seconds.
9. Return to the vehicle and ¿rmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
HomeLink should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming”—
step 1
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1800-355-3515.
4–68
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Gate operator/Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
— which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed
to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having
dif¿culties programming a gate operator
by using the “Programming” procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
“Programming HomeLink” step 3 with
the following:
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener or
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
Reprogramming the HomeLink
system
To program a device to HomeLink using
a HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to Àash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the HomeLink button, proceed with
“Programming” - step 1.
Erasing Programmed HomeLink
Buttons
To erase the existing programming from
all three operating channels, press and
) on
hold the two outside buttons ( ,
the auto-dimming mirror until the
HomeLink indicator light begins to Àash
after approximately 10 seconds.
Verify that the programming has been
erased when you resell the vehicle.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release
— every two seconds (“cycle”) your
hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has successfully been accepted by
HomeLink. (The indicator light will Àash
slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to
complete.
Operating the HomeLink System
Press the programmed HomeLink button
to operate a programmed device. The
code will continue being transmitted for a
maximum of 20 seconds.
4–69
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Brake
Brake System
Foot Brake
This vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
use.
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by
applying greater force than normal to the
brake pedal. But the distance required to
stop will be greater than usual.
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not coast with the engine stalled or
turned off, find a safe place to stop:
Coasting with the engine stalled or
turned off is dangerous. Braking will
require more effort, and the brake's
power-assist could be depleted if
you pump the brake. This will cause
longer stopping distances or even an
accident.
Shift to a lower gear when going down
steep hills:
Driving with your foot continuously on
the brake pedal or steadily applying
the brakes for long distances is
dangerous. This causes overheated
brakes, resulting in longer stopping
distances or even total brake failure.
This could cause loss of vehicle
control and a serious accident. Avoid
continuous application of the brakes.
¾Do not drive with your foot held on the
clutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold
the clutch pedal depressed halfway
unnecessarily. Doing so could result in
the following:
¾The clutch and brake parts will wear
out more quickly.
¾The brakes can overheat and
adversely affect brake performance.
¾Always depress the brake pedal with
the right foot. Applying the brakes with
the unaccustomed left foot could slow
your reaction time to an emergency
situation resulting in insufficient braking
operation.
¾Wear shoes appropriate for driving in
order to avoid your shoe contacting
the brake pedal when depressing the
accelerator pedal.
4–70
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Brake
Electric Parking Brake
The electric parking brake equipment
applies the parking brake using an electric
motor. When the electric parking brake is
applied, the electric parking brake switch
indicator light turns on.
Indicator light
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the electric
parking brake applied:
If the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake applied, the brake parts may
generate heat and the brake system
may not operate, leading to an
accident.
Before driving, release the electric
parking brake and verify that the brake
system warning light is turned off.
NOTE
yThe electric parking brake cannot be
applied or released while the vehicle
battery is dead.
yAn operation sound occurs when
applying or releasing the electric
parking brake, however, this does not
indicate a malfunction.
yIf the electric parking brake is not
used for long periods, an automatic
inspection of the system is performed
while the vehicle is parked. An
operation sound can be heard, however,
this does not indicate a problem.
yWhen the electric parking brake is
applied and the ignition is switched
OFF, an operation sound can be heard,
however, this does not indicate a
problem.
yThe brake pedal may move while the
electric parking brake is being applied
or released, however, this does not
indicate a problem.
yIf the electric parking brake switch is
continually pulled while driving the
vehicle, the electric parking brake will
be applied and the electric parking
brake warning beep will be activated.
When the switch is released, the electric
parking brake is released and the beep
stops.
yIf the electric parking brake is applied
with the ignition switched off or in ACC,
the brake system warning light in the
instrument cluster and the indicator
light in the switch may turn on for 15
seconds.
yWhen running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, it may be necessary
to switch the ignition off with the
parking brake released depending on
the type of automatic car wash.
4–71
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Brake
When applying the electric parking
brake
The electric parking brake can be applied
regardless of the ignition switch position.
Securely depress the brake pedal and pull
up the electric parking brake switch.
The electric parking brake is applied and
the brake system warning light and the
electric parking brake switch indicator
light turn on.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-32.
When releasing the electric parking
brake
The electric parking brake can be released
while the ignition is switched ON or
the engine is running. When the electric
parking brake is released, the brake system
warning light and the electric parking
brake switch indicator light turn off.
Electric parking brake manual release
Securely depress the brake pedal and press
down the electric parking brake switch.
Firmly depress the brake pedal and press
the electric parking brake switch.
If the electric parking brake switch is
pressed without depressing the brake
pedal, the display or indicator light in the
instrument cluster noti¿es the driver that
the brake is not depressed.
(Type A instrument cluster)
A message is displayed on the multiinformation display in the instrument
cluster.
Refer to Message Indicated in Multiinformation Display on page 7-35.
(Type B instrument cluster)
The brake pedal operation demand
indicator light in the instrument cluster
turns on.
4–72
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Brake
Electric parking brake automatic
release
If the accelerator pedal is depressed with
the electric parking brake applied and
all of the following conditions met, the
parking brake is released automatically.
Brake Pad Wear Indicator
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
y
The
engine is running.
driver's door is closed.
y
The driver's seat belt is fastened.
y
The
(Manual transaxle)
y
The
change lever is in a position other
than neutral.
y
The clutch pedal is depressed halfway
(Automatic transaxle)
y
Selector
lever is in the D, M, or R
position
NOTE
If something such as the driver's foot
contacts the accelerator pedal with the
engine running and the electric parking
brake applied, the parking brake may
be released automatically. If you do not
intend to drive immediately, shift the
change lever (manual transaxle) to the
neutral position, or shift the selector
lever (automatic transaxle) to the P or N
position.
Warning Light
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning
Lights on page 4-33.
When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with worn disc pads:
Driving with worn disc pads is
dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Brake Assist
During emergency braking situations
when it is necessary to depress the brake
pedal with greater force, the brake assist
system provides braking assistance, thus
enhancing braking performance.
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply
more ¿rmly.
4–73
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Brake
NOTE
yWhen the brake pedal is depressed hard
or depressed more quickly, the pedal
will feel softer but the brakes will apply
more ¿rmly. This is a normal effect of
the brake assist operation and does not
indicate a malfunction.
yWhen the brake pedal is depressed
hard or depressed more quickly, a
motor/pump operation noise may be
heard. This is a normal effect of the
brake assist and does not indicate a
malfunction.
yThe brake assist equipment does not
supersede the functionality of the
vehicle's main braking system.
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is a function
which assists the driver in accelerating
from a stop while on a slope. When
the driver releases the brake pedal and
depresses the accelerator pedal while
on a slope, the function prevents the
vehicle from rolling. The braking force is
maintained automatically after the brake
pedal is released on a steep grade.
For vehicles with a manual transaxle,
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) operates on a
downward slope when the shift lever is in
the reverse (R) position, and on an upward
slope when the shift lever is in a position
other than the reverse (R) position.
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle,
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) operates on a
downward slope when the selector lever
is in the reverse (R) position, and on an
upward slope when the selector lever is in
a forward gear.
4–74
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Brake
WARNING
Do not rely completely on Hill Launch
Assist (HLA):
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is an auxiliary
device for accelerating from a stop
on a slope. The system only operates
for about two seconds and therefore,
relying only on the system, when
accelerating from a stop is dangerous
because the vehicle may move (roll)
unexpectedly and cause an accident.
The vehicle could roll depending on
the vehicle's load or if it is towing
something. In addition, for vehicles
with a manual transaxle, the vehicle
could still roll depending on how the
clutch pedal or the accelerator pedal is
operated.
Always confirm the safety around the
vehicle before starting to drive the
vehicle.
NOTE
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate on a gentle slope. In addition,
the gradient of the slope on which the
system will operate changes depending
on the vehicle's load.
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate if the parking brake is applied,
the vehicle has not stopped completely,
or the clutch pedal is released.
yWhile Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is
operating, the brake pedal may feel
stiff and vibrate, however, this does not
indicate a malfunction.
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate while the TCS/DSC indicator
light is illuminated.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-32.
yHill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
turn off even if the DSC OFF switch is
pressed to turn off the TCS/DSC.
4–75
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Antilock Brake System
(ABS)
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If
one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS
responds by automatically releasing and
reapplying that wheel's brake.
The driver will feel a slight vibration in
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is
normal ABS system operation. Continue to
depress the brake pedal without pumping
the brakes.
NOTE
yBraking distances may be longer on
loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for
example) which usually have a hard
foundation. A vehicle with a normal
braking system may require less
distance to stop under these conditions
because the tires will build up a wedge
of surface layer when the wheels skid.
yThe sound of the ABS operating may
be heard when starting the engine
or immediately after starting the
vehicle, however, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning
Lights on page 4-33.
WARNING
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
The ABS cannot compensate for unsafe
and reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), driving on ice and snow,
and hydroplaning (reduced tire friction
and road contact because of water on
the road surface). You can still have an
accident.
4–76
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Traction Control System
(TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS)
enhances traction and safety by controlling
engine torque and braking. When the TCS
detects driving wheel slippage, it lowers
engine torque and operates the brakes to
prevent loss of traction.
This means that on a slick surface, the
engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels,
limiting wheel spin and loss of traction.
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning
Lights on page 4-33.
WARNING
Do not rely on the Traction Control
System (TCS) as a substitute for safe
driving:
The Traction Control System (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface).
You can still have an accident.
NOTE
To turn off the TCS, press the DSC OFF
switch (page 4-79).
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the
indicator light Àashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC
or the brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
yIn addition to the indicator light
Àashing, a slight lugging sound will
come from the engine. This indicates
that the TCS/DSC is operating properly.
yOn slippery surfaces, such as fresh
snow, it will be impossible to achieve
high rpm when the TCS is on.
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive at
reduced speeds when roads are covered
with ice and/or snow:
Driving without proper traction devices
on snow and/or ice-covered roads
is dangerous. The Traction Control
System (TCS) alone cannot provide
adequate traction and you could still
have an accident.
4–77
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control (DSC)
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
automatically controls braking and engine
torque in conjunction with systems such
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip
when driving on slippery surfaces, or
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,
enhancing vehicle safety.
Refer to ABS (page 4-76) and TCS
(page 4-77).
DSC operation is possible at speeds
greater than 20 km/h (12 mph).
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning
Lights on page 4-33.
CAUTION
¾The DSC may not operate correctly
unless the following are observed:
¾Use tires of the correct size specified
for your Mazda on all four wheels.
¾Use tires of the same manufacturer,
brand and tread pattern on all four
wheels.
¾Do not mix worn tires.
¾The DSC may not operate correctly when
tire chains are used or a temporary spare
tire is installed because the tire diameter
changes.
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
WARNING
Do not rely on the Dynamic Stability
Control as a substitute for safe driving:
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface).
You can still have an accident.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the
indicator light Àashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC
or the brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4–78
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
DSC OFF Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched ON.
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is
switched off.
Refer to DSC OFF Switch on page 4-79.
If the light remains illuminated and the
TCS/DSC is not switched off, take your
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The DSC may have a malfunction.
DSC OFF Switch
Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off the
TCS/DSC. The DSC OFF indicator light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE
yWhen DSC is on and you attempt to free
the vehicle when it is stuck, or drive
it out of freshly fallen snow, the TCS
(part of the DSC system) will activate.
Depressing the accelerator will not
increase engine power and freeing
the vehicle may be dif¿cult. When this
happens, turn off the TCS/DSC.
yIf the TCS/DSC is off when the engine
is turned off, it automatically activates
when the ignition is switched ON.
yLeaving the TCS/DSC on will provide
the best traction.
yIf the DSC OFF switch is pressed and
held for 10 seconds or more, the DSC
OFF switch malfunction detection
function operates and the DSC system
activates automatically. The DSC OFF
indicator light turns off while the DSC
system is operative.
yIf the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
operates with the TCS/DSC turned off,
the TCS/DSC becomes operational
automatically.
Press the switch again to turn the TCS/
DSC back on. The DSC OFF indicator
light will turn off.
4–79
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ELOOP
i-ELOOP*
i-ELOOP is a regenerative braking system. When you depress the brake pedal or use
engine braking, the kinetic energy that occurs is converted to electrical energy by the power
generator and the converted electrical energy is stored in the rechargeable battery (capacitor
and battery). The stored electricity is used as power to charge the battery and the vehicle's
electrical devices.
y
A variable
voltage alternator is incorporated in the power generator which converts
the kinetic energy to electricity and can generate electricity ef¿ciently according to the
vehicle conditions.
y
A capacitor is used to store large amounts of electricity instantly which can be utilized
quickly.
y
A DC-DC converter is incorporated which steps down the stored electricity to voltage
useable by the vehicle's electrical devices.
Kinetic energy
Electrical power
Battery
Accelerator OFF
Energy
regeneration
Charge
Power
Electric components
Engine Components
Engine
DC-DC converter
Variable
Voltage
alternator
Vehicle Systems:
Air-conditioning
Audio
Head-lights, etc
Capacitor
Tire
Battery
Accelerator ON
Power
Engine
DC-DC converter
Variable
Voltage
alternator
Capacitor
Electric components
Engine Components
Vehicle Systems:
Air-conditioning
Audio
Head-lights, etc
Tire
4–80
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ELOOP
Variable
Voltage
alternator
DC-DC Converter
Capacitor
CAUTION
High-current electricity flows through the following parts, therefore do not touch them.
¾Variable voltage alternator
¾DC-DC converter
¾Capacitor
NOTE
yA difference in the fuel economy may occur depending on how the vehicle's electrical
devices are used.
yIf the capacitor is to be disposed of, always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
For details, go to the following URL.
http://www.mazda.com/csr/environment/recycling
4–81
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ELOOP
i-ELOOP Control Status Display
The driver is noti¿ed of the i-ELOOP
power generating status and the vehicle
conditions by the control status display.
The i-ELOOP power generating status is
displayed in the center display.
Refer to Control Status Display on page
4-85.
i-ELOOP Charging Display
If the engine is started after the vehicle
has not been driven for a long period of
time, an “i-ELOOP Charging Please don't
Drive” message may be indicated in the
display.
Leave the engine idling and wait until the
message disappears.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven while the message
is displayed, a beep sound is heard.
If you turn the steering wheel while the
message is displayed, it will feel heavier
than normal, but this does not indicate
an abnormality. Stop the vehicle in a safe
location with the engine running and do
not attempt to turn the steering wheel. The
steering operation will return to normal
after the message is no longer displayed.
4–82
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
Fuel Economy Monitor
The Control Status and Fuel Consumption are switched and displayed by operating each
icon in the display.
In addition, after completing a trip, the total energy ef¿ciency to date is displayed in the
ending display when the ending display is turned on.
1. Select the
icon on the home screen to display the applications screen.
2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”.
3. Operate the commander switch or touch the screen and display the menu.
NOTE
When the menu is displayed by touching the screen, the display is hidden automatically after
6 seconds.
4. Select the icon in the menu and perform the operation. Each icon operates as follows:
Indication on display
Control status
Hides the menu display.
Displays the application screen.
Switches the Fuel Economy Monitor in the order of
Control Status and Fuel Consumption.
Resets the fuel economy data.
Displays the following setting screen.
yEnding display on/off switching
yOn/off switching for function which
synchronizes
reset fuel economy data to trip meter (Trip A)
NOTE
The fuel economy monitor screen after the ignition is switched from ON to OFF is changed
to the original fuel economy monitor screen when the ignition is switched ON the next time.
4–83
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
Fuel Consumption Display
Information regarding the fuel economy is displayed.
Indication on display
Control status
Displays the fuel economy for the past 60 minutes.
yDisplays
the fuel economy every minute for the
past 1 to 10 minutes.
yDisplays the fuel economy every 10 minutes for
the past 10 to 60 minutes.
Displays the average fuel economy over the past 5
resets and after the current reset.
Calculates the average fuel economy every minute
after vehicle travel begins, and displays it.
NOTE
yThe fuel economy data can be reset by doing the following operation:
yPress
the reset switch from the menu screen.
the function which synchronizes the fuel economy monitor and the trip meter is
on, reset trip A of the trip meter.
yDelete the average fuel economy information displayed in the trip computer.
yWhen
yAfter
resetting the fuel economy data, “-- -” is displayed while the average fuel economy
is calculated.
4–84
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
Control Status Display
The power generating status is displayed
Indication on display
Control status
With i-ELOOP system
Displays the level of electricity generated by
regenerative braking.
Displays the amount of the electricity stored in the
capacitor.
With i-ELOOP system
Displays the status of the electricity stored in the
capacitor and being supplied to the electrical devices
(whole vehicle in display is illuminated
simultaneously).
Displays the accumulated fuel economy.
Ending Screen Display
If the ending display on the fuel economy monitor is on when the ignition is switched from
ON to OFF, the information regarding the fuel economy is displayed.
4–85
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Drive Selection
Drive Selection*
Drive selection is a system to switch the vehicle's drive mode. When the sport mode
is selected, vehicle's response against accelerator operation is enhanced. This provides
additional quick acceleration which may be needed to safely make maneuvers such as lane
changes, merging onto freeways, or passing other vehicles.
CAUTION
Do not use the sport mode when driving on slippery roads such as wet or snow-covered
roads. It may cause tire slipping.
NOTE
yWhen the sport mode is selected, driving at higher engine speeds increases and it may
increase fuel consumption. Mazda recommends that you cancel the sport mode on normal
driving.
yDrive mode cannot be switched in the following conditions:
yABS/TCS/DSC
is operating
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system/cruise control is operating.
ySteering wheel is being operated abruptly
yThe
Drive Selection Switch
Press the drive selection switch forward
”) to select the sport mode.
(“
Pull the drive selection switch back
”) to cancel the sport mode.
(“
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched off, the
sport mode is canceled.
yDepending on the driving conditions
when sport mode is selected, the vehicle
may perform shift-down or slightly
accelerate.
Select Mode Indication
When the sport mode is selected, the select
mode indication turns on in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE
If the drive selection cannot be switched
to sport mode, the select mode indication
Àashes to notify the driver.
4–86
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Power Steering
Power Steering
y
Power
steering is only operable when
the engine is running. If the engine is
off or if the power steering system is
inoperable, you can still steer, but it
requires more physical effort.
If the steering feels stiffer than usual
during normal driving or the steering
vibrates, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
y
The warning indication/warning
light noti¿es the driver of system
abnormalities and operation conditions.
In addition, the buzzer may also activate
depending on the system abnormality or
operation condition.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning
Lights on page 4-33.
Refer to Power Steering Warning Buzzer
on page 7-39.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme left or right for more than 5
seconds with the engine running. This
could damage the power steering
system.
4–87
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
i-ACTIVSENSE*
i-ACTIVSENSE is a collective term covering a series of advanced safety and driver support
systems which make use of a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) and radar sensors. These
systems consist of active safety and pre-crash safety systems.
These systems are designed to assist the driver in safer driving by reducing the load on the
driver and helping to avert collisions or reduce their severity. However, because each system
has its limitations, always drive carefully and do not rely solely on the systems.
Active Safety Technology
Active Safety Technology supports safer driving by helping the driver to recognize potential
hazards and avert accidents.
Driver awareness support systems
Nighttime visibility
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)..............................................................................4-90
High Beam Control System (HBC) ....................................................................................4-91
Rear side detection
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ............................................................................................4-94
Road sign recognition
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) ...........................................................................4-100
Inter-vehicle distance recognition
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) ................................................................4-107
Rear obstruction detection when leaving a parking space
Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) ...................................................................................... 4-111
Driver support systems
Inter-vehicle distance
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) ............................................................................. 4-115
Lane departure
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)...............4-125
Pre-Crash Safety Technology
Pre-crash safety technology is designed to assist the driver in averting collisions or reduce
their severity in situations where they cannot be avoided.
4–88
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Collision damage reduction in low vehicle speed range
Forward driving
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) ...................................................................................4-138
Collision damage reduction in medium/high speed range
Smart Brake Support (SBS) ..............................................................................................4-143
Camera and Sensors
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects lane indications and recognizes headlights,
taillights and city lights during nighttime driving. In addition, it also detects the vehicle
ahead, pedestrians, or obstructions. The following systems also use the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC).
y
High
Beam Control system (HBC)
System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
y
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR)
y
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Lane-keep Assist
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed at the top of the windshield near the
rearview mirror.
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-146.
Radar sensor (front)
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reÀected off a vehicle ahead
sent from the radar sensor. The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).
y
Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Recognition Support System (DRSS)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Distance
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the radiator grille.
Refer to Radar Sensor (Front) on page 4-150.
Radar sensors (rear)
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reÀected off a vehicle
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensors. The following
systems also use the radar sensors (rear).
y
Blind
y
Rear
Spot Monitoring (BSM)
Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA)
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right
sides.
Refer to Radar Sensors (Rear) on page 4-153.
4–89
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)*
The adaptive front lighting system (AFS) automatically adjusts the headlight beams to the
left or right in conjunction with the operation of the steering wheel after the headlights have
been turned on and the vehicle speed is about 2 km/h (2 mph) or higher.
A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-32.
NOTE
The Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) function can be switched to operable/inoperable
using the personalization function.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
4–90
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
High Beam Control System (HBC)*
The High Beam Control System (HBC) determines the conditions in front of the vehicle
using the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) while driving in darkness to automatically switch
the headlights between high and low beams.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-32.
While driving the vehicle at a speed of about 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, the headlights are
switched to high beams when there are no vehicles ahead or approaching in the opposite
direction.
The system switches the headlights to low beams when one of the following occurs:
y
The
system detects a vehicle or the headlights/lights of a vehicle approaching in the
opposite direction.
y
The vehicle is driven on roads lined with streetlamps or on roads in well-lit cities and
towns.
y
The vehicle is driven at less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).
The recognition distance of the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
varies according to the
surrounding conditions.
Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC)
The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning Lights on page 4-33.
CAUTION
¾Do not adjust the vehicle height, modify the headlight units, or remove the camera,
otherwise the system will not operate normally.
¾Do not rely excessively on the High Beam Control System (HBC) and drive the vehicle while
paying sufficient attention to safety. Switch the headlights between the high beams and
low beams manually if necessary.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–91
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
The timing in which the system switches the headlights changes under the following
conditions. If the system does not switch the headlights appropriately, manually switch
between high and low beams according to the visibility as well as road and traf¿c
conditions.
yWhen
there are sources of light in the area such as street lamps, illuminated signboards,
and traf¿c signals.
yWhen there are reÀective objects in the surrounding area such as reÀective plates and
signs.
yWhen visibility is reduced under rain, snow and foggy conditions.
yWhen driving on roads with sharp turn or hilly terrain.
yWhen the headlights/rear lamps of vehicles in front of you or in the opposite lane are dim
or not illuminated.
yWhen there is suf¿cient darkness such as at dawn or dusk.
yWhen the luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats
are occupied.
yWhen visibility is reduced due to a vehicle in front of you spraying water from its tires
onto your windshield.
4–92
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
To Operate the System
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
operates to switch the headlights
automatically between high and low
beams after the ignition is switched ON
and the headlight switch is in the AUTO
and high beam position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
determines that it is dark based on the
brightness of the surrounding area. At the
same time, the High Beam Control System
(HBC) indicator light (green) in the
instrument cluster illuminates.
Manual Switching
Switching to low beams
Shift the lever to the low beam position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (green) turns off.
Switching to high beams
Turn the headlight switch to the
position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (green) turns off and the
is illuminated.
NOTE
yWhen the vehicle speed is about 30
km/h (19 mph) or more, the headlights
automatically switch to high beams
when there are no vehicles ahead or
approaching in the opposite direction.
When the vehicle speed is less than
about 20 km/h (12 mph), the High Beam
Control System (HBC) switches the
headlights to low beams.
yThe low beams may not switch to high
beams when cornering.
yOperation of the High Beam Control
System (HBC) function can be disabled.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
4–93
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)*
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the
rear of the vehicle on both sides during lane changes by notifying the driver of the presence
of vehicles approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) detects vehicles approaching from the rear while
traveling in the forward direction at a speed of 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster and noti¿es
the driver by turning on the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light and
displaying the vehicle detection screen (vehicles with multi-information display and active
driving display).
If the turn signal lever is operated to signal a turn in the direction in which the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light is illuminated while the approaching vehicle is
detected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) noti¿es the driver of possible danger by turning
on the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light, and by activating the warning
sound and the warning screen indicator display (vehicles with multi-information display and
active driving display).
The detection area on this system covers the driving lanes on both sides of the vehicle and
from the rear part of the front doors to about 50 m (164 ft) behind the vehicle.
Your vehicle
Detection areas
WARNING
Always check the surrounding area visually before making an actual lane change:
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at your rear when
making a lane change. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light, the warning sound and the warning
screen indicator display may not activate or they might be delayed even though a vehicle
is in an adjacent driving lane. Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check the
rear.
4–94
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) will operate when all of the following conditions are
met:
yThe
ignition is switched ON.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light in the instrument cluster is
turned off.
yThe vehicle speed is about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster.
yThe
yThe
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) will not operate under the following circumstances.
yThe
vehicle speed falls below about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) even though the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light is turned off.
yThe shift lever (manual transaxle)/selector lever (automatic transaxle) is shifted to
reverse (R) and the vehicle is reversing.
yIn
the following cases, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light turns on and
operation of the system is stopped. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator
light remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
ySome
problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
indicator lights is detected.
yA large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has
occurred.
yThere is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor
(rear). Remove any snow, ice or mud on the rear bumper.
yDriving on snow-covered roads for long periods.
yThe temperature near the radar sensors (rear) becomes extremely hot due to driving
for long periods on slopes during the summer.
yThe battery voltage has decreased.
yUnder
the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it
may be dif¿cult to detect them.
yA
vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but it does not
approach. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) determines the condition based on radar
detection data.
yA vehicle is traveling alongside your vehicle at nearly the same speed for an extended
period of time.
yVehicles approaching in the opposite direction.
yA vehicle in an adjacent driving lane is attempting to pass your vehicle.
yA vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a road with extremely wide driving lanes. The
detection area of the radar sensors (rear) is set at the road width of expressways.
4–95
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yIn
the following case, the Àashing of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator
light, and the activation of the warning sound and the warning screen indicator display
may not occur or they may be delayed.
yA
vehicle makes a lane change from a driving lane two lanes over to an adjacent lane.
on steep slopes.
yCrossing the summit of a hill or mountain pass.
yThe turning radius is small (making a sharp turn, turning at intersections).
yWhen there is a difference in the height between your driving lane and the adjacent
lane.
yDirectly after the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system becomes operable by changing
the setting.
yDriving
yIf
the road width is extremely narrow, vehicles two lanes over may be detected.
The detection area of the radar sensors (rear) is set according to the road width of
expressways.
yThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light may turn on and the vehicle
detection screen may be displayed in the display in reaction to stationary objects
(guardrails, tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles) on the road or the roadside.
Objects such as guardrails and concrete walls
running alongside the vehicle.
Places where the width between guardrails or
walls on each side of the vehicle narrows.
The walls at the entrance and exits of tunnels,
turnouts.
yA
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light may Àash or the warning beep
may be activated several times when making a turn at a city intersection.
yTurn off the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) while pulling a trailer or while an accessory
such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s
radio waves will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.
yIn the following cases, it may be dif¿cult to view the illumination/Àashing of the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights equipped on the door mirrors.
ySnow
yThe
or ice is adhering to the door mirrors.
front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.
4–96
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yIf
a vehicle with the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is driven in a country other than
the U.S.A., Canada, or Mexico, the system has to be turned off by changing the setting on
the center display.
yThe system switches to the Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert function when the shift lever (manual
transaxle) or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) is shifted to the reverse (R) position.
Refer to Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) on page 4-111.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Indicator Lights/Display Indicator/
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Beep
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) or Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) system noti¿es the
driver of the presence of vehicles in adjacent lanes or at the rear of the vehicle using the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light, the warning sound and the display
indicator (vehicles with multi-information display and active driving display) while the
systems are operational.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights are equipped on the left and
right door mirrors. The warning indicator lights turn on when a vehicle approaching from
the rear in an adjacent lane is detected.
When the ignition is switched ON, the warning indicator light turns on momentarily and
then turns off after a few seconds.
Forward driving (Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation)
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) detects vehicles approaching from the rear and turns on
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights equipped on the door mirrors
according to the conditions. Additionally, while a Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
indicator light is illuminated, if the turn signal lever is operated to signal a turn in the
direction in which the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light is illuminated,
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light Àashes.
4–97
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Reverse driving (Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) system operation)
The Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) system detects vehicles approaching from the left and
right of your vehicle and Àashes the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights.
Function for cancelling illumination dimmer
If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights turn on when the parking lights
are turned on, the brightness of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights is
dimmed.
If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights are dif¿cult to see due to
glare from surrounding brightness when traveling on snow-covered roads or under foggy
conditions, press the dimmer cancellation button to cancel the dimmer and increase the
brightness of Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights when they turn on.
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-17.
Display indicator (Vehicles with multi-information display and active driving display)
The detected approaching vehicle and warning are displayed in the multi-information
display and active driving display when the vehicle is moving forward (Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) operational).
Multi-information Display
Detection and warning indicator
Active Driving Display
Detection and warning indicator
The detected direction is displayed with a detection indicator (white) when an approaching
vehicle is detected. In addition, if the turn signal lever is operated to signal a lane change
while the vehicle is detected, the display changes the color (amber) of the warning indicator.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning beep
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning beep is activated simultaneously with the
Àashing of a Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light.
4–98
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Canceling Operation of Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM)
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
can be set to inoperable.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
is set to inoperable, the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross Traf¿c
Alert (RCTA) systems are turned off and
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indicator light in the instrument cluster
turns on.
NOTE
If the engine is stopped while the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) is turned off, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) becomes
operable the next time the engine is
started.
4–99
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR)*
The Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) helps prevent the driver from overlooking
traf¿c signs, and provides support for safer driving by displaying traf¿c signs on the active
driving display which are recognized by the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or recorded in
the navigation system while the vehicle is driven.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign indicated in the active driving display while
the vehicle is driven, the system noti¿es the driver using the indication in the active driving
display and a warning sound.
The Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) displays the speed limit, do not enter, and traf¿c
stop signs.
NOTE
yThe Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) is not supported in some countries or regions.
For information concerning the supported countries or regions, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
yThe Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) operates only if the navigation system SD card
(Mazda genuine) is inserted in the SD card slot. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
4–100
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Speed limit signs and do not enter signs
Stop sign
WARNING
Always check the traffic signs visually while driving.
The Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR) helps prevent the driver from overlooking traffic
signs and provides support for safer driving. Depending on the weather conditions or
problems with traffic signs, a traffic sign may not be recognized or a traffic sign different
from the actual traffic sign may be displayed. Always make it your responsibility as a
driver to check the traffic signs. Otherwise, it could result in an unexpected accident.
4–101
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) does not operate if there is a malfunction in
the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
yUnder the following conditions, the Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) may not
operate normally.
yAn
object placed on the dashboard is reÀected in the windshield and picked up by the
camera.
yHeavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the
vehicle is tilted.
yThe tire pressures are not adjusted to the speci¿ed pressure.
yTires other than standard tires are equipped.
yThe vehicle is driven on the ramp and surrounding area to or from a rest area or a
tollgate on a highway.
yWhen surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a
tunnel.
yThe illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is
deviated.
yThe windshield is dirty or foggy.
yThe windshield and camera are fogged (water droplets).
yStrong light is directed at the front of the vehicle (such as backlight or high-beam
headlights of on-coming vehicles).
yThe vehicle is making a sharp turn.
yStrong light reÀects off the road.
yA traf¿c sign is in a position which makes it dif¿cult to reÀect the light from the
vehicle's headlights, such as when the vehicle is driven at night or in a tunnel.
yThe vehicle is driven under weather conditions such as rain, fog, or snow.
yThe stored map data for the navigation system is not current.
yThe camera cannot capture a traf¿c sign's image.
yA traf¿c sign is obscured by mud or snow.
yA traf¿c sign is concealed by trees or a vehicle.
yA traf¿c sign is partially shaded.
yA traf¿c sign is bent or warped.
yA traf¿c sign is too low or too high.
yA traf¿c sign is too bright or too dark (including electronic traf¿c signs).
yA traf¿c sign is too big or too small.
yThere is an object similar to the traf¿c sign being read (such as another traf¿c sign or
other signs resembling it).
yThe
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) does not operate if the active driving display
is set to non-display.
yThe Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR) can be set to inoperable.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
4–102
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Traf¿c Sign Display Indication
The following traf¿c signs are displayed on the active driving display.
Speed limit signs
Do not enter signs
Stop signs
The above indications are some examples.
4–103
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
Speed limit signs
yWhen
the vehicle speed is about 1 km/h (0.6 mph) or faster, the speed limit sign is
displayed when any one of the following conditions are met.
yThe
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) recognizes a speed limit sign as a sign targeted
for your vehicle and the vehicle passes it.
yThe speed limit sign stored in the navigation system is read (if the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) does not recognize a speed limit sign).
yIn
the following cases, display of the speed limit sign stops.
yThe
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) recognizes the speed limit sign and the vehicle is
driven for a certain distance after passing the sign.
yEach sensor determines that the vehicle has changed direction of travel.
yThe Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) recognizes a new speed limit sign which differs
from the previous one (displays the new speed limit sign).
yThe speed limit sign stored in the navigation system is not read within a certain period
of time (if the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) does not recognize a speed limit sign,
the speed limit sign stored in the navigation system is displayed).
yThe vehicle speed exceeds the displayed speed limit sign by 30 km/h (19 mph) or more
after a certain period of time has elapsed since the speed limit sign was displayed.
(Except when there is information for the speed limit sign in the navigation system)
Do not enter signs
yA
do not enter sign is displayed when all of the following conditions are met.
yThe
vehicle speed is about 60 km/h (37 mph) or slower.
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) recognizes a do not enter sign as a sign targeted
for your vehicle and the vehicle passes it.
yThe
yIn
the following case, the display of the do not enter sign stops.
yThe
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) recognizes the do not enter sign and a certain
period of time has elapsed since the vehicle passed the sign.
Stop sign
yA
stop sign is displayed when all of the following conditions are met:
yThe
vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) or slower.
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) recognizes a stop sign as a sign targeted for your
vehicle.
yThe
yIn
the following cases, display of the stop sign stops.
yA
certain period of time has elapsed since the stop sign was displayed.
4–104
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Excessive Speed Warning
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed on the active driving display,
the warning sound is activated and the area around the speed limit sign displayed on the
active driving display Àashes 3 times in amber, and if the vehicle speed continues to exceed
the displayed speed limit sign, the indication stops Àashing and remains on. Check the
surrounding conditions and adjust the vehicle speed to the legal speed using the appropriate
operation such as depressing the brake pedal.
4–105
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe excessive speed warning is initially set to inoperable. If you want to activate the
excessive speed warning, change the setting in the personalization features.
yOff:
The excessive speed warning is not activated.
display only: The area around the speed limit sign Àashes 3 times in amber,
and if the vehicle speed continues to exceed the displayed speed limit sign, the
indication stops Àashing and remains on.
yWarning display
warning sound: The area around the speed limit sign Àashes 3
times in amber, and if the vehicle speed continues to exceed the displayed speed limit
sign, the indication stops Àashing and remains on and the warning sound is activated.
yWarning
yIn
the following cases, the excessive speed warning stops operating.
yThe
vehicle speed is less than the speed of the displayed speed limit sign. (If the
activation timing for the excessive speed warning is changed in the personalization
features, the excessive speed warning stops operating when the vehicle speed is less
than the changed vehicle speed.
yA speed limit sign indication has been updated and the conditions for activating the
excessive speed warning are not met.
yDisplay of the speed limit sign stops.
yThe
warning indication is displayed at the same time the excessive speed warning sound
is activated if the vehicle speed exceeds the speed indicated on the speed limit sign.
Refer to Warning Sound is Activated on page 7-36.
yIf the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) displays a speed limit sign which was recognized
incorrectly, the excessive speed alarm is activated even if the vehicle is driven at the legal
speed.
yThe following settings can be changed for the excessive speed warning.
yWarning
yTiming
sound and indication pattern
at which the warning is activated
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
4–106
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS)*
The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) measures the distance between your
vehicle and a vehicle ahead using a radar sensor (front) while the vehicle speed is about 30
km/h (19 mph) or faster, and if your vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead more closely than
what is appropriate for maintaining distance between the vehicles according to the vehicle
speed, a noti¿cation in the active driving display is indicated to advise you to keep a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) and always
drive carefully:
The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) provides advice for safer driving and
notifies the driver of a recommended, safer distance to maintain with a vehicle ahead.
The ability to detect a vehicle ahead is limited depending on the type of vehicle ahead,
the weather conditions, and the traffic conditions. Therefore, if the accelerator and brake
pedals are not operated correctly it could lead to an accident. Always verify the safety of
the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a
safer distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
NOTE
yThe Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) operates when all of the following
conditions are met:
yThe
ignition is switched ON.
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) is on.
yThe selector lever is in a position other than reverse (R).
yThe vehicle speed is 30 km/h or faster (19 mph or faster).
yThe
yThe
objects which activate the system are 4-wheeled vehicles.
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) may also operate in the presence of
motorcycles and bicycles.
yThe Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) system may not operate normally
under the following conditions:
yThe
yThe
yThe
yThe
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) has a malfunction.
vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed.
system does not operate with the following objects:
yVehicles
approaching in the opposite direction.
objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)
yStationary
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–107
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Indication on Display
The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) operation status is indicated in the active
driving display or multi-information display. Regarding malfunctions, check the vehicle
conditions or have it inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the content of
the displayed message.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-32.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched off, the operation status before the system was turned off
is maintained. For example, if the ignition is switched off with the Distance Recognition
Support System (DRSS) operable, the system will be operable when the ignition is
switched ON the next time.
yThe Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) can be turned on/off and the system's
sensitivity can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Vehicle ahead
display
Vehicle ahead
display
4–108
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Distance-between-vehicles guidelines*1
Indication on display
Multi-information display
Active driving display
Distance between
Distance between
vehicles guidelines
vehicles guidelines
(During travel at about (During travel at about
80 km/h (50 mph)
40 km/h (25 mph)
—
About 25 m (82 ft)
About 50 m (164 ft)
—
About 20 m (66 ft)
About 40 m (131 ft)
—
About 15 m (49 ft)
About 30 m (98 ft)
—
About 10 m (33 ft)
About 20 m (66 ft)
4–109
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Indication on display
Multi-information display
Active driving display
Illuminated in
amber
Distance between
Distance between
vehicles guidelines
vehicles guidelines
(During travel at about (During travel at about
40 km/h (25 mph)
80 km/h (50 mph)
About 10 m (32 ft) or
less
About 20 m (65 ft) or
less
Flashes in white*2
*1 The distance between vehicles differs depending on vehicle speed.
*2 Indication when the distance setting for notifying the driver that the vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead is Near.
4–110
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA)*
The Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) system is designed to assist the driver in checking the
area to the rear of the vehicle on both sides while the vehicle is reversing by alerting the
driver to the presence of vehicles approaching the rear of the vehicle.
The Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) system detects vehicles approaching from the left
and right sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is being reversed out of a parking space,
and noti¿es the driver of possible danger using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
indicator lights and the warning buzzer.
Your vehicle
Detection areas
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–111
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) operation
1. The Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) system operates when the shift lever (manual
transaxle) or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) is shifted to the reverse (R) position.
2. If there is the possibility of a collision with an approaching vehicle, the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights Àashes and the warning beep is activated
simultaneously.
The Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) warning indication in the rearview monitor also
synchronizes with the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator light on the door
mirrors.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding area visually before actually putting the vehicle in
reverse:
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at the rear when putting
the vehicle in reverse. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights may not flash or it might be delayed
even though a vehicle is behind your vehicle. Always make it your responsibility as a
driver to check the rear.
4–112
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yIn the following cases, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light turns on and
operation of the system is stopped. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator
light remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
ySome
problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
indicator lights has occurred.
yA large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has
occurred.
yThere is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor
(rear).
yDriving on snow-covered roads for long periods.
yThe temperature near the radar sensors becomes extremely hot due to driving for long
periods on slopes during the summer.
yThe battery voltage has decreased.
4–113
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yUnder
the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it
may be dif¿cult to detect them.
yThe
vehicle speed when reversing is about 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.
radar sensor (rear) detection area is obstructed by a nearby wall or parked
vehicle. (Reverse the vehicle to a position where the radar sensor detection area is no
longer obstructed.)
yThe
Your vehicle
yA
vehicle is approaching directly from the rear of your vehicle.
Your vehicle
yThe
vehicle is parked on a slant.
Your vehicle
yDirectly
after the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system becomes operable.
yIn
the following cases, it may be dif¿cult to view the illumination/Àashing of the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator lights equipped on the door mirrors.
ySnow
yThe
or ice adheres to the door mirrors.
front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.
yTurn
off the Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) system while pulling a trailer or while an
accessory such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise,
the radio waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not operate
normally.
4–114
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)*
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to maintain headway control*1
according to the vehicle speed using a radar sensor (front) to detect the distance to a vehicle
ahead, and by presetting the vehicle speed between 30 km/h (19 mph) and 145 km/h (90
mph), the driver is freed from having to constantly use the accelerator or brake pedals.
*1 Headway Control: Control of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
detected by the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system.
Additionally, if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead because, for example, the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, a warning sound and a warning indication in the display are
activated simultaneously to alert you to maintain a suf¿cient distance between the vehicles.
Use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system on expressways and other highways
which do not require a lot of repeated acceleration and deceleration.
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system and always
drive carefully:
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to reduce load on the driver,
and although it maintains a constant vehicle speed, or specifically, it maintains a constant
distance between your vehicle and the detected vehicle ahead according to the vehicle
speed, the system has detection limitations depending on the type of vehicle ahead and its
conditions, the weather conditions, and the road conditions. Additionally, the system may
be unable to decelerate sufficiently to avoid hitting the vehicle ahead if the vehicle ahead
applies the brakes suddenly or another vehicle cuts into the driving lane, which could result in
an accident. Always verify the safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal while keeping a safer distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system in the following locations.
Otherwise, it could lead to an accident:
¾Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy and there is insufficient
space between vehicles. Roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration and
deceleration occur (Driving under these conditions using the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not possible).
¾When entering and exiting interchanges, service areas, and parking areas of highways
(If you exit a highway while headway control is in use, the vehicle ahead will no longer
be tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed).
¾Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads (The tires could spin causing you to
lose vehicle control).
¾Long descending slopes (to maintain distance between vehicles, the system automatically
and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the loss of brake power).
For the purposes of safety, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system off
when it is not being used.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–115
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CAUTION
If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system off to prevent an incorrect operation.
NOTE
yThe Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
yThe
vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph).
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is turned on.
yThe parking brake is not applied.
yThe Smart Brake Support (SBS) is not malfunctioning.
yThe Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is operating normally.
yThe
yThe
selector lever is in the drive (D) position or manual (M) position (manual mode).
doors are closed.
yThe driver's seat belt is fastened.
yAll
yIn
the following cases, the warnings may not activate even if your vehicle starts closing in
on the vehicle ahead.
yYou
are driving at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
after the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system has been set.
yWhen the accelerator pedal is depressed or directly after the accelerator pedal is
released.
yAnother vehicle cuts into the driving lane.
yDirectly
yThe
following are not detected as physical objects.
yVehicles
approaching in the opposite direction
yPedestrians
yStationary
objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)
yIf
a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed, the system may not detect it
correctly.
yDuring headway control travel, do not set the system on two-wheeled vehicles such as
motorcycles and bicycles.
yDo not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system under conditions in which
the close proximity warnings are frequently activated.
yDuring headway control travel, the system accelerates and decelerates your vehicle in
conjunction with the speed of the vehicle ahead. However, if it is necessary to accelerate
for a lane change or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly causing you to close in on the
vehicle rapidly, accelerate using the accelerator pedal or decelerate using the brake
pedal depending on the conditions.
4–116
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yWhile
the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is in use, it does not cancel
even if the selector lever is operated and any intended engine braking will not occur. If
deceleration is required, lower the vehicle speed setting or depress the brake pedal.
yThe brake lights are illuminated while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
automatic braking is operating.
yIf there is a problem with the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system, a message is
displayed in the multi-information display. Check the center display to verify the problem
and then have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Refer to Message Indicated on Display on page 7-33.
yThe headway control operation can be canceled and the system can be switched to only
cruise control. Refer to Cruise Control Function on page 4-123.
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Display Indication
The setting status and operation conditions of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system are indicated in the multi-information display and the active driving display.
Vehicle ahead display
MRCC Distance
between vehicle
display
MRCC Set
vehicle speed
Vehicle ahead display
MRCC Distance
between vehicle
display
MRCC Set vehicle speed
4–117
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Close Proximity Warning
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the vehicle ahead because the vehicle applies the brakes
suddenly while you are traveling in headway control, the warning sound activates and
the brake warning is indicated in the display. Always verify the safety of the surrounding
area and depress the brake pedal while keeping a safer distance from the vehicle ahead.
Additionally, always keep a safer distance from the vehicles behind you.
Multi-information Display
Active Driving Display
Setting the System
switch
switch
MODE switch
SET+ switch
RES switch
SET- switch
CANCEL switch
OFF switch
When the MODE switch is pressed, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) main
indication (white) turns on and the vehicle speed and the distance between vehicles while in
headway control can be set.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) is ON, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) remains ON automatically.
yWhen the MODE switch is pressed while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system is turned on, the system switches to the cruise control function.
4–118
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
How to Set the Speed
1. Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired setting using the accelerator pedal.
2. Headway control begins when the SET or SET switch is pressed. The set speed and
the inter-vehicle distance display ¿lled with white lines are displayed. The Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) set indication (green) is indicated simultaneously.
Travel status
Multi-information display
Active driving display
During travel at constant speed
During travel under headway control
NOTE
yIf a vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed, the vehicle-ahead
indication is displayed and headway control is performed. Additionally, when a vehicle
ahead is no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead indication turns off and the system
switches back to travel at constant speed.
yHeadway control is not possible if the vehicle ahead is driving faster than the set speed.
Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the accelerator pedal.
4–119
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
How to Set the Distance Between Vehicles During Headway Control
The distance between vehicles is set to a shorter distance each time the switch is pressed.
The distance between vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing the switch. The
distance-between-vehicles can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short, and extremely short
distance.
Distance-between-vehicles guideline
(at 80 km/h (50 mph) vehicle speed)
Indication on multi-information
display
Indication on active driving
display
Long (about 50 m (164 ft))
Medium (about 40 m (131 ft))
Short (about 30 m (98 ft))
Extremely short (about 25 m (82 ft))
NOTE
yThe distance between vehicles differs depending on the vehicle speed, and the slower the
vehicle speed, the shorter the distance.
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF and then the engine is started again, the
system automatically sets the distance between vehicles to the previous setting.
4–120
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Changing the Set Vehicle Speed
Changing the set vehicle speed using the
SET switch
Press the SET switch to accelerate.
Press the SET switch to decelerate.
The set vehicle speed changes as follows
each time the SET switch is pressed.
Short press
1 km/h (1 mph)
Long press
10 km/h (5 mph)
NOTE
For example, the set vehicle speed is
changed by pressing the SET switch four
times as follows:
The vehicle speed accelerates or
decelerates by 4 km/h (4 mph).
To accelerate using the accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal and press
and release the SET or SET switch at
the desired speed. If a switch cannot be
operated, the system returns to the set
speed when you release your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
NOTE
yWhen accelerating using the SET
switch while in headway control, the set
vehicle speed can be adjusted but
acceleration is not possible. If there is
no longer a vehicle ahead, acceleration
continues until reaching the set vehicle
speed. Check the set vehicle speed by
viewing the set vehicle speed display in
the multi-information display and the
active driving display.
yWhen depressing the accelerator pedal,
the inter-vehicle distance display in the
multi-information display changes to
the white-line display.
yThe minimum settable speed is 30 km/h
(19 mph). If the set vehicle speed
reaches 30 km/h (19 mph) using the
switch operation, constant speed travel
is maintained at about 30 km/h (19
mph) even if the SET switch is
pressed. The Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not canceled.
To Deactivate
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
is deactivated when the OFF/CAN switch
is pressed twice.
CAUTION
The warnings and brake control do not
operate while the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
4–121
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
When the system is temporarily
canceled
In the following cases, the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) is temporarily
canceled, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) set indication (green) is turned
off, and the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) main indication (white) is turned
on.
y
The
OFF/CAN switch is pressed once.
brake pedal is depressed.
y
The parking brake is applied.
y
The selector lever is shifted to park (P),
neutral (N) or reverse (R).
y
In the following cases, the “Mazda
Radar Cruise Control Canceled”
indication is displayed and the beep
sounds one time.
y
The
NOTE
yThe Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system may be canceled during
rain, fog, snow or other inclement
weather conditions, or the front surface
of the radiator grille is dirty.
yIf you have temporarily canceled the
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC),
you can return to your previously set
speed by pressing the RES switch and
after all of the operation conditions
have been met.
yIf the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system is deactivated, the
system does not return to the previously
set speed even if the RES switch is
pressed.
The vehicle speed decreases to less
than 25 km (16 mph).
y The DSC has operated.
y The TCS has operated for a certain
period of time.
y The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
has operated.
y The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has
operated.
y When traveling on a down slope for a
long period of time.
y Any door is opened.
y The driver's seat belt is unfastened.
y There is a problem with the system.
y
4–122
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Cruise Control Function
While this function is operating, the
headway control operation is canceled and
only the cruise control function operates.
The vehicle speed can be set more than
about 25 km/h (16 mph).
Use the cruise control function on
expressways and other highways which do
not require a lot of repeated acceleration
and deceleration.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control function in
the following locations:
Otherwise, it could lead to an accident.
¾Roads with sharp curves and where
vehicle traffic is heavy and there is
insufficient space between vehicles.
(Driving under these conditions
using the cruise control function is
not possible)
¾Steep down slopes (Set speed may
be exceeded because sufficient
engine braking cannot be applied)
¾Slippery roads such as ice or snow
bound roads (Tires could spin
causing you to lose vehicle control)
Always drive carefully:
The warnings and brake control
will not operate after the headway
control function is canceled and the
system is switched to only the cruise
control function. Depress the brake
pedal to decelerate according to the
surrounding conditions while keeping
a safer distance from the vehicle ahead
and always driving carefully.
Switching to cruise control function
When the MODE switch is pressed while
the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system is turned on, the system switches to
the cruise control function.
When the system switches to the cruise
control function, the indicator and multiinformation display notify the driver as
follows:
y
The
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) set indication (green) or the
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
main indication (white) is turned off,
and the cruise main indication (white) is
turned on.
y
A message is displayed in the multiinformation display.
WARNING
Always turn off the cruise control
function when it is not in use:
Leaving the cruise control function
turned on when it is not in use
is dangerous as it could operate
unexpectedly, resulting in an accident.
How to set the speed
Adjust the system to the desired vehicle
speed using the accelerator pedal.
When the SET or SET switch is
pressed, the cruise set indication (green) is
turned on and headway control begins.
4–123
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe system may not be able to maintain
the set speed constantly depending on
driving conditions such as steep up or
down slopes.
yThe speed will continue increasing
while the SET switch is pressed and
held. The speed will continue
decreasing while the SET switch is
pressed and held.
How to increase the set speed
The set speed can be increased using the
following operations:
To increase speed using the SET
switch
Press and hold the SET switch and
release the switch at the desired speed.
The set speed can be adjusted
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph)
increments) by pressing the switch and
releasing it immediately. For example, if
the switch is pressed 4 times, the set speed
increases by about 4 km/h (4 mph).
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal and press the
SET or SET switch at the desired
speed.
If the switch is not operated, the system
returns to the set speed after you release
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
How to Decrease the Set Speed
Press the SET switch continuously and
release the switch at the desired speed.
The set speed can be adjusted
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph) increments)
by pressing the switch and releasing it
immediately. For example, if the switch
is pressed 4 times, the set vehicle speed
decreases by about 4 km/h (4 mph).
Cancelling the function
Cancelling using OFF/CAN switch
When the OFF/CAN switch is pressed
once, the cruise control function is
cancelled.
Cancelling using MODE switch
When the MODE switch is pressed, the
cruise control function is canceled and
the headway control function is made
available for operation.
The cruise control function is canceled
automatically in the following cases. If the
RES switch is pressed while the vehicle
speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or higher, the
speed returns to the original set speed.
y
The
OFF/CAN switch is pressed once.
brake pedal is depressed.
y
The parking brake is applied.
y
The
y
The
selector lever is shifted to P or N
position.
NOTE
yIf the vehicle speed decreases by about
15 km/h (9.4 mph) or more than the set
speed, the cruise control function may
be canceled.
yWhen the vehicle speed is less than
21 km/h (13 mph), the cruise control
function is canceled. In this case, the
vehicle speed will not return to the
original set speed even if the vehicle
is accelerated to 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher and the RES switch is pressed.
Reset the cruise control function.
4–124
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS)*
The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) alerts the
driver that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane and it provides steering assistance to
help the driver stay within the vehicle lanes.
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects the white lines (yellow lines) of the vehicle
lane in which the vehicle is traveling and if the system determines that the vehicle may
deviate from its lane, it operates the electric power steering to assist the driver's steering
operation. The system also alerts the driver by activating a lane departure warning sound,
vibrating the steering wheel, and indicating an alert in the display.
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-146.
Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC)
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–125
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS):
¾The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) is not an
automatic driving system. In addition, the system is not designed to compensate for a
driver's lack of caution, and over-reliance on the system could lead to an accident.
¾The detection ability of the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) is limited. Always stay on course using the steering wheel and drive
with care.
Do not use the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) in the following cases:
The system may not operate adequately according to the actual driving conditions,
resulting in an accident.
¾Driving on roads with tight curves.
¾Driving under bad weather conditions (rain, fog, and snow).
¾Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads.
¾Roads with heavy traffic and insufficient distance between vehicles.
¾Roads with no white (yellow) lane lines.
¾Narrow roads resulting from road construction or lane closures.
¾The vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane resulting from
road construction where there may be multiple white (yellow) lane lines or they are
interrupted.
¾The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.
¾Tires of a different specified size are used, such as an emergency spare tire.
CAUTION
Heed the following cautions so that the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) can operate normally.
¾Do not modify the suspensions.
¾Always use wheels of the specified type and size for the front and rear wheels. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.
4–126
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yWhen the turn signal lever is operated for a lane change, the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) is automatically disabled. The
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) becomes
operational again when the turn signal lever is returned and the system detects white
(yellow) lane lines while the vehicle is being driven normally within its vehicle lane.
yIf the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake pedal is operated abruptly and the
vehicle moves close to a white (yellow) line, the system determines that the driver is
making a lane change and the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) operation is temporarily canceled. The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)
& Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) becomes operational again when the system
detects white (yellow) lane lines while the vehicle is being driven normally within its
vehicle lane.
yIf the vehicle deviates from its lane repeatedly within a short period of time, the Lane
keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) may not operate.
yWhen white (yellow) lane lines are not detected, the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) does not operate.
4–127
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yUnder
the following conditions, the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) may not be able to detect white (yellow) lane lines correctly and
it may not operate normally.
yIf
an object placed on the dashboard is reÀected in the windshield and picked up by the
camera.
yHeavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the
vehicle is tilted.
yThe tire pressures are not adjusted to the speci¿ed pressure.
yTires other than conventional tires are equipped.
yWhen the vehicle is driven on the guiding branch to or from the rest area or tollgate of
a highway.
yThe white (yellow) lane lines are less visible because of dirt or fading/patchiness.
yA vehicle in front of your vehicle is running near a white (yellow) lane line making it
less visible.
yA white (yellow) lane line is less visible because of bad weather (rain, fog, or snow).
yThe vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane resulting
from construction where there may be multiple white (yellow) lane lines or they are
interrupted.
yA misleading line is picked up on the road such as a temporary line for construction,
or because of shade, lingering snow, or grooves ¿lled with water.
yThe surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a
tunnel.
yThe illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is
deviated.
yThe windshield is dirty or foggy.
yThe windshield, camera is fogged (water droplets).
yBack-light is reÀected off the road surface.
yThe road surface is wet and shiny after rain, or there are puddles on the road.
yThe shade of a guardrail parallel to a white (yellow) lane line is cast on the road.
yThe width of the driving lane is narrow (less than about 2.5 m (98 in)) or wide (more
than about 4.5 m (178 in))
yDriving on roads with tight curves.
yThe road is excessively uneven.
yThe vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump.
yThere are two or more adjacent white (yellow) lane lines.
yThere are various road markings or lane markings of various shapes near an
intersection.
4–128
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
System Operation
Make sure that the Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) OFF indicator light in
the instrument cluster is turned off. When
the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
OFF indicator light is turned on, press the
switch and make sure that the indicator
light turns off.
Drive the vehicle in the center of the
vehicle lane while the system is on
standby. When all of the following
conditions are met, the Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) indication (green) is
displayed in the multi-information display,
and the system becomes operational.
(Green)
y
The
engine is running.
vehicle speed is about 60 km/h (37
mph) or faster.
y
The system detects white (yellow) lane
lines on both the right and left sides.
y
The driver is operating the steering
wheel.
y
The driving lane is neither narrow nor
wide.
y
The
The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
indication (white) is displayed in the
multi-information display, and the system
goes on stand-by.
(White)
NOTE
The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
indication is white when the system detects
only a white (yellow) line on either the
left or right, and the indication changes
to green when the system detects white
(yellow) lines on both the left and right
sides.
Detection only on
either left or right
Detects on both
left and right sides
(White)
(Green)
4–129
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
goes on stand-by status in the following
cases:
y
The
system cannot detect white (yellow)
lane lines.
y
The vehicle speed is less than about 60
km/h (37 mph).
y
The ABS/TCS/DSC is operating.
y
The DSC is turned off.
(If the DSC is turned off while the
system is operational, a warning beep is
heard and the system goes on standby.)
y
The vehicle is making a sharp curve.
y
The driver takes his or her hands off the
steering wheel (not holding the steering
wheel).
y
The brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE
yThe Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)
& Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) does not operate until the
system detects white (yellow) lane lines
on either the left or right.
yWhen the system detects a white
(yellow) lane line on one side only, the
system will not activate warnings for the
lane line on the side that is not being
detected. The warning is only for a
lane deviation on the side that is being
detected.
yIf
the driver takes his or her hands off
the steering wheel (not holding the
steering wheel), the warning sound is
activated and an alert is indicated in the
multi-information display.
If the steering wheel is held lightly,
or depending on the road conditions,
the system may detect that you have
released the steering wheel (not holding
the steering wheel) even if you are
holding it, and display a message in the
multi-information display.
yThe timing at which the lane departure
warning is activated and the steering
wheel operation assist is performed
varies.
yThe following settings for the Lane
keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS) can
be changed. Refer to Personalization
Features on page 9-10.
ySteering
operation assist
operational/non-operational
yCancel sensitivity (likelihood of
steering assist)
4–130
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Vehicle lane line display
When the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) becomes operational while
on standby, the vehicle lane lines are
displayed in the multi-information display
and the active driving display. In the
vehicle lane lines display indicating the
operation status, the color of the vehicle
lane lines being detected changes to white.
(Stand-by status)
Multi-information Display
Auto cancel
In the following cases, the Lane-keep
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) is automatically
canceled, the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) and Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) warning indication
(amber) turns on, and an alert is displayed.
When the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) become operational, the system
turns back on automatically.
y
The
Active Driving Display
(Operational status)
Multi-information Display
Active Driving Display
temperature inside the camera is
high or low.
y
The windshield around the camera is
foggy.
y
The windshield around the camera is
blocked by an obstruction, causing poor
forward visibility.
Auto cancel of warning/steering assist
When the following operations are
performed, the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) determines that the driver intends
to make a lane change and the system
operation is canceled automatically. The
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
resumes automatically after the operation.
y
The
steering wheel is operated abruptly.
brake pedal is operated.
y
The accelerator pedal is operated.
(To cancel the automatic sensitivity
cancel function, deselect “Cancel
sensitivity” in the personalization
features setting.)
y
The turn signal lever is operated.
y
The vehicle crosses a lane line.
y
The
4–131
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yAfter the operation, the Lane-keep
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) operation may
not operate for a period of 5 seconds
at the most until the lane lines are
detected.
yUnder the following conditions, the
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
cancels the warning/steering assist
automatically.
driver takes his/her hands off the
steering wheel.
(The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)
& Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) is designed to assist the
driver's steering operation and it
will resume operation automatically
when the driver holds the steering
wheel.)
yThe DSC OFF switch is pressed to
cancel the DSC.
System operation
Make sure that the Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) OFF indicator light is in
the instrument cluster turned off. When the
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS) OFF
indicator light turns on, press the switch
and make sure that the indicator light turns
off.
yThe
Steering operation assist OFF (nonoperational)
The steering operation assist for the
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS) can
be changed to non-operational (OFF).
Refer to Setting Change (Personalization
Features) on page 9-10.
When the steering operation assist has
been changed to non-operational (OFF),
the operation conditions and the display
of the Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
differ. Operate the system as follows:
Drive the vehicle in the center of the
driving lane while the Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) OFF indicator light in the
instrument cluster is turned off.
The system becomes operational when all
of the following conditions are met.
y
The
system detects white (yellow) lane
lines on both the right and left sides or
on either side.
y
The vehicle speed is about 60 km/h
(37 mph) or faster.
y
The vehicle is driven on a straight road
or road with gentle curves.
y
The engine is running.
4–132
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
goes on stand-by status in the following
cases:
y
The
system cannot detect white (yellow)
lane lines.
y
The vehicle speed is less than about 60
km/h (37 mph).
y
The vehicle is making a sharp curve.
y
The vehicle is making a curve at an
inappropriate speed.
Vehicle lane line display
When the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) becomes operational while
on standby, the vehicle lane lines are
displayed in the multi-information display
and the active driving display. The system
changes to operational status display when
the system detects a white (yellow) line on
either the left or right.
(Stand-by status)
Multi-information Display
NOTE
yThe Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)
& Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) remains on stand-by until it
detects white (yellow) lines on both the
left and right sides, or on either side.
yWhen the system detects a white
(yellow) lane line on one side only, the
system will not activate warnings for the
lane line on the side that is not being
detected.
yThe distance and warning sensitivity
(likelihood of a warning) which the
system uses to determine the possibility
of a lane departure can be changed.
Refer to Setting Change
(Personalization Features) on page
9-10.
Active Driving Display
(Operational status)
Multi-information Display
Active Driving Display
4–133
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Auto cancel
In the following cases, the Lane-keep
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) is automatically
canceled, the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) and Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) warning indication
(amber) turns on, and an alert is displayed.
When the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) become operational, the system
turns back on automatically.
temperature inside the camera is
high or low.
y
The windshield around the camera is
foggy.
y
The windshield around the camera is
blocked by an obstruction, causing poor
forward visibility.
System Canceling
When the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) is turned off, press the Lane-keep
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) OFF switch.
y
The
(Auto cancel of warnings)
When the following operations are
performed, the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) determines that the driver intends
to make a lane change and the system
operation is canceled automatically. The
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS) is
resumes automatically after the operation.
The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
OFF indicator light turns on.
y
The
steering wheel is operated abruptly.
brake pedal is depressed.
y
The accelerator pedal is depressed.
(To cancel the automatic sensitivity
cancel function, deselect “Warning
sensitivity” in the personalization
features setting.)
y
The turn signal lever is operated.
y
The vehicle crosses a lane line.
y
The
4–134
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched OFF, the
system status before it was turned off is
maintained. For example, if the ignition
is switched OFF with the lane-keep
system operable, the system will be
operable when the ignition is switched
ON the next time.
yIn
the following cases, the Lane-keep
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) is canceled
automatically and the Lane-keep
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) OFF
indication is displayed in the multiinformation display. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
yThere
is a malfunction in the power
steering.
yThere is a malfunction in the DSC.
yThere is a malfunction in the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
When the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) is turned off, the vehicle lane line
indication in the multi-information display
and the active driving display turn off.
4–135
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Lane Departure Warning
If the system determines that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, the lane departure
warning (beep sound, rumble sound*1, or steering wheel vibration) is activated and the
direction in which the system determines that the vehicle may deviate is indicated in the
multi-information display and the active driving display.
If the system determines that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, the color of the lane line
on the side being detected by the system changes from white to amber, and Àashes.
Multi-information Display
Active Driving Display
4–136
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yIf you have set the lane departure warning sound to the beep sound/rumble sound*1
setting, the warning sound may not be heard depending on the surrounding noise
conditions.
yIf you have set the lane departure warning system to the steering wheel vibrations setting,
the vibration may not be felt depending on the road surface conditions.
yWhen the setting for the steering operation assist is changed to operational, the warnings
can be set to activate/not activate. (When the setting for the steering operation assist is
changed to non-operational, the warnings cannot be set to not activate.)
Refer to Setting Change (Personalization Features) on page 9-10.
yThe Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) can be
changed to the following settings regardless of whether the steering operation assist has
been set to operational/non-operational. Always check the setting status when driving the
vehicle and make setting changes if necessary.
Refer to Setting Change (Personalization Features) on page 9-10.
ySteering
wheel vibration: Strong/weak
sound volume
yTypes of warnings (steering wheel vibration/beep sound/rumble sound*1)
yWarning
*1 A rumble strip is a series of grooves in the road pavement surface positioned at speci¿c
intervals, and when the vehicle passes over it a vibration and rumble sound is produced
which alerts the driver that the vehicle is departing from the lane.
The rumble sound is a reproduction of the sound which occurs when a vehicle passes
over a rumble strip.
Rumble
Groove
4–137
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)*
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system alerts the driver of a possible collision using
an indication in the display and a warning sound when the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
detects a vehicle ahead and determines that a collision with a vehicle ahead is unavoidable
while the vehicle is being driven at a vehicle speed of about 4 to 80 km/h (2 to 50 mph).
In addition, the system reduces damage in the event of a collision by operating the brake
control (SCBS brake) when the system determines that a collision is unavoidable while the
vehicle is being driven at a vehicle speed of about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph). It may also
be possible to avoid a collision if the relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you is less than about 20 km/h (12 mph). In addition, when the driver depresses the
brake pedal while the system is in the operation range at about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph),
the brakes are applied ¿rmly and quickly to assist. (Brake Assist (SCBS brake assist))
Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC)
4–138
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system:
¾The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is only designed to reduce damage in the
event of a collision. Over reliance on the system leading to the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal being mistakenly operated could result in an accident.
¾The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is a system which operates in response to a
vehicle ahead. The system may not be able to detect or react to 2-wheeled vehicles or
pedestrians.
CAUTION
When driving off-road in areas where there is dense grass, it is recommended that the
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system be turned off.
In the following cases, turn the system off to prevent a mis-operation:
¾The vehicle is being towed or when towing another vehicle.
¾The vehicle is on a chassis roller.
¾When driving on rough roads such as in areas of dense grass or off-road.
Refer to Stopping the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system Operation on page 4-142
on how to turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system.
4–139
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will operate under the following conditions.
yThe
engine is running.
City Brake Support Malfunction. Forward SCBS Disabled.” is not displayed in
the multi-information display. (with multi-information display)
yThe Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) system warning
indication/warning light (amber) does not illuminate.
y(Rear-end collision warning)
The vehicle speed is about 4 to 80 km/h (2 to 50 mph).
y(Brake control (SCBS brake))
The vehicle speed is about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph).
yThe Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is not turned off.
y“Smart
yUnder
the following conditions, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may not
operate normally:
yThe
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will not operate if the driver is
deliberately performing driving operations (accelerator pedal and steering wheel).
yIf there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle ahead.
yThe vehicle is driven on a slippery road surface such as wet roads or icy or snow
bound roads.
yThe braking performance is adversely affected due to cold temperatures or wet brakes.
yThe vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
yThe accelerator pedal is depressed.
yThe brake pedal is depressed.
yThe steering wheel is being operated.
yThe selector lever is being operated.
yIn
the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines that there is a
vehicle ahead and the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) may operate.
yObjects
on the road at the entrance to a curve.
passing in the opposite lane while making a curve.
yMetal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
yWhen passing through a toll gate.
yWhen passing through low gates, narrow gates, car washing machines, or tunnels.
yIf you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.
y2-wheeled vehicles, pedestrians, animals or standing trees.
yVehicle is driven with some of the tires having signi¿cant wear.
yVehicles
y(Manual
transaxle)
If the vehicle is stopped by the SCBS operation and the clutch pedal is not depressed, the
engine stops.
4–140
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
Indicator Light (Red) (Type B
Instrument Cluster)
If the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is
operating, the indicator light (red) Àashes.
Automatic Brake Operation
Display (Type A Instrument
Cluster)
“Smart City Brake Support activated” is
indicated in the active driving display, and
“Smart City Brake Support Activated” is
indicated in the multi-information display
after the SCBS brakes or the brake assist
(SCBS brake assist) is operated.
Multi-information Display
Collision Warning
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds
continuously and a warning is indicated in
the multi-information display or the active
driving display.
Active Driving Display
Multi-information Display
Active Driving Display
NOTE
The operation distance and volume of the
collision warning can be changed. Refer to
Personalization Features on page 9-10.
NOTE
yThe collision warning beep sounds
intermittently while the SCBS brake
or brake assist (SCBS brake assist) is
operating.
yIf the vehicle is stopped by the SCBS
operation and the brake pedal is not
depressed, the warning beep sounds
one time after about 2 seconds and the
SCBS brake is automatically released.
4–141
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Stopping the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) System Operation
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
system can be temporarily deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) system is turned off, the Smart
City Brake Support (SCBS) OFF indicator
light turns on.
When the engine is restarted, the system
becomes op onal.
4–142
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Smart Brake Support (SBS)*
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) system alerts the driver of a possible collision using a
display and warning sound if the radar sensor (front) and the Forward Sensing Camera
(FSC) determine that there is the possibility of a collision with a vehicle ahead while the
vehicle is being driven at about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster). Furthermore, if the
radar sensor (front) and the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines that a collision is
unavoidable, the automatic brake control is performed to reduce damage in the event of a
collision.
In addition, when the driver depresses the brake pedal, the brakes are applied ¿rmly and
quickly to assist. (Brake Assist (SBS brake assist))
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system and always drive
carefully:
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) is designed to reduce damage in the event of a collision,
not avoid an accident. The ability to detect an obstruction is limited depending on the
obstruction, weather conditions, or traffic conditions. Therefore, if the accelerator pedal
or brake pedal is mistakenly operated it could result in an accident. Always verify the
safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while
keeping a safer distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
CAUTION
In the following cases, turn the system off to prevent a mis-operation:
¾The vehicle is being towed or when towing another vehicle.
¾The vehicle is on a chassis roller.
¾When driving on rough roads such as in areas of dense grass or off-road.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–143
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe Smart Brake Support (SBS) system operates when all of the following conditions are
met:
yThe
ignition is switched ON.
Smart Brake Support (SBS) system is on.
yThe vehicle speed is about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster).
yThe relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is about 15 km/h or
faster (10 mph or faster).
yThe Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is not operating.
yThe
yThe
Smart Brake Support (SBS) system may not operate under the following conditions:
yIf
the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and it comes close to a vehicle ahead.
vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
yThe accelerator pedal is depressed.
yThe brake pedal is depressed.
yThe steering wheel is being operated.
yThe selector lever is being operated.
yThe turn signal is being used.
yWhen the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off.
yWhen warnings and messages, such as a dirty windshield, related to the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC) are being displayed in the multi-information display.
yThe
yAlthough
the objects which activate the system are four-wheeled vehicles, the radar
sensor (front) could detect the following objects, determine them to be an obstruction, and
operate the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system.
yObjects
on the road at the entrance to a curve (including guardrails and snow banks).
vehicle appears in the opposite lane while cornering or rounding a curve.
yWhen crossing a narrow bridge.
yWhen passing under a low gate or through a tunnel or narrow gate.
yWhen entering an underground parking area.
yMetal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
yIf you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.
yWhen driving in areas where there is high grass or forage.
yTwo-wheeled vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles.
yPedestrians or non-metallic objects such as standing trees.
yA
yWhen
the system operates, the user is noti¿ed by the multi-information display.
Smart Brake Support (SBS) warning indication (amber) turns on when the system has
a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning Lights on page 4-32.
yThe
4–144
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Collision Warning
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds
continuously and a warning is indicated
in the multi-information display and the
active driving display.
Multi-information Display
Active Driving Display
Stopping The Smart Brake
Support (SBS) System Operation
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) system
can be temporarily deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When the Smart Brake Support (SBS)
system is turned off, the Smart Brake
Support (SBS) OFF indicator light turns
on.
When the engine is restarted, the system
becomes operational.
NOTE
If the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system
operation is turned off, the Smart City
Brake Support (SCBS) system operation is
turned off simultaneously.
4–145
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)*
Your vehicle is equipped with a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC). The Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) is positioned near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems.
y
High
Beam Control System (HBC)
System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
y
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System (TSR)
y
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Lane-keep Assist
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines the conditions ahead of the vehicle while
traveling at night and detects traf¿c lanes. The distance in which the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) can detect objects varies depending on the surrounding conditions.
WARNING
Do not modify the suspension:
If the vehicle height or inclination is changed, the system will not be able to correctly
detect vehicles ahead. This will result in the system not operating normally or mistakenly
operating, which could cause a serious accident.
CAUTION
¾Do not apply accessories, stickers or film to the windshield near the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC).
If the area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens is obstructed, it will cause
the system to not operate correctly. Consequently, each system may not operate normally
which could lead to an unexpected accident.
¾Do not disassemble or modify the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
Disassembly or modification of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) will cause a malfunction
or mistaken operation. Consequently, each system may not operate normally which could
lead to an unexpected accident.
4–146
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
¾Heed the following cautions to assure the correct operation of the Forward Sensing Camera
(FSC).
¾Be careful not to scratch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens or allow it to get dirty.
¾Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.
¾Do not place objects on the dashboard which reflect light.
¾Always keep the windshield glass around the camera clean by removing dirt or fogging.
Use the windshield defroster to remove fogging on the windshield.
¾Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of the
windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
¾Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before performing repairs around the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
¾The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed to the windshield. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer for windshield repair and replacement.
¾When cleaning the windshield, do not allow glass cleaners or similar cleaning fluids to
get on the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens. In addition, do not touch the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC) lens.
¾When performing repairs around the rearview mirror, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
¾Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning of the camera lens.
¾Do not hit or apply strong force to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or the area around
it. If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is severely hit or if there are cracks or damage
caused by flying gravel or debris in the area around it, stop using the following systems
and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
¾High Beam Control System (HBC)
¾Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
¾Traffic Sign Recognition System (TSR)
¾Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
¾Smart Brake Support (SBS)
¾The direction in which the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is pointed has been finely
adjusted. Do not change the installation position of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
or remove it. Otherwise, it could result in damage or malfunction.
¾Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size, and the same manufacturer,
brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with significantly different wear
patterns on the same vehicle as the system may not operate normally.
¾The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) includes a function for detecting a soiled windshield
and informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may not detect plastic
shopping bags, ice or snow on the windshield. In such cases, the system cannot accurately
determine a vehicle ahead and may not be able to operate normally. Always drive carefully
and pay attention to the road ahead.
4–147
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yIn the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect target objects
correctly, and each system may be unable to operate normally.
yThe height of the vehicle ahead is low.
yYou drive your vehicle at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
yHeadlights are not turned on during the night or when going through a tunnel.
yIn
the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) may not be able to detect
target objects correctly.
yUnder bad weather condition, such as rain, fog and snow.
yThe window washer is being used or the windshield wipers are not used when it's raining.
yIce, fog, snow, frost, rainfall, dirt, or foreign matter such as a plastic bag is stuck on
the windshield.
yTrucks with low loading platforms and vehicles with an extremely low or high pro¿le.
yWhen driving next to walls with no patterning (including fences and longitudinally
striped walls).
yThe taillights of the vehicle ahead are turned off.
yA vehicle is outside the illumination range of the headlights.
yThe vehicle is making a sharp turn, or ascending or descending a steep slope.
yEntering or exiting a tunnel.
yHeavy luggage is loaded causing the vehicle to tilt.
yStrong light is shone at the front of the vehicle (back light or high-beam light from on
coming vehicles).
yThere are many light emitters on the vehicle ahead.
yWhen the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off at
nighttime.
yElongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
yExhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from
manholes and grating, and water splashed into the air.
yWhen towing a malfunctioning vehicle.
yThe vehicle is driven with tires having signi¿cantly different wear.
yThe vehicle is driven on down slopes or bumpy roads.
yThere are water puddles on the road.
yThe surroundings are dark such as during the night, early evening, or early morning,
or in a tunnel or indoor parking lot.
yThe illumination brightness of the headlights is reduced or the headlight illumination
is weakened due to dirt or a deviated optical axis.
yThe target object enters the blind spot of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
yA person or object bursts onto the road from the shoulder or cuts right in front of you.
yYou change lanes and approach a vehicle ahead.
yWhen driving extremely close to the target object.
yTire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.
yThe vehicle ahead has a special shape. For example, a vehicle towing a trailer house
or a boat, or a vehicle carrier carrying a vehicle with its front pointed rearward.
4–148
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
yIf
the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot operate normally due to backlight or fog,
the system functions related to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) are temporarily
stopped and the following warning lights turn on. However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
yHigh
Beam Control System (HBC) warning light (amber)
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) warning
yLane-keep
light
ySmart
Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) warning light (amber)
yIf
the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot operate normally due to high temperatures,
the system functions related to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) are temporarily
stopped and the following warning lights turn on. However, this does not indicate a
malfunction. Cool down the area around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) such as by
turning on the air conditioner.
yHigh
Beam Control System (HBC) warning light (amber)
Assist System (LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) warning
yLane-keep
light
ySmart
Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) warning light (amber)
4–149
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Radar Sensor (Front)*
Your vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor (front).
The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).
y
Distance
Recognition Support System (DRSS)
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
y
Smart Brake Support (SBS)
y
Mazda
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reÀected off a vehicle ahead
or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the front emblem.
Radar Sensor (Front)
If “Front Radar Sensor Blocked” is displayed in the multi-information display of the
instrument cluster, clean the area around the radar sensor (front).
4–150
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CAUTION
Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of each system.
¾Do not adhere stickers (including transparent stickers) to the surface of the radiator
grille and front emblem in and around the radar sensor (front), and do not replace
the radiator grille and front emblem with any product that is not a genuine product
designed for use with the radar sensor (front).
¾The radar sensor (front) includes a function for detecting soiling of the radar sensor's
front surface and informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may
require time to detect or it may not detect plastic shopping bags, ice or snow. If this
occurs, the system may not operate correctly, therefore always keep the radar sensor
(front) clean.
¾Do not install a grille guard.
¾If the front part of the vehicle has been damaged in a vehicle accident, the position of
the radar sensor (front) may have moved. Stop the system immediately and always
have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
¾Do not use the front bumper to push other vehicles or obstructions such as when
pulling out of a parking space. Otherwise, the radar sensor (front) could be hit and its
position deviated.
¾Do not remove, disassemble, or modify the radar sensor (front).
¾For repairs, replacement or paint work around the radar sensor (front), consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
¾Do not modify the suspension. If the suspension are modified, the vehicle's posture
could change and the radar sensor (front) may not be able to correctly detect a vehicle
ahead or an obstruction.
4–151
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yUnder the following conditions, the radar sensor (front) may not be able to detect
vehicles ahead or obstructions correctly and each system may not operate normally.
yThe
rear surface of a vehicle ahead does not reÀect radio waves effectively, such as
an unloaded trailer or an automobile with a loading platform covered by a soft top,
vehicles with a hard plastic tailgate, and round-shaped vehicles.
yVehicles ahead with low vehicle height and thus less area for reÀecting radio waves.
yVisibility is reduced due to a vehicle ahead casting off water, snow, or sand from its
tires and onto your windshield.
yThe trunk compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are
occupied.
yIce, snow, or soiling is on the front surface of the front emblem.
yDuring inclement weather such as rain, snow, or sand storms.
yWhen driving near facilities or objects emitting strong radio waves.
yUnder
the following conditions, the radar sensor (front) may not be able to detect
vehicles ahead or obstructions.
yThe
beginning and end of a curve.
with continuous curves.
yNarrow lane roads due to road construction or lane closures.
yThe vehicle ahead enters the radar sensor's blind spot.
yThe vehicle ahead is running abnormally due to accident or vehicle damage.
yRoads with repeated up and down slopes
yDriving on poor roads or unpaved roads.
yThe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short.
yA vehicle suddenly comes close such as by cutting into the lane.
yRoads
yTo
prevent incorrect operation of the system, use tires of the same speci¿ed size,
manufacturer, brand, and tread pattern on all four wheels. In addition, do not use tires
with signi¿cantly different wear patterns or tire pressures on the same vehicle (Including
the temporary spare tire).
yIf the battery power is weak, the system may not operate correctly.
yWhen driving on roads with little traf¿c and few vehicles ahead or obstructions for
the radar sensor (front) to detect, “Front Radar Sensor Blocked” may be temporarily
displayed, however, this does not indicate a problem.
4–152
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
Radar Sensors (Rear)*
Your vehicle is equipped with radar sensors (rear). The following systems also use the radar
sensors (rear).
y
Blind
y
Rear
Spot Monitoring system (BSM)
Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA)
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reÀected off a vehicle
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.
Radar Sensors (Rear)
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right
sides.
Always keep the surface of the rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) clean so that the
radar sensors (rear) operate normally. Also, do not apply items such as stickers.
Refer to Exterior Care on page 6-64.
CAUTION
If the rear bumper receives a severe impact, the system may no longer operate normally.
Stop the system immediately and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–153
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
NOTE
yThe detection ability of the radar sensors (rear) has limitations. In the following cases,
the detection ability may lower and the system may not operate normally.
yThe
rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) has become deformed.
ice or mud adheres to the radar sensors (rear) on the rear bumper.
yUnder bad weather conditions such as rain, snow and fog.
ySnow,
yUnder
the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it
may be dif¿cult to detect them.
yStationary
objects on a road or a road side such as small, two-wheeled vehicles,
bicycles, pedestrians, animals, and shopping carts.
yVehicle shapes which do not reÀect radar waves well such as empty trailers with a low
vehicle height and sports cars.
yVehicles
are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors (rear) adjusted for each
vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so that the radar sensors (rear) detect approaching
vehicles correctly. If the direction of the radar sensors (rear) has deviated for some
reason, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yFor repairs or replacement of the radar sensors (rear), or bumper repairs, paintwork,
and replacement near the radar sensors, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yTurn off the system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier
is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radio waves emitted by the radar will
be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.
yThe radar sensors are regulated by the relevant radio wave laws of the country in which
the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is driven abroad, authorization from the country in
which the vehicle is driven may be required.
4–154
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Cruise Control
Cruise Control*
With cruise control, you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about
25 km/h (16 mph).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under the following conditions:
Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
¾Hilly terrain
¾Steep inclines
¾Heavy or unsteady traffic
¾Slippery or winding roads
¾Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed
Cruise Control Switch
RESUME/+ switch
ON switch
SET/- switch
OFF/CANCEL switch
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
4–155
When Driving
Cruise Control
Cruise Main Indication (White)/
Cruise Set Indication (Green)
The indication has two colors.
Cruise Main Indication (White)
The indication turns on (white) when the
cruise control system is activated.
Cruise Set Indication (Green)
The indication turns on (green) when a
cruising speed has been set.
Activation/Deactivation
To activate the system, press the ON
switch. The cruise main indication (white)
turns on.
To deactivate the system, press the OFF/
CANCEL switch.
The cruise main indication (white) turns
off.
WARNING
Always turn off the cruise control system
when it is not in use:
Leaving the cruise control system in an
activation-ready state while the cruise
control is not in use is dangerous as
the cruise control could unexpectedly
activate if the activation button is
accidentally pressed, and result in loss
of vehicle control and an accident.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched OFF, the
system status before it was turned off is
maintained. For example, if the ignition
is switched OFF with the cruise control
system operable, the system will be
operable when the ignition is switched ON
the next time.
To Set Speed
1. Activate the cruise control system by
pressing the ON switch. The cruise
main indication (white) turns on.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 km/h (16 mph).
3. Set the cruise control by pressing the
SET/ switch at the desired speed. The
cruise control is set at the moment the
SET/ switch is pressed. Release the
accelerator pedal simultaneously. The
cruise set indication (green) turns on.
NOTE
yThe cruise control speed setting cannot
be performed under the following
conditions:
y(Automatic
transaxle)
The selector lever is in the P or N
position.
y(Manual transaxle)
The shift lever is in the neutral
position.
yThe parking brake is applied.
yRelease
the SET/ switch at the desired
speed, otherwise the speed will continue
decreasing while the SET/ switch is
pressed and held (except when the
accelerator pedal is depressed).
yOn a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while ascending
or speed up while descending.
4–156
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Cruise Control
yThe
cruise control will cancel if the
vehicle speed decreases below 21 km/h
(13 mph) when the cruise control is
activated, such as when climbing a
steep grade.
yThe cruise control may cancel at about
15 km/h (9 mph) below the preset speed,
such as when climbing a long, steep
grade.
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise
control is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the active driving display
(vehicles with active driving display).
Type A Instrument Cluster
Multi-information Display
Active Driving Display
Type B Instrument Cluster
To Increase Cruising Speed
Follow either of these procedures.
To increase speed using cruise control
switch
Press the RESUME/ switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the
switch at the desired speed.
Press the RESUME/ switch and release
it immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will increase the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Increasing speed with a single
RESUME/ switch operation
Instrument cluster display for vehicle
speed indicated in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Instrument cluster display for vehicle
speed indicated in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate
to the desired speed. Press the SET/
switch and release it immediately.
NOTE
Accelerate if you want to speed up
temporarily when the cruise control is on.
Greater speed will not interfere with or
change the set speed. Take your foot off the
accelerator to return to the set speed.
4–157
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Cruise Control
To Decrease Cruising Speed
Press the SET/ switch and hold it. The
vehicle will gradually slow.
Release the switch at the desired speed.
Press the SET/ switch and release it
immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will decrease the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Decreasing speed with a single SET/
switch operation
Instrument cluster display for vehicle
speed indicated in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Instrument cluster display for vehicle
speed indicated in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
To Resume Cruising Speed at
More Than 25 km/h (16 mph)
If some other method besides the OFF/
CANCEL switch was used to cancel
cruising speed (such as applying the brake
pedal) and the system is still activated, the
most recent set speed will automatically
resume when the RESUME/ switch is
pressed.
If vehicle speed is below 25 km/h (16
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 25
km/h (16 mph) or more and press the
RESUME/ switch.
To Temporarily Cancel
To temporarily cancel the system, use one
of these methods:
y
Slightly
depress the brake pedal.
transaxle)
Depress the clutch pedal.
y
Press the OFF/CANCEL switch.
y
(Manual
If the RESUME/ switch is pressed when
the vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher, the system reverts to the previously
set speed.
NOTE
yIf any of the following conditions occur,
the cruise control system is temporarily
canceled.
yThe
parking brake is applied.
transaxle)
The selector lever is in the P or N
position.
y(Manual transaxle)
The shift lever is in the neutral
position.
y(Automatic
yWhen
the cruise control system is
temporarily canceled by even one of the
applicable cancel conditions, the speed
cannot be re-set.
y(Automatic transaxle)
The cruise control cannot be cancelled
while driving in manual mode (selector
lever shifted from D to M position).
Therefore, engine braking will not be
applied even if the transaxle is shifted
down to a lower gear. If deceleration is
required, lower the set speed or depress
the brake pedal.
To Deactivate
When a cruising speed has been set
(cruise set indication (green) turns on)
Long-press the OFF/CANCEL switch or
press the OFF/CANCEL switch 2 times.
When a cruising speed has not been set
(cruise main indication (white) turns on)
Press the OFF/CANCEL switch.
4–158
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the air pressure of all four tires. If
the air pressure of one or more tires is too low, the system warns the driver by indicating the
tire pressure monitoring system warning light in the instrument cluster and operating a beep
sound. The system monitors the tire pressures indirectly using the data sent from the ABS
wheel speed sensors.
To allow the system to operate correctly, the system needs to be initialized with the speci¿ed
tire pressure (value on the tire pressure label). Follow the procedure and perform the
initialization.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-162.
The warning light Àashes when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning Lights on page 4-33.
ABS wheel speed sensor
4–159
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
CAUTION
¾Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
¾To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a problem. As
a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or blow out.
4–160
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
NOTE
Because this system detects slight changes in tire conditions, the timing of the warning may
be faster or slower in the following cases:
yThe
size, manufacturer, or the type of tires is different from the speci¿cation.
size, manufacturer, or the type of a tire is different from the others, or the level of tire
wear is excessively different between them.
yA run-Àat tire, studless tire, snow tire, or tire chains are used.
yAn emergency tire is used (The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may Àash
and then continue illuminating).
yA tire is repaired using the emergency Àat tire repair kit.
yThe tire pressure is excessively higher than the speci¿ed pressure, or the tire pressure is
suddenly lowered for some reason such as a tire burst during driving.
yThe vehicle speed is lower than about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) (including when the vehicle is
stopped), or the drive period is shorter than 5 minutes.
yThe vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road or a slippery, icy road.
yHard steering and rapid acceleration/deceleration are repeated such as during aggressive
driving on a winding road.
yLoad on the vehicle is applied to a tire such as by loading heavy luggage to one side of
the vehicle.
ySystem initialization has not been implemented with the speci¿ed tire pressure.
yThe
4–161
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization
In the following cases, system
initialization must be performed so that the
system operates normally.
y
A tire
pressure is adjusted.
rotation is performed.
y
A tire or wheel is replaced.
y
The battery is replaced or completely
drained.
y
The tire pressure monitoring system
warning light is illuminated.
y
Tire
Initialization method
1. Park the car in a safe place and ¿rmly
apply the parking brake.
2. Let the tires cool, then adjust the tire
pressure of all four (4) tires to the
speci¿ed pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label located on the driver's
door frame (door open).
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
3. Switch the ignition ON.
4. Press and hold the tire pressure
monitoring system set switch and
verify that the tire pressure monitoring
system warning light in the instrument
cluster Àashes twice and a beep sound
is heard once.
CAUTION
If the system initialization is performed
without adjusting the tire pressure,
the system cannot detect the normal
tire pressure and it may not illuminate
the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light even if a tire pressure is
low, or it may illuminate the light even
if the pressures are normal.
Adjust the tire pressure on all four
tires and initialize the system when
the warning light is turned on. If the
warning light turns on for a reason
other than a flat tire, the tire pressure
of all four tires may have decreased
naturally.
The system initialization will not be
performed if the switch is pressed while
the vehicle is being driven.
4–162
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Rear View Monitor
The rear view monitor provides visual images of the rear of the vehicle when reversing.
WARNING
Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions
by looking directly with your eyes:
Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause an
accident or a collision with an object. The rear view monitor is only a visual assist device
when reversing the vehicle. The images on the screen may be different from the actual
conditions.
CAUTION
¾Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions: Using the rear view
monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in injury or vehicle
damage or both.
¾Icy or snow-covered roads.
¾Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.
¾The trunk lid is not fully closed.
¾The vehicle is on a road incline.
¾When the display is cold, images may course across the monitor or the screen and may be
dimmer than usual, which could cause difficulty in confirming the surrounding conditions
of the vehicle. Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding
conditions by looking directly with your eyes.
¾Do not apply excessive force to the camera. The camera position and angle may deviate.
¾Do not disassemble, modify, or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof.
¾The camera cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasing agents, organic solvents,
wax, or glass coating agents to the camera cover. If any are spilled on the cover, wipe off
with a soft cloth immediately.
¾Do not rub the camera cover forcefully with an abrasive or hard brush. The camera cover or
lens may be scratched which might affect the images.
4–163
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
NOTE
yIf water, snow, or mud is stuck on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth. If it
cannot be wiped off, use a mild detergent.
yIf the camera temperature changes rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the rear view
monitor may not operate correctly.
yWhen replacing the tires, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing the tires could
result in deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display.
yIf the vehicle's front, side, or rear has been involved in a collision, the alignment of
the rear view parking camera (location, installation angle) may have deviated. Always
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
yIf “No Video Signal Available” is indicated in the display, there could be a problem with
the camera. Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Rear View Parking Camera Location
Rear View Parking Camera
Switching to the Rear View Monitor Display
Shift the shift lever to R with the ignition switched ON to switch the display to the rear view
monitor display.
NOTE
When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to the
previous display.
4–164
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Displayable Range on the Screen
The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.
(Screen display)
Garnish
Bumper
(Actual view)
Object
NOTE
yThe displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.
yThe displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends
cannot be displayed.
yThe distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance
because the rear view parking camera is equipped with a speci¿c lens.
ySome optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do not
install any optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as illuminating
parts or parts made of reÀective material.
yIt may be dif¿cult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it does not
indicate a malfunction.
yIn
darkened areas.
the temperature around the lens is high/low.
yWhen the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity.
yWhen foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.
yWhen the camera lens reÀects sunlight or headlight beams.
yWhen
yImage
display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.
4–165
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Viewing the Display
Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle (yellow) are displayed on the screen as a
reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the parking
space you are about to back into.
Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.
a
b
a) Vehicle width guide lines (yellow)
These guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.
b) Distance guide lines.
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).
y
The red and yellow lines indicate the points about 50 cm (19 in) for the red line and 100
cm (39.3 in) for the yellow lines from the rear bumper (at the center point of each of the
lines).
CAUTION
The guide lines on the screen are fixed lines. They are not synced to the driver's turning
of the steering wheel. Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle's rear and the
surrounding area directly with your eyes while backing up.
Rear View Monitor Operation
The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on
the traf¿c, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing also varies
depending on conditions, so con¿rm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyes and
steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.
Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.
NOTE
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images
(mirror images).
4–166
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
1. Shift the shift lever to R to switch the display to the rear view monitor display.
2. Con¿rming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.
(Display condition)
(Vehicle condition)
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly so that
the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the left
and right are roughly equal.
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to
the left and right sides of the parking space.
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into the
parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle
in the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether the
vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)
(Display condition)
(Vehicle condition)
4–167
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
6. When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to
the previous display.
NOTE
Because there may be a difference between the displayed image, such as indicated below,
and the actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of the vehicle
and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.
yIn
the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the screen, the back end and
distance guide lines may appear aligned in the monitor, but they may not actually be
aligned on the ground.
yWhen parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, the
division line and the vehicle width guide line appear aligned in the monitor, but they may
not actually be aligned on the ground.
4–168
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Variance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image
Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such variance in
distance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following conditions that may cause
a variance in distance perspective.
When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load
When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther than the
actual distance.
Object
Variance
When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle
When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed on the
screen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.
Appears
farther than
actual
distance
Appears
closer than
actual
distance
Object on screen
Object at actual position
Object on screen
A: Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.
Object at actual
B: Actual distance between the vehicle and object.
position
4–169
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear
Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a Àat surface, the distance to the
three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.
(Screen display)
(Actual condition)
A
A
B
C
C B
(Actual distance) B>C=A
Sensed distance on screen A>B>C
Picture Quality Adjustment
WARNING
Always adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while the vehicle is stopped:
Do not adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor such as brightness, contrast, color,
and tint while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to an accident.
Picture quality adjustment can be done while the shift lever is in reverse (R).
There are four settings which can be adjusted including, brightness, contrast, tint, and color.
When adjusting, pay suf¿cient attention to the vehicle surroundings.
1. Select the icon on the screen to display the tabs.
2. Select the desired tab item.
3. Adjust the brightness, contrast, tint, and color using the slider.
If you need to reset, press the reset button.
4. Select the icon on the screen to close the tab.
4–170
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5
Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and
audio system.
Climate Control System..................................................................... 5-2
Operating Tips ............................................................................... 5-2
Vent Operation .............................................................................. 5-3
Manual Type ................................................................................. 5-5
Fully Automatic Type.................................................................... 5-9
Audio System .................................................................................... 5-13
Antenna ....................................................................................... 5-13
Operating Tips for Audio System ............................................... 5-13
Audio Set .................................................................................... 5-21
Audio Control Switch Operation ................................................ 5-41
AUX/USB mode ......................................................................... 5-43
Bluetooth® ......................................................................................... 5-51
Bluetooth® ................................................................................... 5-51
Bluetooth® Hands-Free ............................................................... 5-60
Bluetooth® Audio ........................................................................ 5-69
Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 5-81
Interior Equipment .......................................................................... 5-84
Sunvisors ..................................................................................... 5-84
Interior Lights ............................................................................. 5-85
Accessory Sockets ...................................................................... 5-88
Cup Holder .................................................................................. 5-89
Bottle Holder ............................................................................... 5-90
Storage Compartments ................................................................ 5-91
5–1
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Operating Tips
y
Operate
the climate control system with
the engine running.
y
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the fan control
dial/switch on for a long period of time
with the ignition switched ON when the
engine is not running.
y
Clear all obstructions such as leaves,
snow and ice from the hood and the air
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the
system ef¿ciency.
y
Use the climate control system to defog
the windows and dehumidify the air.
y
The recirculate mode should be used
when driving through tunnels or while in
a traf¿c jam, or when you would like to
shut off outside air for quick cooling of
the interior.
y
Use the outside air position for
ventilation or windshield defrosting.
y
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then
run the climate control system.
y
Have
the air conditioner checked before
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant
may make the air conditioner less
ef¿cient.
The refrigerant speci¿cations are
indicated on a label attached to the
inside of the engine compartment. Check
the label before re¿lling the refrigerant.
If the wrong type of refrigerant is used,
it could result in a serious malfunction
of the air conditioner.
For details, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Label
y
Run
the air conditioner about 10 minutes
at least once a month to keep internal
parts lubricated.
5–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Vent Operation
Center Vents
Knob
Adjusting the Vents
Open
Directing airÀow
To adjust the direction of airÀow, move the
adjustment knob.
NOTE
yWhen using the air conditioner under
humid ambient temperature conditions,
the system may blow fog from the vents.
This is not a sign of trouble but a result
of humid air being suddenly cooled.
air vents can be fully opened and
closed by operating the dial.
Close
Dial
Rear Vents*
Knob
Dial
Open
yThe
Close
Side Vents (driver)
Knob
Dial
Open
Close
Side Vents (front passenger)
Knob
Open
Close
Dial
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5–3
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Selecting the AirÀow Mode
Dashboard Vents
Defroster and Floor Vents
Dashboard and Floor Vents
Defroster Vents
Floor Vents
* With rear vents
5–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Manual Type
Temperature control dial
A/C switch
Fan control dial
Air intake selector switch
Control Switches
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
NOTE
When the mode is set to or with the
fan control dial in a position other than 0
and the temperature control dial in the
maximum cold position, the air intake
selector switches to the recirculated air
position and the A/C turns on
automatically.
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch
to turn it off.
Fan control dial
This dial allows variable fan speeds.
The fan has seven speeds.
Mode selector dial
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airÀow mode (page 5-4).
Mode selector dial
Rear window defogger switch
NOTE
yThe mode selector dial can be set at the
intermediate positions ( ) between
each mode. Set the dial to an
intermediate position if you want to split
the airÀow between the two modes.
yFor example, when the mode selector
dial is at the position between the
and positions, airÀow from the Àoor
vent is less than that of the position.
A/C switch
Press the A/C switch to turn the air
conditioner on. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate when the fan control
dial is in any position except OFF.
Press the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
5–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Air intake selector
This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Outside or recirculated air positions can be
selected. Press the switch to select outside/
recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position (indicator light
illuminated)
Outside air is shut off. Use this position
when going through tunnels, driving in
congested traf¿c (high engine exhaust
areas) or when quick cooling is desired.
Outside air position (indicator light
turned off)
Outside air is allowed to enter the
cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the
position in cold or
rainy weather:
position in cold or rainy
Using the
weather is dangerous as it will cause
the windows to fog up. Your vision will
be hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident.
Heating
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turns off).
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
hot position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. If dehumidi¿ed heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
NOTE
yIf the windshield fogs up easily, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
yIf cooler air is desired at face level, set
the mode selector dial at the position
and adjust the temperature control dial
to maintain maximum comfort.
yThe air to the Àoor is warmer than air
to the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or
cold position).
Rear window defogger switch
Press the rear window defogger switch to
defrost the rear window.
Refer to Rear Window Defogger on page
4-63.
5–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Cooling (With air conditioner)
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
cold position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
5. After cooling begins, adjust the fan
control dial and temperature control
dial as needed to maintain maximum
comfort.
CAUTION
If the air conditioner is used while
driving up long hills or in heavy
traffic, monitor the engine coolant
temperature warning light to see if it is
illuminated or flashing (page 4-32).
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the warning light is
illuminated or flashing, turn the airconditioning off (page 7-17).
NOTE
yWhen maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control dial to the
extreme cold position and set the air
intake selector to the recirculated air
position, then turn the fan control dial
fully clockwise.
yIf warmer air is desired at Àoor level,
set the mode selector dial at the
position and adjust the temperature
control dial to maintain maximum
comfort.
yThe air to the Àoor is warmer than air
to the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or
cold position).
Ventilation
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turns off).
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. If dehumidi¿ed heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
WARNING
Do not defog the windshield using the
position with the temperature
control set to the cold position:
position with the
Using the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident. Set
the temperature control to the hot or
warm position when using the
position.
5–7
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
NOTE
yFor maximum defrosting, turn on the air
conditioner, set the temperature control
dial to the extreme hot position, and
turn the fan control dial fully clockwise.
yIf warm air is desired at the Àoor, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
yIn the
or
position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
and the outside air position is
automatically selected to defrost the
position, the
windshield. In the or
outside air position cannot be changed
to the recirculated air position.
Dehumidifying (With air
conditioner)
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
weather to help defog the windshield and
side windows.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the desired
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turns off).
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
NOTE
One of the functions of the air conditioner
is dehumidifying the air and, to use
this function, the temperature does not
have to be set to cold. Therefore, set the
temperature control dial to the desired
position (hot or cold) and turn on the air
conditioner when you want to dehumidify
the cabin air.
5–8
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Fully Automatic Type
Climate control information is displayed on the display.
Temperature setting display (driver’s side)
Driver temperature control dial
Windshield defroster switch
Air intake selector
(recirculated air position)
Rear window defogger switch
A/C mode display
Air intake selector
(outside air position)
A/C switch
AUTO switch
OFF switch
Passenger temperature
control dial
DUAL switch
Mode selector Mode selector switch
display
Airflow display Temperature setting display (Passenger’s side)
Fan control switch
Control Switches
AUTO switch
By pressing the AUTO switch the
following functions will be automatically
controlled in accordance with the selected
set temperature:
y
AirÀow
temperature
of airÀow
y
Selection of airÀow mode
y
Outside/Recirculated air selection
y
Air conditioner operation
y
Amount
NOTE
AUTO switch indicator light
yWhen
on, it indicates auto operation,
and the system will function
automatically.
yIf any of the following switches are
operated while in auto control, the
AUTO switch indicator turns off.
yMode
selector switch
control switch
yWindshield defroster switch
The functions for switches other than
those operated continue to operate in
auto control.
yFan
5–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
OFF switch
Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the
climate control system.
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
y
When
the DUAL switch is off:
the driver temperature control dial
to control the temperature throughout
the entire cabin.
y
When the DUAL switch is on:
Turn the driver or front passenger
temperature control dial to
independently control the temperature
on each side of the cabin.
Turn
NOTE
yThe climate control system changes to
the individual operation mode (DUAL
switch indicator light illuminated) by
turning the front passenger temperature
control dial even when the DUAL switch
is off, which allows individual control
of the set temperature for the driver and
front passenger.
yThe temperature units for the
temperature setting display can be
changed in conjunction with the
temperature units for the outside
temperature display. Refer to Outside
Temperature Display on page 4-18.
Mode selector switch
The desired airÀow mode can be selected
(page 5-4).
NOTE
yWith the airÀow mode set to the
position and the temperature control
dial set at a medium temperature,
heated air is directed to the feet and air
at a comparably lower temperature will
Àow through the central, left and right
vents.
yTo set the air vent to
, press the
windshield defroster switch.
yIn the
position, the outside air
position is automatically selected.
A/C switch
Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTO
switch is turned on will turn off the airconditioning (cooling/dehumidifying
functions).
The air-conditioning can be turned on and
off by pressing the A/C switch while the
fan control switch is on.
NOTE
yThe air-conditioning operates when the
A/C switch is pressed even if the fan is
off.
yThe air conditioner may not function
when the outside temperature
approaches 0 °C (32 °F).
Fan control switch
The fan has seven speeds. The selected
speed will be displayed.
5–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Air intake selector
Outside or recirculated air positions can be
selected. Press the switch to select outside/
recirculated air positions.
)
Recirculated air position (
Outside air is shut off. Use this position
when going through tunnels, driving in
congested traf¿c (high engine exhaust
areas) or when quick cooling is desired.
)
Outside air position (
Outside air is allowed to enter the
cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the
position in cold or
rainy weather:
position in cold or rainy
Using the
weather is dangerous as it will cause
the windows to fog up. Your vision will
be hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident.
DUAL switch
Use the DUAL switch to change the
mode between the individual operation
(driver and passenger) and interconnection
(simultaneous) modes.
Individual operation mode (indicator
light illuminated)
The set temperature can be controlled
individually for the driver and front
passenger.
Windshield defroster switch
Press the switch to defrost the windshield
and front door windows.
Refer to Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging on page 5-12.
Rear window defogger switch
Press the rear window defogger switch to
defrost the rear window.
Refer to Rear Window Defogger on page
4-63.
Operation of Automatic Airconditioning
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection
of the airÀow mode, air intake
selector and amount of airÀow will be
automatically controlled.
2. Use the temperature control dial to
select a desired temperature.
Press the DUAL switch or turn the
front passenger temperature control
dial to control the set temperature
individually for the driver and front
passenger.
To turn off the system, press the OFF
switch.
NOTE
ySetting the temperature to maximum
hot or cold will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
yWhen selecting heat, the system will
restrict airÀow until it has warmed to
prevent cold air from blowing out of the
vents.
Interconnection mode (indicator light
turned off)
The set temperature for the driver
and front passenger is controlled
simultaneously.
5–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging
Press the windshield defroster switch.
In this position, the outside air position
is automatically selected, and the air
conditioner automatically turns on. The
air conditioner will directly dehumidify
the air to the front windshield and side
windows on page 5-4.
AirÀow amount will be increased.
Sunlight/Temperature Sensor
Sunlight sensor
Do not place objects on the sunlight
sensor. Otherwise, the interior temperature
may not adjust correctly.
Sunlight sensor
WARNING
Set the temperature control to the hot
or warm position when defogging (
position):
position with the
Using the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident.
Interior temperature sensor
Do not cover the interior temperature
sensor. Otherwise, the interior temperature
may not adjust correctly.
NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to
increase the air Àow temperature and
defog the windshield more quickly.
Interior temperature sensor
5–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Antenna
AM/FM Radio Antenna
The antenna is embedded into the window
glass.
CAUTION
When washing the inside of the
window which has an antenna, use
a soft cloth dampened in lukewarm
water, gently wiping the antenna lines.
Use of glass cleaning products could
damage the antenna.
Satellite Radio Antenna*
Satellite radio antenna
Operating Tips for Audio
System
WARNING
Always adjust the audio while the
vehicle is stopped:
Do not adjust the audio control
switches while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the audio while driving
the vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the vehicle
operation which could lead to a
serious accident.
Even if the audio control switches are
equipped on the steering wheel, learn
to use the switches without looking
down at them so that you can keep
your maximum attention on the road
while driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
For the purposes of safe driving,
adjust the audio volume to a level that
allows you to hear sounds outside of
the vehicle including car horns and
particularly emergency vehicle sirens.
NOTE
yTo prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio
system on for a long period of time
when the engine is not running.
yIf a cellular phone or CB radio is used
in or near the vehicle, it could cause
noise to occur from the audio system,
however, this does not indicate that the
system has been damaged.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5–13
Interior Features
Audio System
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
FM characteristics
An FM broadcast range is usually about
40—50 km (25—30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.
FM Station
Do not insert any objects, other than CDs,
into the slot.
40—50km
(25—30 miles)
Radio Reception
AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere.
Therefore, they can reach longer distances
than FM signals.
Because of this, two stations may
sometimes be picked up on the same
frequency at the same time.
Ionosphere
Station 1
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar
to beams of light because they do not
bend around corners, but they do reÀect.
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM
stations cannot be received at the great
distances possible with AM reception.
Ionosphere
FM wave
AM wave
FM wave
100—200 km (60—120 miles)
Atmospheric conditions can also affect
FM reception. High humidity will cause
poor reception. However, cloudy days may
provide better reception than clear days.
Station 2
5–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be reÀected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the reÀected signal
at the same time. This causes a slight
delay in reception and may be heard as a
broken sound or a distortion. This problem
may also be encountered when in close
proximity to the transmitter.
Weak signal noise
In suburban areas, broadcast signals
become weak because of distance from the
transmitter. Reception in such fringe areas
is characterized by sound breakup.
Reflected wave
Direct
Flutter/Skip noise
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
straight lines and become weak in valleys
between tall buildings, mountains, and
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
through such an area, the reception
conditions may change suddenly, resulting
in annoying noise.
Strong signal noise
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are extremely
strong, so the result is noise and sound
breakup at the radio receiver.
Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Station 1
88.1 MHz
Station 2
88.3 MHz
5–15
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for CD Player
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or
optical components (prism and lens) in
the CD player may become clouded with
condensation. At this time, the CD will
eject immediately when placed in the unit.
A clouded CD can be corrected simply by
wiping it with a soft cloth. Clouded optical
components will clear naturally in about
an hour. Wait for normal operation to
return before attempting to use the unit.
Handling the CD player
The following precautions should be
observed.
y
Do
not use deformed or cracked CDs.
The disc may not eject resulting in a
malfunction.
y
Do
not use non-conventional discs such
as heart-shaped, octagonal discs, etc.
The disc may not eject resulting in a
malfunction.
y
If
the memory portion of the CD is
transparent or translucent, do not use the
disc.
Transparent
y
A new
CD may have rough edges on its
inner and outer perimeters. If a disc with
rough edges is used, proper setting will
not be possible and the CD player will
not play the CD. In addition, the disc
may not eject resulting in a malfunction.
Remove the rough edges in advance
by using a ball-point pen or pencil
as shown in the following ¿gure. To
remove the rough edges, rub the side of
the pen or pencil against the inner and
outer perimeter of the CD.
y
When
driving over uneven surfaces, the
sound may jump.
5–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
y
CDs
bearing the logo shown in the
illustration can be played. No other discs
can be played.
y
Use
discs that have been legitimately
produced. If illegally-copied discs such
as pirated discs are used, the system may
not operate properly.
y
Be sure never to touch the signal surface
when handling the CDs. Pick up a CD
by grasping the outer edge or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
y
Do
not stick paper or tape on the CD.
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label). The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
y
Dust, ¿nger smudges, and dirt can
decrease the amount of light reÀected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should become
soiled, gently wipe it with a soft cloth
from the center of the CD to the edge.
y
Do not use record sprays, antistatic
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
the CD and must not be used. Anything
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
should never be used to clean CDs.
y
The
CD player ejects the CD if the CD
is inserted upside down. Also dirty and/
or defective CDs may be ejected.
y
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player.
y
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
seal af¿xed to it.
y
This unit may not be able to play certain
CD-R/CD-RWs made using a computer
or music CD recorder due to disc
characteristics, scratches, smudges, dirt,
etc., or due to dust or condensation on
the lens inside the unit.
y
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to
direct sunlight or high temperature may
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make
them unplayable.
y
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB
cannot be played.
y
This unit may not be able to play certain
discs made using a computer due to the
application (writing software) setting
used. (For details, consult the store
where the application was purchased.)
y
It is possible that certain text data, such
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW
may not be displayed when musical data
(CD-DA) is playing.
y
The period from when a CD-RW is
inserted to when it begins playing is
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.
y
Completely read the instruction manual
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.
y
Do not use discs with cellophane tape
adhering, partially peeled off labels,
or adhesive material exuding from the
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use
discs with a commercially-available
CD-R label af¿xed. The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
5–17
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for MP3
MP3 stands for MPEG Audio Layer 3,
which is standardized voice compression
established by the ISO*1 working group
(MPEG).
Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be
compressed to approximately a tenth of
the source data size.
This unit plays ¿les with the extension
(.mp3) as MP3 ¿les.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
NOTE
Supply of this product only conveys a
license for private, non-commercial
use and does not convey a license nor
imply any right to use this product in any
commercial (i.e. revenue-generating)
real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media),
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems,
such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand
applications. An independent license for
such use is required. For details, please
visit http://www.mp3licensing.com.
y
This
audio system handles MP3 ¿les
that have been recorded on CD-R/CDRW/CD-ROMs.
y
When naming an MP3 ¿le, be sure to
add an MP3 ¿le extension (.mp3) after
the ¿le name.
y
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Operating Tips for WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media*1 Audio
and is the audio compression format used
by Microsoft*1.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
This unit plays ¿les with the extension
(.wma) as WMA ¿les.
*1 Windows Media and Microsoft are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation U.S. in the United States
and other countries.
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
y
WMA ¿les
written under speci¿cations
other than the indicated speci¿cation
may not play normally or ¿les or folder
names may not display correctly.
y
The ¿le extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the ¿le extension “.wma”
to the end of the ¿le name, and then
write it to the disc/memory.
5–18
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for AAC
AAC stands for Advanced Audio Coding,
which is standardized voice compression
established by the ISO*1 working group
(MPEG). Audio data can be created and
stored at a higher compression ratio than
MP3.
This unit plays ¿les with the extensions
(.aac/.m4a/.wav) as the AAC ¿les.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
y
AAC
¿les written under speci¿cations
other than the indicated speci¿cation
may not play normally or ¿les or folder
names may not display correctly.
y
The ¿le extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the ¿le extension “.aac ”,
“.m4a”, or “.wav” to the end of the ¿le
name, and then write it to the memory.
Operating Tips for OGG
OGG is the audio compression format for
Xiph. Org Foundation.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
This unit plays ¿les with the extension
(.ogg) as OGG ¿les.
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
y
OGG
¿les written under speci¿cations
other than the indicated speci¿cation
may not play normally or ¿les or folder
names may not display correctly.
y
The ¿le extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the ¿le extension “.ogg” to
the end of the ¿le name, and then write
it to the disc/memory.
5–19
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for USB device
This unit plays audio ¿les as follows:
Extension
Playback with this unit
.mp3
MP3
.wma
WMA
.aac
.m4a
AAC
.wav
WAV
.ogg
OGG
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In addition,
do not change the audio file extension.
Otherwise, the unit will not recognize
the file correctly resulting in noise or a
malfunction.
NOTE
yPlayback may not be possible
depending on the type and condition of
the USB Àash memory even if the audio
¿le complies with the standard above.
yA copyright protected WMA/AAC ¿le
cannot be played in this unit.
yThe order of the music data stored in
the device may differ from the playback
order.
yTo prevent loss or damage of stored
data, we recommend that you always
back up your data.
yIf a device exceeds the maximum
electric current value of 1,000 mA,
it may not operate or recharge when
connected.
yDo not pull out the USB device while in
the USB mode (only pull it out while in
FM/AM radio or CD mode).
yThe device will not operate if the data is
password protected.
MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG ¿les written under
speci¿cations other than the indicated
speci¿cation may not play normally
or ¿les/folder names may not display
correctly.
5–20
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio Set
NOTE
The explanation of functions described in this manual may differ from the actual
operation, and the shapes of screens and buttons and the letters and characters displayed
may also differ from the actual appearance.
Additionally, depending on future software updates, the content may successively change
without notice.
Audio Set has three different human interfaces.
y
Commander
switch
panel
y
Voice recognition with steering switch and microphone
y
Touch
Commander switch operation
NOTE
For safety reasons, some operations are disabled while the vehicle is being driven.
Volume dial operation
Volume dial
Press the volume dial to switch the audio MUTE on and off.
Turn the volume dial to adjust the volume. The volume increases by turning the dial
clockwise, and decreases by turning it counterclockwise.
5–21
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Switches around commander knob
The following operations can be done by pressing the switches around the commander knob.
: Displays the home screen.
: Displays the Entertainment screen.
: Displays the Navigation screen (Only navigation-equipped vehicles). For operation
of the Navigation screen, refer to the navigation system manual. If the SD card for
the navigation system is not inserted, the compass indicating the direction in which
the vehicle is moving is displayed.
: Displays the Favorites screen. Long-press to store particular items in Favorites. (Radio,
phonebook and destination of the navigation system can be programmed.)
: Returns to previous screen.
Commander knob operation
(Selection of icons on screen)
1. Tilt or turn the commander knob and move the cursor to the desired icon.
2. Press the commander knob and select the icon.
NOTE
Long-press operation of the commander knob is also possible for some functions.
5–22
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Touch panel operation
CAUTION
Do not press the screen strongly or press it with a sharp-pointed object. Otherwise, the
screen could be damaged.
NOTE
For safety reasons, operation of the center display is disabled while the vehicle is being
driven. However, items not displayed in gray can be operated using the commander switch
while the vehicle is being driven.
5–23
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Basic Operation Method
TOUCH & TAP
1. Touch or tap on the item indicated on the screen.
2. The operation is launched and the next item is displayed.
SLIDE
1. Touch the setting item displaying a slider bar.
2. Touch the slider with your ¿nger and move to the desired level.
SWIPE
1. Touch the screen with your ¿nger and move up or down.
2. Items which were not displayed can be displayed.
5–24
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Return to previous screen
1. Touch the .
Displaying the home screen
1. Touch the .
Home screen
Icon
Function
Applications
Information such as average fuel economy, maintenance, and warnings can be veri¿ed.
Depending on the grade and speci¿cation, the screen display may differ.
Entertainment
Operates audio such as the radio and CDs. The audio source most recently used is
displayed. An audio source which cannot be used at that time is skipped and the previous
audio source is displayed.
To change the audio source, select the
icon displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Communication
Bluetooth® related functions are available.
Navigation
Navigation screen is displayed (vehicles with navigation system).
If the SD card for the navigation system is not inserted, the compass indicating the direction
in which the vehicle is moving is displayed.
The compass may not indicate the correct bearing when the vehicle is stopped or traveling
at a slow speed.
Settings
Overall setting menu (Such as display, sound, Bluetooth® and Language).
Depending on the grade and speci¿cation, the screen display may differ.
5–25
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Volume/Display/Sound Controls
Audio control switch
Commander switch
Volume dial
Volume switch
Volume adjustment
Turn the commander switch volume dial.
The volume switch on the steering switch
can also be pressed.
Display setting
icon on the home screen to
Select the
display the Settings screen.
tab to select the item you
Select the
would like to change.
Display OFF/Clock
The center display can be turned off.
to turn the display off.
Select
is
When
selected the center display turns off and
the clock is displayed.
The center display can be turned back on
as follows:
y
Touch
the center display.
the commander switch.
y
Operate
Daytime/nighttime (System) screen
setting
The daytime or nighttime screen can be
selected.
: Switches screen automatically
according to headlight illumination
condition*1
: Daytime screen setting
: Nighttime screen setting
*1 The display is constantly on daytime
screen when the illumination dimmer is
cancelled.
Brightness adjustment
Adjust the center display brightness using
the slider.
Contrast adjustment
Adjust the center display contrast using
the slider.
Display setting reset
All of the screen setting values can be
reset to their initial settings.
1. Select
2. Select
.
.
5–26
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio sound adjustment
icon on the home screen to
Select the
display the Settings screen.
tab to select the item you
Select the
would like to change.
Indication
Setting value
Side: Low pitch
enhancement
Bass
(Low pitch sound)
Side: Low pitch
reduction
Side: Treble
enhancement
Treble
(Treble sound)
Side: Treble reduction
Fade
(Front/Rear volume
balance)
Front: Front speaker
volume
enhancement
Rear: Rear speaker
volume
enhancement
Balance
(Left/right volume
balance)
Right: Right speaker
volume
enhancement
Left: Left speaker
volume
enhancement
ALC*1
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
Off—Adjustment at
seven levels
Bose® Centerpoint*2
(Automatic surround
level adjustment)
On/Off
Bose® AudioPilot*2
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
On/Off
Beep
On/Off
(Audio operation sound)
*1 Standard audio
*2 Bose® Sound System
ALC (Automatic volume adjustment)
The automatic level control (ALC) is a
feature that automatically adjusts audio
volume and sound quality according to
the vehicle speed. The volume increases
in accordance with the increase in vehicle
speed, and decreases as vehicle speed
decreases.
Bose®Centerpoint (Automatic surround
level adjustment)
Centerpoint®*3 lets vehicle owners enjoy
a Bose® surround sound experience from
their existing CDs, MP3s and satellite
radio.
Speci¿cally engineered to meet the unique
demands of reproducing surround sound in
a vehicle.
Converts stereo signals to multiple
channels allowing greater precision when
reproducing the sound.
An enhanced algorithm to simultaneously
create a wider, more spacious sound ¿eld.
*3 Centerpoint® is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
Bose®AudioPilot (Automatic volume
adjustment)
When driving, background noise can
interfere with enjoying music.
AudioPilot®*4 noise compensation
technology continuously adjusts the music
to compensate for background noise and
vehicle speed.
It reacts only to sustained noise sources
and not intermittent ones, such as speed
bumps.
An enhanced DSP algorithm allows faster
and more effective compensation for
unusual situations, such as driving on a
very rough road or at high speeds.
*4 AudioPilot® is a registered trademark of
Bose Corporation.
5–27
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Radio
Radio ON
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen. When selecting
Select the
the desired radio, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the center display.
AM/FM Radio
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Select
to display the frequencies of up to ten radio stations on the auto
memory preset list.
Select the desired frequency.
Displays the Favorites list. Long-press to store radio station currently being aired.
Switches the
.
on and off. Displays the multi-cast channel list of the
You can search for receivable radio stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about ¿ve seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the radio station.
You can change the radio frequency manually.
Rotate the commander knob, slide the screen, or touch the radio frequency.
Press or to change the radio frequency one step at a time.
When or is long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when you
remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Launches the iTunes Tagging function (for Apple devices with USB use only). Can be used
is on.
when the
Automatic radio station selection.
When long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when you remove
your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
5–28
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Favorites Radio
Selected stations can be registered for
convenient operation. Up to 50 stations
can be registered. The Favorites list is
common to AM, FM, and satellite radio.
Registering to Favorites
icon to register the
Long-press the
current radio station. The registration can
also be performed using the following
procedure.
1. Select the
icon to display the
Favorites list.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
4. The station is added to the bottom of
the Favorites list.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, your
Favorites list will not be deleted.
Selecting radio station from Favorites
icon to display the
1. Select the
Favorites list.
2. Select the radio frequency to tune in the
radio station.
Deleting from Favorites
icon to display the
1. Select the
Favorites list.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
4. Select the radio frequency you want to
delete.
.
5. Select
Changing Favorites list order
icon to display the
1. Select the
Favorites list.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
4. Select a radio frequency. The selected
radio station can be moved.
5. Slide the radio station or move it using
.
the commander switch, then select
Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS)*
Radio text information display
Radio text information sent from a
broadcasting station is displayed in the
center display.
NOTE
Radio text information is a function of FM
radio only. There is no text function on AM
radio. Text information is not displayed in
the following:
yDuring
reception
an RBDS broadcast
yRBDS broadcast, but radio text is not
transmitted from the radio station
yNot
Genre Seek
Some FM stations transmit Genre codes
(Program type like a Rock, News, and so
on). This code enables alternative stations
transmitting the same Genre code to be
found quickly.
(To scan for Genre Seek:)
1. Select the
icon while in the FM
mode.
to open the genre list.
2. Select
3. Select the genre type you want to
select.
4. Select the , icon.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5–29
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
To change the desired genre, select the
icon.
Ex.)
89.3 is currently being received. With
Rock selected as the Genre, the radio
stations broadcasting Rock are at the
following frequencies.
98.3*1, 98.7, 104.3*1, 107.1
*1 Radio stations with good reception
The frequency changes as follows each
is pressed.
time
89.3ĺ98.3ĺ104.3ĺ98.3
NOTE
yOnly one Genre can be selected.
yIt may not be possible to receive any
station even if the Genre Seek function
is used.
yIf a program in the selected genre is not
broadcast to a region, reception is not
possible even if the Genre Seek function
is used.
yThe Genre Seek function searches for
genre code (program type) which FM
analog broadcasts transmit.
specialty programs (HD2-HD8) cannot
be searched because they are not FM
analog broadcasts.
yIf radio stations which are selected by
scanning using the Genre Seek function
broadcasting stations,
are
they are changed from analog
broadcasts
broadcasts to
after a few seconds if the reception
conditions are good. The genre is
displayed after the switch, however, the
genre for FM analog broadcasts may
differ.
HD Radio
What is HD Radio™ Technology and
how does it work?
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio. For more
information, and a guide to available radio
stations and programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
Bene¿ts of HD Radio™ Technology
(Information)
The song title, artist name, album name
and genre will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station.
(Multicast)
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on each FM station.
Listening to HD Radio™ Technology
icon turns on by selecting a radio
If
broadcasting
station which is an
station, the analog broadcast is switched to
broadcast automatically after
an
a few seconds and then received.
broadcast is stopped and
If the
changed to an analog broadcast, press
to turn off .
down
Multicast channel selection (FM)
If multi-cast channels are available for an
broadcast currently being
received, the multi-cast channel list is
displayed. Select the desired radio station.
5–30
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
yIf an analog broadcast is received once
is received while HD1 is
and
selected, the audio unit switches to the
station automatically.
yWhen the
icon is illuminated, there
could be a noticeable difference in
sound quality and volume when a
change from digital to analog signals
occurs. If the sound quality and volume
become noticeably diminished or cut
icon to turn off
off, select the
(
icon is not illuminated).
yOnce an analog broadcast is received
when HD1 is selected from the Favorite
channels, it is switched to
automatically. If the radio reception
conditions are poor, or HD is off,
broadcasts is
switching to
not possible.
yWhen an HD specialty channel (HD2 to
HD8) is selected from the Favorite
channels, “Signal Lost” is displayed
and no audio is output until
is received. If the radio reception
conditions are poor, “Signal Lost”
continues to be displayed.
yIf the
icon is not illuminated,
information such as song titles of the
station are received,
however, the audio output is analog.
iTunes Tagging (for Apple devices with
USB use only)
By tagging a song currently being aired,
the song can later be purchased from
the iTunes Store. One hundred tags
can be stored. A maximum of 100 tags
(for 100 songs) can be stored for later
downloading.
1. Select the
icon. The tag is stored in
the audio unit.
2. Connect the device via the vehicle's
USB. Any stored tag(s) will be sent
automatically to the connected device.
3. Once at home or after parking the
vehicle safely, log onto the iTunes
Store with your device. Your previously
tagged song(s) can now be easily
purchased.
NOTE
yBoth AM and FM
can be
used.
yBecause iTunes tagging only supports
purchases from the iTunes Store, direct
downloading of music from the vehicle's
audio unit is not possible.
yIf the available memory for the
connected device is insuf¿cient, the tag
is not sent.
yIf an error occurs while the tag is being
sent, reconnect the device.
5–31
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Satellite Radio*
What is satellite radio?
With over 130 channels, SiriusXM
Satellite Radio brings you more of what
you love. Get channels and channels of
commercial-free music, plus sports, news,
talk, entertainment and more.
Commercial-free music from nearly
every genre
—rock to pop, hip-hop to country, jazz,
classical and more. Plus live performances
and artist-dedicated channels.
Live sports Play-by-Play & Expert Talk
—every NFL game, every NASCAR® race,
24/7 sports talk, college sports and more.
Exclusive entertainment, comedy and talk
—The biggest names, compelling talk,
hilarious comedy.
World-class news plus local traf¿c and
weather.
Sign up for SiriusXM Satellite Radio today!
NOTE
yTo listen to SiriusXM, a prior
subscription (fee-based) is required.
yThe channels which you can receive
depend on the package you subscribe to.
ySatellite radio is broadcast as Sirius,
XM, and SiriusXM in the U.S.A., and
Sirius and XM in Canada. In this owner’s
manual, only the name SiriusXM is used.
yFor traf¿c and weather channels, map
information is not displayed and only
audio broadcasts can be received.
yCall 877-447-0011 (U.S.A.)/
877-209-0079 (Canada) to activate.
For more information, visit www.
siriusxm.com (U.S.A.)/www.siriusxm.
ca (Canada). Satellite radio is only
available in regions providing satellite
radio service (some areas of the United
States and Canada). Contact Authorized
Mazda Dealer for details.
5–32
How to Activate Satellite Radio
You must call SiriusXM to activate your
service. Activation is free and takes only a
few minutes.
New customers can receive a free
introductory subscription with a limited
term trial offer by calling 877-447-0011
(U.S.A.)/877-209-0079 (Canada) to
activate.
SiriusXM service uses an ID code to
identify your radio. This code is needed to
activate SiriusXM service, and report any
problems.
Please have the following information
ready:
y
Radio
ID (8-digit electronic serial No.)
Refer to Displaying the Radio ID (ESN)
y
Valid credit card information (may not
be required at initial sign-up)
Be sure you are parked outside with a clear
view of open sky, you will be instructed
to turn on your radio (in SiriusXM mode
and tuned to channel 184 (Sirius)/1 (XM
and SiriusXM)). Activation typically takes
only 2—5 minutes.
Displaying the Radio ID (ESN)
When channel 0 is selected, the radio ID is
displayed. Use the PREVIOUS or NEXT
channel buttons to select channel 0.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
SiriusXM operation
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen. When
Select the
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display.
Icon
is
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the channel list of the current category.
Displays the favorites list. Long-press to store the channel currently being aired.
Refer to Operating the Radio on page 5-28.
Indicates that the parental lock function is in use.
Switching of Lock/Unlock and PIN code setting changes can be performed.
Plays each channel in the current channel list for 5 seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the channel.
Plays the previous channel.
Plays the next channel.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
5–33
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Selection from channel list
Receivable channels can be displayed on
the channel list screen. You can easily
select the channel you want to listen
from the list. Each category can be also
displayed.
1. Select the
icon to display the
channel list.
2. Select a desired channel.
(Select from category list)
icon to display the
1. Select the
channel list.
to display the category
2. Select
list.
3. Select a desired category.
PIN code reset
If the registered code has been forgotten,
reset the code to the default [0000] code.
1. Select the icon.
2. If the selected channel is locked, input
the PIN code to cancel the parental lock
temporarily.
.
3. Select
4. Input the default code [0000] using the
number buttons.
.
5. Select
6. Input the new PIN code using the
number buttons.
.
7. Select
Parental lock
If a channel is locked, the channel is
muted.
To use the parental lock function, the PIN
code must be initialized ¿rst.
By using the session lock, the parental
lock can be enabled or disabled during the
current drive cycle (from when the ignition
is switched on to switched off). When
the session lock is on, the parental lock is
available. When the session lock is off, the
parental lock is temporarily cancelled.
When canceling the parental lock or
session lock, or when changing the PIN
code, PIN code input is required.
5–34
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
MEMO
5–35
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
CD eject button
Type
Music/MP3/WMA/
AAC CD player
Playable data
yMusic data (CD-DA)
yMP3/WMA/AAC ¿le
CD slot
Ejecting the CD
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3/WMA/AAC ¿les, playback of the
two or three ¿le types differs depending on
how the disc was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play
begins while the player reads the digital
signals on the CD.
5–36
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Playback
icon on the home screen with a CD inserted and display the Entertainment
Select the
is selected, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the center
screen. When
display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(Music CD)
Displays the track list of the CD.
Select the track you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Displays the top level folder/¿le list.
Select the folder you want to select.
The ¿les in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the ¿le you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/ACC CDs only)
Displays the ¿le list of the folder currently being played.
Select the song you want to listen to.
(Music CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
Plays songs on the CD in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the CD are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
The beginning of each track on a CD is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
The beginning of each track in a folder is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
If the audio is operated during scan-play, the track being scan-played is played normally.
Then, the audio operation is performed.
If selected within a few seconds of a song which has started to play, the previous song is
selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed after a song has begun to play, the song currently
being played is replayed from the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
5–37
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Icon
Function
Plays a CD. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
Example of use (When searching for
a song from the top level of an MP3/
WMA/AAC CD)
icon to display the
1. Select the
folder/¿le list at the top level.
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB
port
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device to the USB port.
Refer to AUX/USB mode on page 5-43.
2. When the folder is selected, folders/¿le
lists in the folder are displayed.
3. Select the desired song.
NOTE
ySelect
to move to a folder one level
higher.
yThe appearance of the repeat and
shufÀe icons changes depending on the
type of operation in which the function
is used.
5–38
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Settings
NOTE
Depending on the grade and speci¿cation, the screen display may differ.
Select the
icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab
AD-Disp
Item
Height
Brightness Control
Other
Function
Refer to Active Driving Display on page 4-29.
Display
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
Safety
Distance Recognition Support System
SBS/SCBS
Other
Sound
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Adjust Time
Displays the currently set time is displayed.
Press to advance the hour/minute, and select to
move the hour/minute back.
AM/PM can only be selected with the 12-hour clock
display.
GPS Sync
Synchronizes with GPS when turned on.
When turned off, the time can be changed from “Adjust
Time”.
Time Format
Changes the display between 12 and 24-hour clock
time.
Time Zone Select
When it's not synchronized with GPS, select the region
you want to specify.
Daylight Savings Time
Turns the daylight saving time setting on/off.
When ON, the time advances 1 hour. When OFF, it
returns to normal time.
Vehicle
Rain Sensing Wiper
Door Locks
Other
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Devices
Bluetooth®
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation on page 5-54.
Clock
5–39
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Tab
Item
Function
Tool Tips
Turns button explanations ON/OFF.
Language
Changes the language.
Temperature
Changes the setting between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Distance
Changes the setting between miles and kilometers.
Used to update Gracenote®. Gracenote is used with
USB Audio, and provides:
Music Database Update
System
Restore All Factory Settings
About
1.Supplemental music information (Such as song name,
artist name)
2.Voice recognition assistance for Play Artist and Play
Album
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda
Handsfree Website.
Refer to Gracenote Database on page 5-49.
Memory and settings are initialized to the factory
settings.
The initialization launches by selecting the
button.
Agreements and
Disclaimers
Verify the disclaimer and agree.
Version Information
Can verify the current audio unit OS version and
Gracenote Database version.
5–40
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Applications
NOTE
Depending on the grade and speci¿cation,
the screen display may differ.
Audio Control Switch
Operation
Select the
icon on the home screen to
display the Applications screen. The
following information can be veri¿ed.
Top screen
Item
Function
—
—
Fuel
Consumption
Control
Status
(Vehicles
with
i-ELOOP)
Settings
Refer to Fuel
Economy
Monitor on
page 4-83.
Maintenance
Scheduled
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Oil Change
Refer to
Maintenance
Monitor on
page 6-18.
Warning
Guidance
Warnings
currently
active can be
veri¿ed.
Refer to If
a Warning
Light Turns
On or
Flashes on
page 7-22.
HD Radio™ Traf¿c
Map
Fuel Economy
Monitor
Vehicle
Status
Monitor
Adjusting the Volume
To increase the volume, press up the
volume switch ( ).
To decrease the volume, press down the
volume switch ( ).
5–41
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Seek Switch
AM/FM radio
Press the seek switch ( , ). The radio
switches to the next/previous stored station
in the order that it was stored.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) to
seek all usable stations at a higher or lower
frequency whether programmed or not.
Pandora®/Aha™/Stitcher™ Radio
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press and hold the seek switch ( ) to
evaluate the playback of the current song
as “Like”.
Press and hold the seek switch ( ) to
evaluate the playback of the current song
as “Dislike”.
Radio stations which have been previously
stored in the favorite radio can be called
up by pressing the seek switch ( , )
while any radio station stored in the
favorite radio is being received. Radio
stations can be called up in the order they
were stored with each press of the switch
( , ).
USB Audio/Bluetooth® Audio /CD
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press the seek switch ( ) within a few
seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the seek switch ( ) after a few
seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) to
continuously switch the tracks up or down.
5–42
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
AUX/USB mode
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
A commercially-available, non-impedance
(3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable is required.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device to the USB port.
NOTE
The SD card slot is for the navigation
system. For vehicles with the navigation
system, the SD card (Mazda genuine) with
stored map data is inserted into the SD
card slot and used.
Auxiliary jack
USB port
How to use AUX mode .......... page5-45
How to use USB mode........... page5-46
WARNING
Do not adjust the portable audio unit or a
similar product while driving the vehicle:
Adjusting the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving
the vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the vehicle
operation which could lead to a serious
accident. Always adjust the portable
audio unit or a similar product while
the vehicle is stopped.
CAUTION
Depending on the portable audio
device, noise may occur when the
device is connected to the vehicle
accessory socket. (If noise occurs, do
not use the accessory socket.)
NOTE
yThis mode may not be usable depending on
the portable audio device to be connected.
yBefore using the auxiliary jack/USB
port, refer to the instruction manual for
the portable audio device.
yUse a commercially-available, non
impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for
connecting the portable audio unit to
the auxiliary jack. Before using the
auxiliary jack, read the manufacturer's
instructions for connecting a portable
audio unit to the auxiliary jack.
yTo prevent discharging of the battery,
do not use the auxiliary input for long
periods with the engine off or idling.
yWhen connecting a device to the
auxiliary jack or USB port, noise may
occur depending on the connected
device. If the device is connected to the
vehicle's accessory socket, the noise can
be reduced by unplugging it from the
accessory socket.
5–43
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
How to connect USB port/
Auxiliary jack
USB port
Auxiliary jack
NOTE
yInsert the plug into the auxiliary jack/
USB port securely.
yInsert or pull out the plug with the plug
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack/USB
port hole.
yInsert or remove the plug by holding its
base.
Connecting a device
1. Open the console lid.
2. Connect the connector on the device to
the USB port.
Connecting with a connector cable
1. Open the console lid.
2. Connect the device plug/connector
cable to the auxiliary jack/USB port.
Pass the device plug/connector cable
through the notch in the console and
connect.
WARNING
Do not allow the connection plug cord
to get tangled with the shift lever:
Allowing the plug cord to become
tangled with the shift lever is
dangerous as it could interfere with
driving, resulting in an accident.
CAUTION
Do not place objects or apply force to
the auxiliary jack/USB port with the
plug connected.
5–44
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use AUX mode
1. Select the
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen.
to switch to the AUX mode. The following icons are displayed in the lower
2. Select
part of the center display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
NOTE
yIf a device is not connected to the auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch to the AUX
mode.
yAdjust the audio volume using the portable audio device, commander switch, or audio
control switch.
yAudio adjustments can also be made using the portable audio device's volume setting.
yIf the connection plug is pulled out from the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise may
occur.
5–45
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use USB mode
Type
USB mode
Playable data
MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG ¿le
This unit does not support a USB 3.0 device. In addition, other devices may not be
supported depending on the model or OS version.
USB devices formatted to FAT32 are supported (USB devices formatted to other formats
such as NTFS are not supported).
Playback
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen.
1. Select the
or
to switch the USB mode. The following icons are displayed in the
2. Select
lower part of the center display.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Category list is displayed.
Current track list is displayed.
Select a desired track to play it.
Plays the current track repeatedly.
Select it again to play the tracks in the current track list repeatedly.
When selected again, the function is canceled.
Tracks in the current track list are played randomly.
Select it again to cancel.
Starts playing a track similar to the current track using Gracenote's More Like This™.
Select the desired song from the category list to cancel More Like This™.
If selected within a few seconds from the beginning of a song which has started to play, the
previous song is selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed, the song currently being played is replayed from
the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Track is played. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
5–46
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Icon
Function
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
NOTE
yTo move to the desired location on the track, move the slider indicating the playback time.
yThe appearance of the repeat and shufÀe icons changes depending on the type of
operation in which the function is used.
Category list
icon to display the following category list.
Select the
Select a desired category and item.
Category
Playlist*1
Artist
Album
Function
Displays playlists on the device.
Displays the artist name list.
All the tracks or tracks for each album of the selected artist can be played.
Displays the album name list.
Song
All the tracks in the device are displayed.
Genre
Displays the genre list.
All the tracks or tracks per album or artist in the selected genre can be played.
Audiobook*2
Displays the audiobook list.
Chapters can be selected and played.
Podcast*2
Displays the podcast list.
Episode can be selected and played.
Folder*3
Displays the folder/¿le list.
*1 Playlist folders of Apple devices are not supported.
*2 Apple device only
*3 USB-Sticks and USB-Android™ device only
5–47
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Example of use (to play all tracks in
USB device)
(Method 1)
to display the category list.
1. Select
.
2. Select
All the tracks in the USB device are
displayed.
3. Select a desired track.
The selected track is played. All the
tracks in the USB device can be played
by continuing playback.
NOTE
Only the tracks in the desired category
selected in Step 2 are played.
(Method 2)*1
to display the category list.
1. Select
.
2. Select
All the folders in the USB device are
displayed.
.
3. Select
All the tracks in the USB device are
displayed.
4. Select a desired track.
The selected track is played. All the
tracks in the USB device can be played
by continuing playback.
*1 Can be operated using an Android™
device or USB Àash memory.
NOTE
Only the tracks in the desired folder
selected in Step 3 are played.
5–48
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
Gracenote Database
When a USB device is connected to this unit and the audio is played, the album name,
artist name, genre and title information are automatically displayed if there is a match in
the vehicle's database compilation to the music being played. The information stored in this
device uses database information in the Gracenote music recognition service.
CAUTION
For information related to the most recent Gracenote database which can be used and
how to install it, go to the Mazda Hands Free Website:
http://www.mazdahandsfree.com
Introduction
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more
information visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a nonexhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or ¿le identi¿cation and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
5–49
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Audio System
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identi¿er to track queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identi¿er is to allow the Gracenote service to count
queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right
to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems suf¿cient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will
be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue
its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© 2000 to present. Gracenote, Inc.
Updating the database
The Gracenote media database can be updated using USB device.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect a USB device containing the software for updating Gracenote.
icon on the home screen to display the Settings screen.
Select the
tab and select
.
Select the
. The list of the update package stored in the USB device and the version are
Select
displayed.
5. Select the package to use the update.
.
6. Select
NOTE
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda Hands-free Website.
5–50
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Hands-Free outline
When a Bluetooth® device (mobile phone) is connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit via
radio wave transmission, a call can be made or received by pressing the talk button, pickup button, or hang-up button on the audio remote control switch, or by operating the center
display. For example, even if a device (mobile phone) is in your coat pocket, a call can be
made without taking the device (mobile phone) out and operating it directly.
Bluetooth® audio outline
When a portable audio unit equipped with the Bluetooth® communication function is paired
to the vehicle, you can listen to music stored on the paired portable audio device from the
vehicle's speakers. It is not necessary to connect the portable audio device to the vehicle's
external input terminal. After programming, operate the vehicle audio control panel to play/
stop the audio.
NOTE
yFor your safety, a device can be paired only when the vehicle is parked. If the vehicle
starts to move, the pairing procedure will end. Park the vehicle in a safe place before
pairing.
yThe communication range of a Bluetooth® equipped device is about 10 meters (32 ft) or
less.
yBasic audio operation is available using voice commands even if Bluetooth® is not
connected.
yFor safety reasons, operation of the center display is disabled while the vehicle is being
driven. However, items not displayed in gray can be operated using the commander
switch while the vehicle is being driven.
5–51
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CAUTION
Some Bluetooth® mobile devices are not compatible with the vehicle. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda's call center or Web support center for information
regarding Bluetooth® mobile device compatibility:
¾U.S.A.
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
¾Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
¾Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Applicable Bluetooth® speci¿cation (Recommended)
Ver. 1.1/1.2/2.0 EDR/2.1 EDR/3.0 (conformity)
Component Parts
Audio unit
Talk button, Pick-up button and Hang-up button
Talk button
Pick-up button
Hang-up button
Microphone
Microphone
5–52
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Microphone (hands-free)
The microphone is used for speaking voice commands or when making a Hands-free call.
Talk button, Pick-Up button and Hang-Up button (hands-free)
The basic functions of Bluetooth® Hands-Free can be used for such things as making calls or
hanging up using the talk, pick-up and hang-up buttons on the steering wheel.
Commander switch
The commander switch is used for volume adjustment and display operation. Tilt or turn the
commander knob to move the cursor. Press the commander knob to select the icon.
Volume adjustment
The volume dial of the commander switch is used to adjust the volume. Turn the dial to the
right to increase volume, to the left to decrease it.
The volume can also be adjusted using the volume button on the steering wheel.
NOTE
If the volume is lower compared to other audio modes, increase the volume from the device
side.
Conversation volume and the volume of the voice guidance and ringtone can each be set in
advance.
1. Select the
2. Select
3. Adjust the
icon on the home screen to display the Communication screen.
.
and the
using the slider.
5–53
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Preparation
Device pairing
To use Bluetooth® audio and Hands-Free,
the device equipped with Bluetooth® has
to be paired to the unit using the following
procedure. A maximum of seven devices
including Bluetooth® audio devices and
hands-free mobile phones can be paired.
NOTE
yThe Bluetooth® system may not operate
for 1 or 2 minutes after the ignition
is switched to ACC or ON. However,
this does not indicate a problem. If the
Bluetooth® system does not connect
automatically after 1 or 2 minutes have
elapsed, make sure that the Bluetooth®
setting on the device is normal and
attempt to reconnect the Bluetooth®enabled device from the vehicle side.
yIf Bluetooth®-enabled devices are used
in the following locations or conditions,
connection via Bluetooth® may not be
possible.
yThe
device is in a location hidden
from the center display such as
behind or under a seat, or inside the
glove compartment.
yThe device contacts or is covered by
a metal object or body.
yThe device is set to power-saving
mode.
Pairing Procedure
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
to display the
5. Select
message and switch to the device
operation.
6. Using your device, perform a search
for the Bluetooth® device (Peripheral
device).
7. Select “Mazda” from the device list
searched by the device.
8. (Device with Bluetooth® version 2.0)
Input the displayed 4-digit pairing code
into the device.
(Device with Bluetooth® version 2.1
or higher)
Make sure the displayed 6-digit code
on the audio is also displayed on the
.
device, and touch the
Connection permission and phonebook
access permission for your mobile
device may be required depending on
the mobile device.
9. If pairing is successful, the functions of
the device connected to Bluetooth® are
displayed.
10.(Devices compatible with Mazda
Email / SMS function)
SMS (Short Message Service)
messages, and E-mail for the device are
downloaded automatically. A download
permission operation for your device
may be required depending on the
device.
5–54
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
When Call history and messages are
downloaded automatically, each automatic
download setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-68.
After a device is registered, the system
automatically identi¿es the device. By
activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free again, or
by activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free ¿rst
after switching the ignition from OFF to
ACC, the device connection condition is
indicated in the center display.
IMPORTANT note about pairing and
automatic reconnection:
y
If pairing is redone on the same
mobile phone device, ¿rst clear
“Mazda” displayed on the Bluetooth®
setting screen of the mobile device.
y
When the OS of the device is updated,
the pairing information may be deleted.
If this happens, reprogram the pairing
information to the Bluetooth® unit.
y
Before you pair your device, make sure
that Bluetooth® is “ON”, both on your
phone and on the vehicle.
Device selection
If several devices have been paired, the
Bluetooth® unit links the device last
paired. If you would like to link a different
paired device, it is necessary to change the
link. The order of device priority after the
link has been changed is maintained even
when the ignition is switched off.
Connecting other devices
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the name of the device you
would like to connect.
selection
6.
Connects both devices as hands-free
and Bluetooth® audio.
selection
Connects as a hands-free device.
selection
Connects as Bluetooth® audio.
NOTE
The following functions can be used for
the Hands-free or audio.
yHands-free:
Phone calls and E-mail/
SMS
yAudio: Bluetooth® audio, Pandora®,
Aha™, Stitcher™ radio
5–55
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Disconnecting a device
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the device name which is
currently connected.
.
6. Select
Deleting a device
Selecting and deleting devices
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the device name which you
would like to delete.
.
6. Select
.
7. Select
Deleting all devices
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
to display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
.
5. Select
.
6. Select
Changing PIN code
PIN code (4 digits) can be changed.
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
to display the Settings screen.
tab.
2. Select the
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
.
5. Select
6. Input the new PIN code to be set.
7. Select .
Available Language
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free System
applies to the following languages:
y
English
y
Spanish
y
French
Refer to Settings on page 5-39.
Voice Recognition
In this section, the basic operation of the
voice recognition is explained.
Activating Voice Recognition
Press the talk button.
Ending Voice Recognition
Use one of the following methods:
y
Press
the hang-up button.
“Cancel”.
y
Operate the commander switch or the
center display (only when vehicle is
stopped).
y
Say,
Skipping Voice Guidance (for faster
operation)
Press and release the talk button.
Troubleshooting for Voice Recognition
If you do not understand an operation
method while in the voice recognition
mode, say “Tutorial” or “Help”.
Commands useable anytime during
voice recognition
“Go Back” and “Cancel” are commands
which can be used at anytime during voice
recognition.
Returning to previous operation
To return to the previous operation, say,
“Go Back” while in voice recognition
mode.
5–56
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Cancel
To put the Bluetooth® Hands-Free system
in standby mode, say, “Cancel” while in
voice recognition mode.
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory.
Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5-81.
To prevent a deterioration in the voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points should be observed:
y
The voice recognition cannot be
performed while voice guidance or
the beep sound is operating. Wait
until the voice guidance or the beep
sound is ¿nished before saying your
commands.
y
Phone related commands are available
only when your phone is connected via
Bluetooth®. Make sure your phone is
connected via Bluetooth® before you
operate phone related voice commands.
y
Music play commands, such as Play
Artist and Play Album can be used only
in USB audio mode.
y
Do not speak too slowly or loudly (no
loud voice).
y
Speak clearly, without pausing between
words or numbers.
y
Dialects or different wording other
than hands-free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording speci¿ed by the voice
commands.
y
It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
y
Close the windows and/or the moonroof
to reduce loud noises from outside
the vehicle, or turn down the airÀow
of the air-conditioning system while
Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being used.
y
Make sure the vents are not directing air
up towards the microphone.
5–57
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Audio Operation Using Voice Recognition
Voice command
When the talk button is pressed and the following command is spoken, the audio or
navigation can be operated. The commands in the () can be omitted. The speci¿ed name and
number are put into the {}.
Standard command
Voice command
cancel
Function
Ends the voice recognition mode.
(go) back
Returns to the previous operation.
help
Usable commands can be veri¿ed.
tutorial
Basic voice commands and methods of use can be veri¿ed.
(go to) home (screen)/main menu
Moves to the home screen.
(go to) communication
Moves to the communication screen.
(go to) navigation
Moves to the navigation screen.
(go to) entertainment (menu)
Moves to the entertainment screen.
(go to) settings
Moves to the setting screen.
(go to) favorites
Moves to the favorites screen.
Communication (phone) related command
Voice command
Function
Call {name in phonebook} (mobile/
home/work/other)
Example: “Call John Mobile”
Call to the contact in the downloaded phonebook.
Refer to Making a Call on page 5-60.
Redial
Call to the last contact you called.
Refer to Making a Call on page 5-60.
Callback
Call to the last contact who called you.
Refer to Making a Call on page 5-60.
5–58
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Entertainment (audio) related command
Voice command
Function
Corresponding audio
source
(Go to/Play) AM (Radio)
Switches the audio source to AM radio.
All
(Go to/Play) FM (Radio)
Switches the audio source to FM radio.
All
(Go to/Play) Bluetooth (Audio) Switches the audio source to BT audio.
All
(Go to/Play) Pandora
Switches the audio source to Pandora®
All
(Go to/Play) Aha (Radio)
Switches the audio source to Aha™ Radio.
All
(Go to/Play) Stitcher
Switches the audio source to Stitcher™ Radio.
All
(Go to/Play) USB 1
Switches the audio source to USB 1.
All
(Go to/Play) USB 2
Switches the audio source to USB 2.
Play Playlist {Playlist name}
Plays the selected playlist.
All
USB
Play Artist {Artist name}
Plays the selected artist.
USB
Play Album {Album name}
Plays the selected album.
USB
Play Genre {Genre name}
Plays the selected genre.
USB
Play Folder {Folder name}
Plays the selected folder.
USB
Navigation related command*
For the navigation screen voice commands, refer to the separate navigation system manual.
NOTE
ySome commands cannot be used depending on the grade and speci¿cation.
ySome commands cannot be used depending on the device connection conditions and the
use conditions.
yThe commands are examples of the available commands.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5–59
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Making a Call
Phonebook Usage
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the contact name in the downloaded
phonebook or the name of a person whose
phone number has been registered in the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free. Refer to Import
contact (Download Phonebook).
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Call XXXXX... (Ex. “John”)
Mobile”.
4. Follow the voice guidance to place the
call.
Screen operation
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
to display the contact
2. Select
list.
3. Select the contact you would like
to call to display the details for the
contact.
4. Select the desired phone number to
make the call.
(Manually downloading)
If the “Auto Download Contacts” setting
is off, download the phonebook using the
following procedure.
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
to display the Communication screen.
to display the contact
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
or
4. Select
to switch to the
device operation.
is selected, select
5. If
.
6. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
NOTE
yIf “Import All Contacts” is performed
after saving the phonebook to the
Bluetooth® unit, the phonebook will be
overwritten.
yA maximum of 1,000 contacts can be
registered to the phonebook.
yPhonebook, incoming/outgoing call
record, and favorite memories are
exclusive to each mobile phone to
protect privacy.
Import contact (Download Phonebook)
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile
phone) can be sent and registered to your
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook using
Bluetooth®.
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Contacts”
setting must be on. When hands-free is
connected to the device, the phonebook is
downloaded automatically.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-68.
5–60
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Favorites Contacts
A maximum of 50 contacts can be
registered. It will take less time to make a
call after registering the telephone number.
In addition, you do not have to look for the
person you want to call in the phonebook.
Registering your favorites
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
or
4. Select
.
5. Select from the displayed list.
NOTE
When “Add New Contact” is selected,
information such as the selected person’s
name is also registered. In addition, when
“Add New Contact Details” is selected,
only the telephone number of the selected
person is registered.
Calling a favorite
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
3. (If only one phone number is
registered to contact)
Select the contact information you
would like to call. Go to Step 5.
(If multiple phone numbers are
registered to contact)
Select the contact you would like to
call to display the screen indicating the
details for the contact. Go to Step 4.
4. Select the phone number you would
like to call.
.
5. Select
Deleting a favorite
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
5. Select the contact information which
you would like to delete.
.
6. Select
Changing the display order of your
favorites list
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
5. The contact can be moved after it is
selected.
6. Slide the contact or move it using the
.
commander switch, then select
Changing contact name of your
favorites
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
to display the favorites
2. Select
list.
.
3. Select
.
4. Select
5. Select the contact to display the
keyboard screen.
is
6. If a new name is input and
selected, the contact name is stored.
NOTE
If the contact is long-pressed when the
favorites list is displayed, the contact
information can be edited (deleted,
moved).
5–61
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Telephone Number Input
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
con¿dent you can do it while driving in a
non-taxing road situation. If you are not
completely comfortable, make all calls
from a safe parking position, and only
start driving when you can devote your full
attention to driving.
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
to display the Communication screen.
is pressed, the dial pad
2. When
is displayed.
3. Input the telephone number using the
dial pad.
4. Select to make the call.
Numeral or symbol entry
Use the dial pad.
to input +.
Long-press the
to delete the currently input
Select
value.
to delete all input values.
Long-press
Redial Function
Makes a call to the last person called
(latest person on outgoing call record)
from the mobile phone/vehicle.
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Redial”
Call back Function
Makes a call to the last person who called
your (latest person on incoming call
record) mobile phone/vehicle.
Mobile 911 (U.S.A./Canada only)
If the vehicle is involved in a moderate
to severe collision, a call is made
automatically to 911 from the connected
device. The “Emergency Assistance Call”
setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-68.
CAUTION
Though the system can be set to
not call 911, doing so will defeat
the purpose of the system. Mazda
recommends that the Mobile 911
system remain activated.
NOTE
yMobile 911 is a secondary function
of the audio entertainment system.
Therefore, the mobile 911 function
does not assure that the call is always
made to 911 after an accident occurs.
yA Hands-free device must be paired and
connected. The 911 operator can verify
the vehicle's position information using
the Hands-free device GPS if equipped.
1. If the vehicle is involved in a moderate
to severe collision, noti¿cation of the
call to 911 is made via audio and screen
display. To cancel the call, press
or hang-up
button within 10 seconds.
or hang2. If
up button is not pressed within 10
seconds, the call is made to 911
automatically.
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Call back”
5–62
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Receiving an Incoming Call
When an incoming call is received, the incoming call noti¿cation screen is displayed. The
“Incoming Call Noti¿cations” setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page 5-68.
on
To accept the call, press the pick-up button on the audio control switch or select
the screen.
on the
To reject the call, press the hang-up button on the audio control switch or select
screen.
The following icons are displayed on the screen during a call. Icons which can be used differ
depending on use conditions.
Icon
Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Ends the call.
Transferring a call from hands-free to a mobile phone
Communication between the Bluetooth® unit and a device (mobile phone) is canceled, and
an incoming call will be received by the device (mobile phone) like a standard call.
Transferring a call from a device (mobile phone) to hands-free
Communication between devices (mobile phone) can be switched to Bluetooth® HandsFree.
Mute
The microphone can be muted during a call.
When selected again, the mute is canceled.
To make a 3-way call, select the contacts from the following:
: Call History is displayed.
: The phonebook is displayed.
: The dial pad is displayed. Input the phone number.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
The call on hold is made to make a 3-way call.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
Switches the call on hold.
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting DTMF via the dial pad. The receiver of a DTMF
transmission is generally a home telephone answering machine or a company's automated
guidance call center.
Input the number using a dial pad.
5–63
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
yIf the ignition is switched off during a
hands-free call, the line is transferred
to the device (Mobile phone)
automatically.
yIf the DTMF code has two or more
digits or symbols, each one must be
transmitted individually.
Call Interrupt
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
is selected or the pickWhen
up button on the steering wheel is pressed,
the current call is held and the system
switches to the new incoming call.
is selected, the current
When
call is ended and the system switches to
the new incoming call (GSM network
only).
is selected or the hang-up
When
button on the steering wheel is pressed, an
incoming call is refused.
NOTE
yThe function may not be available
depending on the contractual content of
the mobile device.
yThe function may not be operable
depending on the type of the telephone
network and the mobile device.
Receiving and Replying to
Messages (available only with
E-mail/SMS compatible phones)
SMS (Short Message Service) messages,
and E-mail received by connected devices
can be downloaded, displayed, and played
(read by the system).
Additionally, replies can also be made
to calls and messages in the received
messages.
Downloading messages
Up to 20 new messages can be
downloaded and displayed from a
connected device.
NOTE
For E-mail, 20 messages for each account
can be downloaded.
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Email” (E-mail)
or “Auto Download Text Message”
(SMS) setting must be on. A message
is downloaded automatically when the
Bluetooth® unit is connected to the device.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-68.
(Manually downloading)
When the “Auto Download Email”
(E-mail) or “Auto Download Text
Message” (SMS) setting is off, the
message is downloaded using the
following procedure.
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
to display the Communication screen.
or
to display
2. Select
the Inbox.
.
3. Select
4. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
5–64
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
yAttached data is not downloaded.
yMessages up to 1 kilobyte (E-mail)/140
bytes (SMS) can be downloaded.
yA message list is created for each
device.
yIf the connected device does not
correspond to MAP 1.0, the AT
command is used to download. The
downloaded message indicates that it is
already read.
yDownloading using the AT command
may not function depending on the
connected device.
Receiving messages
(Method 1)
When a device receives a message, a
message received noti¿cation is displayed.
The “Email Noti¿cations” (E-mail) or
“Text Noti¿cations” (SMS) setting must
be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-68.
and display the message.
Select
(Method 2)
1. Select the
icon on the home screen
to display the Communication screen.
and display the new
2. Select
message list for E-mail and SMS.
3. Select the message you would like to
display.
5–65
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
The following icons are displayed in the lower part of the details on the message. Icons
which can be used differ depending on use conditions.
Icon
Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Displays the inbox.
Plays back a message.
When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Displays the previous message.
Displays the next message.
Only replies to the sender of the currently displayed message.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
.
Select
(Only E-mail)
Replies to all members including CC.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
Select
.
Makes a call to a person who sent a message.
For E-mail, this function may not work depending on the device.
Deletes a message.
The messages stored in a device is also deleted.
NOTE
Up to three preset messages can be selected.
5–66
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Example of use (verify unread E-mail)
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
to display the inbox.
2. Select
NOTE
ySelect the
icon to change the
language.
ySelect the
icon to switch between
capitalized and lower-case characters.
ySelect the
icon to return to the
previous screen without storing the edit.
3. Select the unread message displayed in
bold.
4. The details of the message are
displayed and replying to the message,
making a call, or playback can be
performed.
Changing account for displaying
(E-mail only)
.
1. Select
2. Select the account which you would
like to display. Only the messages for
the selected account are displayed in
the inbox.
Editing preset messages
icon on the home screen
1. Select the
to display the Communication screen.
.
2. Select
.
3. Select
4. Select the preset message which you
would like to edit. The keyboard screen
is displayed.
is
5. When the message is input and
selected, the message is stored as a
preset message.
5–67
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Communication Settings
Select the
Select
icon on the home screen to display the Communication screen.
to change the setting.
Item
Bluetooth
®
Setting
—
Function
Go to Bluetooth® setting menu.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation on page 5-54.
Incoming Call
Noti¿cations
On/Off
Noti¿es when an incoming call is received.
Auto Download Text
Message
On/Off
Downloads SMS automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is connected
to the device.
Text Noti¿cations
On/Off
Noti¿es when a new SMS is received.
Auto Download
Email*1
On/Off
Downloads E-mail automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is connected
to the device.
Email Noti¿cations
On/Off
Noti¿es when a new Email is received.
Auto Download Call
History
On/Off
Downloads Call History automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is
connected to the device.
Auto Download
Contacts*1
On/Off
Downloads the phonebook automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is
connected to the device.
Ringtone
Car/Phone/Off
Changes the ringtone setting.
Phone Volume
Adjusts using
the slider.
Adjusts the conversation volume.
VR and Ringtone
Adjusts using
the slider.
Adjusts the voice guidance and ringtone volume.
Contacts Display
Order
First Name,
Last Name
Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the ¿rst name.
Last Name,
First Name
Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the last name.
Edit Preset Messages
—
Emergency Assistance
Call
On/Off
Restore Factory
settings
—
Edits the preset message.
Refer to Receiving and Replying to Messages (available only with
E-mail/SMS compatible phones) on page 5-64.
Mobile Utilizes the Mobile 911 function.
Initializes all Communication Settings.
*1 Depending on the device, it may be necessary to acquire download permission on the device side.
5–68
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Audio
AVRCP
Applicable Bluetooth® speci¿cation
(Recommended)
Ver. 1.1/1.2/2.0 EDR/2.1 EDR/3.0
(conformity)
Response pro¿le
y
A2DP
(Advanced Audio Distribution
Pro¿le) Ver. 1.0/1.2
y
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Pro¿le) Ver. 1.0/1.3/1.4
A2DP is a pro¿le which transmits only
audio to the Bluetooth® unit. If your
Bluetooth® audio device corresponds
only to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you
cannot operate it using the control panel
of the vehicle's audio system. In this
case, only the operations on the mobile
device are available the same as when a
portable audio device for a non-compliant
Bluetooth® device is connected to the
AUX terminal.
Function
A2DP
Ver.
1.0
Ver. 1.3
Ver. 1.4
—
—
—
Depends
on
device
Folder up/
down
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
yThe battery consumption of Bluetooth®
audio devices increases while
Bluetooth® is connected.
yIf a general mobile phone device is
USB connected during music playback
over the Bluetooth® connection, the
Bluetooth® connection is disconnected.
For this reason, you cannot have music
playback over a Bluetooth® connection
and music playback using a USB
connection at the same time.
yThe system may not operate normally
depending on the Bluetooth® audio
device.
AVRCP
Function
A2DP
Ver.
1.0
Ver. 1.3
Ver. 1.4
Playback
X
X
X
X
Pause
X
X
X
X
File (Track)
up/down
—
X
X
X
Reverse
—
—
X
X
Fast-forward
—
—
X
X
Text display
—
—
X
X
Repeat
—
—
Depends Depends
on
on
device
device
ShufÀe
—
—
Depends Depends
on
on
device
device
Scan
—
—
Depends Depends
on
on
device
device
5–69
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use the Bluetooth® Audio System
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode
To listen to music or voice audio recorded to a Bluetooth® audio device, switch to the
Bluetooth® audio mode to operate the audio device using the audio system control panel.
Any Bluetooth® audio device must be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit before it can be
used.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation on page 5-54.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn on the Bluetooth® audio device's power.
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen.
Select the
is selected, switches to the Bluetooth® audio mode to begin playback.
When
NOTE
yIf Bluetooth® audio is used after using Pandora®, Aha™ or Stitcher™ radio, the
application on the mobile device has to be closed ¿rst.
yIf the Bluetooth® audio device does not begin playback, select the
icon.
yIf the mode is switched from Bluetooth® audio mode to another mode (radio mode), audio
playback from the Bluetooth® audio device stops.
5–70
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Playback
To listen to a Bluetooth® audio device over the vehicle's speaker system, switch the mode to
Bluetooth® audio mode. (Refer to “Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode”)
After switching to the Bluetooth® audio mode, the following icons are displayed in the
lower part of the display. Icons which can be used differ depending on the version of the
Bluetooth® audio device which you are currently using.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.4 only)
Displays the top level folder/¿le list.
Select the folder which you want to select.
The ¿les in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the ¿le you want to play.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change when the song is repeated or the folder is repeated.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the device are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change during folder shufÀe or device shufÀe.
Scans the titles in a folder and plays the beginning of each song to aid in ¿nding a desired
song.
When selected again, the beginning of each song on the device is played.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
Returns to the beginning of the previous song.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Plays the Bluetooth® audio. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
5–71
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Audio Device
Information Display
If a Bluetooth® audio device is connected,
the following information is displayed in
the center display.
AVRCP
Ver. lower
than 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.4 or
higher
Device name
X
X
X
Remaining
battery
charge of
device
X
X
X
Song name
—
X
X
Artist name
—
X
X
Album name
—
X
X
Playback
time
—
X
X
Genre name
—
X
X
Album art
image
—
—
—
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
Some information may not display
depending on the device, and if the
information cannot be displayed,
“Unknown - - -” is indicated.
5–72
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Pandora®*
What is Pandora®?
Pandora®*1 is free personalized Internet radio. Simply enter a favorite artist, track, genre,
and Pandora® will create a personalized station that plays their music and more like it.
Rate songs by giving thumbs-up and thumbs-down feedback to further re¿ne your station,
discover new music and help Pandora® play only music you like.
*1 Pandora®, the Pandora® logo, and the Pandora® trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Pandora® from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
yCreate
Pandora® account on the Web.
Pandora® station using Pandora® application.
yInstall Pandora® application on your device.
yCreate
Playback
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen. When
Select the
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display.
Icon
is
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Thumbs-Down
Press the
icon to tell Pandora® not to play this track.
Thumbs-Up
Press the
icon to tell Pandora® “you like this track” and it helps to bring in more tracks
like it to your station.
Bookmarking
Bookmarks the song or artist currently being played.
Plays the track. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Goes to the next song.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5–73
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon
Function
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
NOTE
yThe skip function may not be available depending on the device.
yThe number of skips is limited by Pandora®.
yIf the
icon is selected when the skip song function is running, the next song is skipped.
Selection from station list
Selection can be made from a programmed
radio station list.
Bookmarking
You can bookmark song or artist to check
out later on the Web.
1. Select the
icon.
2. Select the desired radio station.
1. Select the
2. Select
song.
3. Select
artist.
NOTE
When
is selected, songs randomly
selected from the radio station list are
played.
icon.
to bookmark the
to bookmark the
Selecting the sort method
The displayed order of the station list can
be changed.
1. Select the
icon.
.
2. Select
to display in the order
3. Select
starting from the newly created station.
to display in alphabetical
4. Select
order.
NOTE
The displayed order of
changed.
cannot be
5–74
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Aha™
What is Aha™?
Aha*1 is an application which can be used to enjoy various Internet content such as Internet
radio and podcasts.
Stay connected to your friends activities by getting updates from Facebook and Twitter.
Using the location-based service, nearby services and destinations can be searched or realtime local information can be obtained.
For details on Aha, refer to “http://www.aharadio.com/”.
*1 Aha, the Aha logo, and the Aha trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Harman International Industries, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
yThe service content provided by Aha varies depending on the country in which the user
resides. In addition, the service is not available in some countries.
yTo operate Aha from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
yInstall
the Aha application to your device.
an Aha account for your device.
yLog onto Aha using your device.
ySelect the preset station on your device.
yCreate
5–75
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Playback
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen. When
is
Select the
selected, the following icons are displayed at the bottom of the center display. The displayed
icon differs depending on the selected station.
In addition, icons other than the following icons may be displayed.
Icon
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the main menu.
Use to switch to other stations.
Displays the content list.
Use to switch to other desired content on the station.
Shout
Records voice.
Records voice and posts it as playable audio to Facebook and other social stations.
Like*2
Evaluates the current content as “Like”.
Dislike*2
Evaluates the current content as “Dislike”.
Reverses for 15 seconds.
Map (vehicles with navigation system)
Displays the destination searched by the location based services on the navigation system.
Call
A call can be made to the telephone number of a shop searched using the Location Based
Services. Available when a device is connected as a Hands-Free.
Returns to the previous content.
Pauses playback of the content. When selected again, playback resumes.
Goes to the next content.
5–76
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon
Function
Fast-forwards for 30 seconds.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
*2 Some stations may use alternate variations of Like and Dislike, based on station type or provider.
Main menu
icon.
Select the
Switch the tab and select the station category.
Tab
Function
Presets
Displays the preset station list set on the device.
Select the preset station name to play the station content.
Nearby
Select the desired station.
Guidance is provided to the searched destination near the vehicle's position.
You can designate desired categories previously set using the ¿lter setting
on your device.
NOTE
The available Location Based Services may differ because the services depend on the
content provided by Aha™.
5–77
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Example of use (Location Based
Services)
1. Select the desired station from the
“Nearby” tab on the main menu.
The destination name or address
playback starts in the order of the
destination name list.
icon is selected, the
2. When the
currently displayed destination is
displayed on the navigation system
(vehicles with navigation system).
3. When the icon is selected, a phone
call is placed to the currently displayed
destination.
4. Select the
icon to display the
content list.
Selection of other destinations from the
list can be made.
Shout
Some social stations, such as Facebook or
Caraoke, support the ability to record and
share voice messages using the “Shout”
function.
1. Select the icon and start the
countdown (3, 2, 1, 0). Recording starts
when the countdown reaches zero.
2. Records voice.
and store/post the
3. Select
recording.
NOTE
yRecordable time varies depending on
the station (Max. 30 seconds).
yRecording stops automatically when the
recordable time has elapsed. You can
then post or delete the recording.
5–78
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Stitcher™ Radio
What is Stitcher™ Radio?
Stitcher™*1 radio is an application which can be used to listen to Internet radio or stream
podcasts.
Recommended content is automatically selected by registering content which you put into
your favorites, or by pressing the Like or Dislike button.
For details on Stitcher™ Radio, refer to “http://stitcher.com/”.
*1 Stitcher™, the Stitcher™ logo, and the Stitcher™ trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Stitcher, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Stitcher™ Radio from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
yInstall
the Stitcher™ Radio application to your device.
a Stitcher™ Radio account for your device.
yLog onto Stitcher™ Radio using your device.
yCreate
Playback
icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen. When
Select the
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display.
Icon
is
Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Dislike
Evaluates the current program as “Dislike”.
Like
Evaluates the current program as “Like”.
Adds the current station to your favorites or deletes the current station from your favorites.
Reverses for 30 seconds.
5–79
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon
Function
Plays the station. Select it again to pause playback.
Goes to the next station.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-26.
Station list
icon to display the station list.
1. Select the
Favorites station name: Select to display the program registered to your favorites.
Category name: A recommended category selected from your favorites by Stitcher™ is
displayed.
Select it to display the category program.
2. Select the program name to play it.
Add to your favorites
If the current program has not been
registered to your favorites, it can be
registered to your favorites.
1. Select the
icon to display the
favorites station which the registration
can be added.
2. Select the station name which you want
to register.
to add the program to the
3. Select
selected favorites station.
NOTE
yMultiple favorites stations can be
selected and registered.
yFavorites stations registered by
oneself as well those set by default are
displayed.
Delete from your favorites
If the current program has already been
registered to your favorites, the program
can be deleted from your favorites.
1. Select the
icon.
2. The program is automatically deleted
from the favorites station.
5–80
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Troubleshooting
Mazda Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer Service
If you have any problems with Bluetooth®, contact our toll-free customer service center.
y
U.S.A.
Phone:
800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
y
Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
y
Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Web:
Bluetooth® Device pairing, connection problems
Symptom
Unable to perform pairing
Pairing cannot be performed again
Unable to perform pairing
Cause
Solution method
—
First make sure the device is
compatible with the Bluetooth®
unit, and then check whether the
Bluetooth® function and the Find
Mode/Visible setting*1 on the device
are turned on. If pairing is still
not possible after this, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or Mazda
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer
Service.
The pairing information paired to
the Bluetooth® unit or device is not
recognized correctly.
Perform pairing using the following
procedure.
yClear “Mazda” stored in
yPerform pairing again.
the device.
The Bluetooth® function and the
Find Mode/Visible setting*1 on the
device may turn off automatically
after a period of time has elapsed
depending on the device.
Check whether the Bluetooth®
function and the Find Mode/Visible
setting*1 on the device are turned on
and pairing or reconnect.
Disconnects intermittently
The device is in a location in which
radio wave interference can occur
easily, such as inside a bag in a rear
seat, in a rear pocket of a pair of
pants.
Move the device to a location in
which radio wave interference is less
likely to occur.
Does not connect automatically
when starting the engine
The pairing information is updated
when the device OS is updated.
Perform pairing again.
Does not connect automatically
when starting the engine
Automatically connects, but then
disconnects suddenly
*1 Setting which detects the existence of a device external to the Bluetooth® unit
5–81
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
yWhen the OS of the device is updated, the pairing information may be deleted. If this
happens, reprogram the pairing information to the Bluetooth® unit.
yIf you pair your phone which has already been paired to your vehicle more than once in
the past, you need to delete “Mazda” on your mobile device. Then, execute the Bluetooth®
search on your mobile device once again, and pair to a newly detected “Mazda”.
yBefore you pair your device, make sure that Bluetooth® is “ON”, both on your phone and
on the vehicle.
yIf Bluetooth®-enabled devices are used in the following locations or conditions,
connection via Bluetooth® may not be possible.
yThe
device is in a location hidden from the center display such as behind or under a
seat, or inside the glove compartment.
yThe device contacts or is covered by a metal object or body.
yThe device is set to power-saving mode.
yDifferent
Bluetooth®-enabled devices can be used for Bluetooth® Hands-Free and
Bluetooth® audio. For example, device A can be connected as a Bluetooth® HandsFree device and device B can be connected as a Bluetooth® audio device. However, the
following may occur when they are used at the same time.
yThe
Bluetooth® connection of the device is disconnected.
occurs in the Hands-Free audio.
yHands-Free operates slowly.
yNoise
Voice recognition related problems
Symptom
Cause
yExcessive,
yExcessive,
Poor voice recognition
False recognition of numbers
slow speech.
forceful speech
(shouting).
before the beep sound
has ended.
yLoud noise (speaking or noise from
outside/inside vehicle).
yAirÀow from A/C is blowing
against the microphone.
ySpeaking in off-standard
expressions (dialect).
ySpeaking
Solution method
Regarding the causes indicated
on the left, be careful with how
you speak. In addition, when
numbers are spoken in a sequence,
recognition ability will improve
if no stop is placed between the
numbers.
Poor voice recognition
There is a malfunction in the
microphone.
A poor connection or malfunction
with the microphone may have
occurred. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Phone-related voice recognition is
disabled
There is a problem with the
connection between the Bluetooth®
unit and the device.
If there is any malfunction after
checking the pairing situation, check
for device pairing or connection
problems.
5–82
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Symptom
Cause
Solution method
By carrying out the following
measures, the rate of recognition
will improve.
Names in the phonebook are not
easily recognized
The Bluetooth® system is under a
condition in which recognition is
dif¿cult.
When operating the audio, a song
name is not recognized
Song names cannot be recognized
by voice.
You want to skip guidance
yClear
memory from the phonebook
which is not used very often.
yAvoid shortened names, use full
names. (Recognition improves the
longer the name is. By not using
names such as “Mom”, “Dad”,
recognition will improve.)
—
—
Guidance can be skipped by quickly
pressing and releasing the Talk
button.
Cause
Solution method
Regarding problems with calls
Symptom
When starting a call, vehicle noise
from the other party can be heard
For about three seconds after
starting a call, the Bluetooth®
unit's Noise Suppression function
requires time to adapt to the call
environment.
This does not indicate a problem
with the device.
The other party cannot be heard or
the speaker's voice is quiet
The volume is set at zero or low.
Increase the volume.
Other problems
Cause
Solution method
The indication for the remaining
battery is different between the
vehicle and the device
Symptom
The indication method is different
between the vehicle and the device.
—
When a call is made from the
vehicle, the telephone number is
updated in the incoming/outgoing
call record but the name does not
appear
The number has not been registered
into the phonebook.
If the number has been registered
into the phonebook, the incoming/
outgoing call record is updated by
the name in the phonebook when the
engine is restarted.
The cell phone does not synchronize
Some types of cell phones do not
with the vehicle regarding the
synchronize automatically.
incoming/outgoing call record
It takes a long time to complete the
function for changing the language
A maximum of 60 seconds is
required.
Operate the cell phone for
synchronization.
—
5–83
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Sunvisors
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for use
in front or swing it to the side.
Sunvisor
Vanity Mirrors
To use the vanity mirror, lower the
sunvisor.
If your vehicle is equipped with a vanity
mirror light, it will illuminate when you
open the cover.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, the vanity mirror will only
illuminate in the tilt range shown in the
¿gure.
off
off
Side Extension Sunvisors*
The visor extender extends the sunvisor's
range of sun shading.
To use, pull it out.
on
CAUTION
When moving the sunvisor, retract the
visor extender to its original position.
Otherwise, the visor extender could hit
the rearview mirror.
5–84
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Interior Lights
NOTE
Do not leave the lights on for long periods
while the engine is turned off. Otherwise
the battery power could be depleted.
Front Map Lights
When the overhead light switch is in the
door or off position, press the lens to
illuminate the front map lights, and then
press the lens again to turn them off.
Overhead Lights
Switch
Position
Overhead Lights
Light off
yLight
yLight
is on when any door is open
is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is on
Light on
NOTE
The front map lights will not turn off
even if the lens is pressed in the following
cases:
yThe
overhead light switch is in the ON
position.
yThe overhead light switch is in the door
position with the door open.
yThe illuminated entry system is on.
NOTE
The rear map lights also turn on and
off when the overhead light switch is
operated.
5–85
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Rear Map Lights
When the overhead light switch is in the
door or off position, press the lens to
illuminate a rear map light, and then press
the lens again to turn it off.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the trunk open
for a long period when the engine is not
running.
Courtesy Lights
Turns on when any door is open or the
illuminated entry system is on.
NOTE
yOnce the rear map lights have been
turned off, they will turn on and off
depending on the position to which the
overhead light is switched.
yThe rear map lights will not turn
off even if the lens is pressed in the
following cases:
yThe
overhead light switch is ON.
overhead light switch is in the
door position with the door open.
yThe illuminated entry system is on.
Courtesy light
yThe
Trunk Light
The trunk light is on when the lid is open
and off when it's closed.
5–86
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Ambient Light*
An ambient light continuously turn on
when the ignition is switched ON.
An ambient light dim when the parking
lights or headlights are turned on.
Illuminated Entry System
When the illuminated entry system
operates, the overhead lights, the courtesy
lights, and an ambient light* turn on in the
following conditions:
y
The
driver's door is unlocked after the
ignition is switched OFF.
y
The ignition is switched OFF with all
doors closed.
Ambient light
NOTE
yAn ambient light turn on or off in
conjunction with the illuminated entry
system when the ignition is switched
OFF.
yThe ambient light illumination level can
be changed while the parking lights or
headlights are turned on.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
NOTE
y(Overhead lights)
The illuminated entry system operates
when the overhead light switch is in the
DOOR position.
yThe illumination time differs depending
on the operation.
yBattery saver
If an interior light is left on with the
ignition switched OFF, the light is
turned off automatically after about 30
minutes to prevent battery depletion.
yThe operation of the illuminated entry
system can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
5–87
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Accessory Sockets
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or
the equivalent requiring no greater than
120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
Front
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON.
CAUTION
¾To prevent accessory socket damage or
electrical failure, pay attention to the
following:
¾Do not use accessories that require
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
¾Do not use accessories that are not
genuine Mazda accessories or the
equivalent.
¾Close the cover when the accessory
socket is not in use to prevent foreign
objects and liquids from getting into
the accessory socket.
¾Correctly insert the plug into the
accessory socket.
¾Do not insert the cigarette lighter into
the accessory socket.
¾Noise may occur on the audio playback
Center
The accessory sockets can be used
regardless of whether the ignition is on or
off.
depending on the device connected to
the accessory socket.
¾Depending on the device connected
to the accessory socket, the vehicle's
electrical system may be affected,
which could cause the warning light to
illuminate. Disconnect the connected
device and make sure that the problem
is resolved. If the problem is resolved,
disconnect the device from the socket
and switch the ignition off. If the
problem is not resolved, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
To prevent discharging of the battery, do
not use the socket for long periods with the
engine off or idling.
5–88
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Connecting the accessory socket
1. Open the lid.
2. Pass the connection plug cord through
the cutout of the console and insert the
plug into the accessory socket.
Plug
Cup Holder
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
Do not put anything other than cups or
drink cans in cup holders:
Putting objects other than cups
or drink cans in a cup holder is
dangerous.
During sudden braking or
maneuvering, occupants could be
hit and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink cans.
5–89
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Front
To use the cup holder, slide the cover and
open it.
Bottle Holder
Bottle holders are on the inside of the
doors.
Bottle holder
Rear
The rear cup holder is on the rear center
armrest.
CAUTION
Do not use the bottle holders for
containers without caps. The contents
may spill when the door is opened or
closed.
5–90
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Storage Compartments
WARNING
Keep storage boxes closed when
driving:
Driving with the storage boxes open is
dangerous. To reduce the possibility of
injury in an accident or a sudden stop,
keep the storage boxes closed when
driving.
Do not put articles in storage spaces
with no lid:
Putting articles in storage spaces with
no lid is dangerous as they could be
thrown around the cabin if the vehicle
is suddenly accelerated and cause
injury depending on how the article is
stored.
Overhead Console
This console box is designed to store
eyeglasses or other accessories.
Push and release to open.
Storage Pocket
To use, open the lid.
CAUTION
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses
in the storage boxes while parked
under the sun. A lighter could explode
or the plastic material in eyeglasses
could deform and crack from high
temperature.
5–91
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the
latch toward you.
Rear Coat Hooks
WARNING
Never hang heavy or sharp objects on
the assist grips and coat hooks:
Hanging heavy or sharp-ended objects
such as a coat hanger from the assist
grips or coat hooks is dangerous as
they can fly off and hit an occupant
in the cabin if a curtain air bag was to
deploy, which could result in serious
injury or death.
To close the glove compartment,
¿rmly press in the center of the glove
compartment lid.
Always hang clothes on the coat hooks
and the assist grips without hangers.
Center Console
To open, pull the lower release handle.
Coat hook
5–92
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
6
Maintenance and Care
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Essential Information ........................................................................ 6-2
Introduction ................................................................................... 6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................................................... 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico) ........ 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) .............................................. 6-11
Maintenance Monitor .................................................................. 6-18
Owner Maintenance......................................................................... 6-20
Owner Maintenance Precautions ................................................ 6-20
Hood ............................................................................................ 6-23
Engine Compartment Overview ................................................. 6-25
Engine Oil ................................................................................... 6-26
Engine Coolant............................................................................ 6-29
Brake/Clutch Fluid ...................................................................... 6-31
Washer Fluid ............................................................................... 6-31
Body Lubrication ........................................................................ 6-32
Wiper Blades ............................................................................... 6-33
Battery ......................................................................................... 6-35
Key Battery Replacement ........................................................... 6-38
Tires............................................................................................. 6-40
Light Bulbs.................................................................................. 6-45
Fuses ........................................................................................... 6-57
Appearance Care.............................................................................. 6-64
Exterior Care ............................................................................... 6-64
Interior Care ................................................................................ 6-70
6–1
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
Introduction
Be careful not to hurt yourself when inspecting your vehicle, replacing a tire, or doing some
kind of maintenance such as car washing.
In particular, wear thick work gloves such as cotton gloves when touching areas that
are dif¿cult to see while inspecting or working on your vehicle. Doing inspections or
procedures with your bare hands could cause injury.
If you are unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and quali¿ed service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insuf¿cient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
To continue warranty eligibility and to protect your investment, it is your responsibility to
properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended schedules outlined in this
manual. As part of this you must keep your maintenance records, receipts, repair orders and
any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed. You must present these
documents, should any warranty coverage disagreement occur. Failure to do so can result in
your warranty being voided either in whole or in part.
This evidence may consist of the following:
y
The
Mazda Scheduled Maintenance Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet, must be
completely ¿lled out showing mileage, repair order number, date for each service, and
signed by a quali¿ed automotive service technician who service vehicles.
y
Original copies of repair orders or other receipts that include the mileage and date the
vehicle was serviced. Each receipt should be signed by a quali¿ed automotive service
technician.
y
For self maintenance, a statement that you completed the maintenance yourself,
displaying mileage and the date the work was performed. Also, receipts for the
replacement parts (Àuid, ¿lters, etc.) indicating the date and mileage must accompany this
statement.
6–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
NOTE
If you elect to perform maintenance yourself or have your vehicle serviced at a location
other than an Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda requires that all Àuids, parts and materials
must meet Mazda standards for durability and performance as described in this manual.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.
Selecting “Maintenance Monitor” enables the system to notify you of your vehicle's
approaching inspection/servicing period (page 6-18).
The malfunction diagnosis connector is designed exclusively for connecting the specially
designed device to perform on-board diagnosis.
Do not connect any devices other than the specially designed malfunction diagnosis devices
for servicing. If any device other than the malfunction diagnosis device is connected, it may
affect the vehicle's electrical devices or lead to damage such as battery depletion.
Malfunction
diagnosis
connector
6–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
(severe driving conditions) apply.
y
Repeated
short-distance driving
in dusty conditions
y
Driving with extended use of brakes
y
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
y
Driving on rough or muddy roads
y
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
y
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
y
Driving in extremely hot conditions
y
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
y
Driving
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2. (Puerto Rico and Canada residents follow Schedule 2.)
Engine oil Àexible maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose
vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply.
y
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving
school car
y
Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 with engine oil ¿xed maintenance.
The onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on engine
operating conditions when selecting Àexible maintenance. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 Oil and
Castrol® 0W-20 Oil are required to achieve optimum calculation performance.
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the
recommended intervals.
6–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 1
U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents - Engine oil Àexible maintenance interval
Use when the maintenance monitor for “Oil Change” is set to “Flexible”. For details,
see maintenance monitor. (page 6-18)
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes ¿rst.
Maintenance Interval
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
×1000 km
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
×1000 miles
7.5
15
22.5
30
37.5
45
52.5
60
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & ¿lter
*1
I
Replace when wrench indicator light is ON. (Max interval: 12
months or 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*2
Replace at ¿rst 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
FUEL SYSTEM
Air ¿lter
Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval: 36 months or 60,000 km (37,500 miles))
Fuel lines and hoses*3
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission*3
I
I
I
I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)*4
Rotate when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval: 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
Emergency Àat tire repair kit (if installed)*5
Inspect annually.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air ¿lter
Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval: 24 months or 48,000 km (30,000 miles))
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, ¿ll up, or replace if necessary.
T: Tighten
6–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Remarks:
*1 The engine oil and ¿lter must be changed at least once a year or within 12,000 km (7,500 miles) since last
engine oil and ¿lter change. The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
*2 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*3 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*4 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*5 Check the tire repair Àuid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair Àuid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
6–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 2
U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents - Severe driving conditions maintenance interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes ¿rst.
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
×1000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
×1000 miles
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & ¿lter
I
Flexible*1
Replace when wrench indicator light is ON. (Max interval: 12
months or 12,000 km (7,500 miles))
Fixed
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*2
Replace at ¿rst 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval: 36 months or 60,000 km (37,500 miles))
Air ¿lter*3
Fuel lines and hoses*4
I
I
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission
*4
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch Àuid level
I
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rotate when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval: 8,000 km (5,000 miles))
Tire (Rotation)
*5
Tire inÀation pressure and tire wear*5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer Àuid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6–7
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes ¿rst.
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
×1000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
×1000 miles
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Inspect annually.
Emergency Àat tire repair kit (if installed)*6
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air ¿lter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, ¿ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Engine oil Àexible maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose vehicle is operated
mainly where none of the following conditions apply.
y
y
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving school car
Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow ¿xed maintenance.
The engine oil and ¿lter must be changed at least once a year or within 12,000 km (7,500 miles) since last
engine oil and ¿lter change. Reset the engine oil data whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, clean and if necessary, replace the air ¿lter more often
than the recommended intervals.
According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
Check the tire repair Àuid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair Àuid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
6–8
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Canada residents
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes ¿rst.
Months
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
×1000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
×1000 miles
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Maintenance Interval
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
R
Engine oil & ¿lter
*1
R
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Replace at ¿rst 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after that,
every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Engine coolant*2
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air ¿lter
Replace every 56,000 km (35,000 miles) or 3 years.
Fuel lines and hoses*3
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission
I
I
*3
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch Àuid level
I
Disc brakes
I
I
Inspect every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 1 years.
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Tire (Rotation)
*4
Tire inÀation pressure and tire wear*4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and
wheel bearing axial play
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
T
T
T
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer Àuid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Emergency Àat tire repair kit (if installed)*5
Inspect annually.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air ¿lter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
6–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, ¿ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Reset the engine oil data whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the message/wrench indicator light
display.
*2 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*3 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*4 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*5 Check the tire repair Àuid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair Àuid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
6–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
apply.
y
Repeated
short-distance driving
in dusty conditions
y
Driving with extended use of brakes
y
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
y
Driving on rough or muddy roads
y
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
y
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
y
Driving in extremely hot conditions
y
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
y
Driving
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the
recommended intervals.
6–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 1
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes ¿rst
Maintenance Interval
Months
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
×1000 km
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120
66
72
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & ¿lter
I
I
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
Engine coolant
*1
I
I
I
Replace at ¿rst 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every 100,000
km or 5 years
FUEL SYSTEM
Air ¿lter
R
R
R
R
R
R
Fuel lines and hoses
I
I
I
Hoses and tubes for emission
I*2
I*2
I
*2
Fuel ¿lter
*2
Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Replace every 120,000 km
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch Àuid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake Àuid
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
R
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire (Rotation)*3
Tire inÀation pressure and tire wear*3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and
wheel bearing axial play
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
I
I
I
I
I
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer Àuid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect annually.
Emergency Àat tire repair kit (if installed)*4
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air ¿lter
R
R
R
6–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, ¿ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 Check the tire repair Àuid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair Àuid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
6–13
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 2
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes ¿rst
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
×1000 km
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & ¿lter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
Engine coolant
Replace at ¿rst 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every 100,000
km or 5 years
Engine coolant level
I
*1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air ¿lter
C
R
C
R
Fuel lines and hoses
I
Hoses and tubes for emission
I*2
C
R
I
I
*2
Fuel ¿lter
Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
I
Spark plugs
I
I
I
Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch Àuid level
I
I
I
I
I
Brake Àuid
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire (Rotation)*3
Tire inÀation pressure and tire wear*3
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and
wheel bearing axial play
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
I
I
All locks and hinges
L
L
L
L
L
L
Washer Àuid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
Emergency Àat tire repair kit (if installed)*4
Inspect annually.
6–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes ¿rst
Maintenance Interval
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
×1000 km
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air ¿lter
R
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, ¿ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 Check the tire repair Àuid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair Àuid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
6–15
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
(Cont.)
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes ¿rst
Maintenance Interval
Months
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
×1000 km
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100 105 110 115 120
63
66
69
72
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
ENGINE
Drive belts
I
Engine oil & ¿lter
I
R
R
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
I
I
Engine coolant*1
Replace at ¿rst 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every 100,000
km or 5 years
Engine coolant level
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air ¿lter
C
R
C
Fuel lines and hoses
I*2
Hoses and tubes for emission
I
R
C
R
I
I
*2
Fuel ¿lter
Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
I
Spark plugs
I
I
I
I
I
Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I
Brake and clutch Àuid level
I
Brake Àuid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
Disc brakes
I
I
R
Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire (Rotation)*3
Tire inÀation pressure and tire wear*3
I
I
I
I
I
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and
wheel bearing axial play
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
T
T
T
Exhaust system and heat shields
I
All locks and hinges
Washer Àuid level
Emergency Àat tire repair kit (if installed)
*4
I
I
L
L
L
L
L
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect annually.
6–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes ¿rst
Maintenance Interval
Months
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
63
66
69
72
×1000 km
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100 105 110 115 120
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air ¿lter
R
R
R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, ¿ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 Check the tire repair Àuid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair Àuid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
6–17
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Monitor
Maintenance Monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the
icon on the home screen to display the “Applications” screen.
Select “Vehicle Status Monitor” to display the current warnings.
Select “Maintenance” to display the maintenance list screen.
Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab
Item
Setting
Time (months)
Scheduled
Distance (mile or km)
Reset
Tire Rotation
Explanation
Noti¿cation can be switched on/off.
Displays the time or distance until maintenance is due.
Select this item to set the maintenance period.
The wrench indication/indicator light in the instrument cluster will
be illuminated when the remaining distance is less than 1,000 km or
600 mile, or the remaining number of days is less than 15 (whichever
comes ¿rst).
Resets the time and distance to the initial values.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever carrying out
maintenance.
Setting
Noti¿cation can be switched on/off.
Distance (mile or km)
Displays the distance until tire rotation is due.
Select this item to set the tire rotation distance.
The wrench indication/indicator light in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated when the remaining distance is less than 1,000 km or
600 mile.
Reset
Resets the remaining distance to the initial value.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating the
tires.
6–18
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Tab
Item
Explanation
Setting Interval
Oil replacement period can be selected from the Àexible setting or
¿xed setting, or it can be set to non-display.
The Àexible setting is available only in the United States and Puerto
Rico. Once engine oil Àexible maintenance is selected, the vehicle
calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating
conditions. The vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by
illuminating the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster.
Distance (mile or km)
(Displays only in ¿xed
setting)
Displays the distance until the oil replacement is due.
Select this item to set the oil replacement distance.
The wrench indication/indicator light in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated when the remaining distance is less than 1,000 km or
600 mile.
Oil life (%)
(Displays only in
Àexible setting)
Displays the engine oil life until the oil replacement is due.
The wrench indication/indicator light in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated when the remaining oil life distance is less than 1,000 km
(600 mile), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes ¿rst).
Oil Change
Reset
In Àexible setting
Resets the remaining distance until oil replacement is due to the initial
value.
In ¿xed setting
Resets the remaining distance until oil replacement is due to the initial
value.
6–19
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Precautions
The owner or a quali¿ed service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or quali¿ed service
technician as soon as possible.
When Refueling
y
Brake and clutch Àuid level (page 6-31)
y
Engine coolant level (page 6-29)
y
Engine oil level (page 6-29)
y
Washer Àuid level (page 6-31)
At Least Monthly
y
Tire inÀation pressures (page 6-41)
6–20
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
At Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical ability
and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.
y
Engine
y
Engine
coolant (page 6-29)
oil (page 6-26)
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only
for items that are easy to perform.
As explained in the Introduction (page 6-2), several procedures can be done only by a
quali¿ed service technician with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If you
are unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and Àuids. Please
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.
We recommend that you entrust the oil and Àuid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
6–21
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
WARNING
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience
or the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a
qualified technician:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You can be
seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Pull over to a safe location, then switch the ignition off and make sure the fan is not
running before attempting to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could continue
running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine compartment
temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:
After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do not
forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a fire
leading to an unexpected accident.
6–22
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is closed
and securely locked:
A hood that is not closed and securely
locked is dangerous as it could fly open
while the vehicle is moving and block
the driver's vision which could result in
a serious accident.
Opening the Hood
NOTE
The lever is located a little to the left of
center when facing the vehicle.
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded
area and secure it in the support rod
hole indicated by the arrow to hold the
hood open.
Pad
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the hood.
Clip
Clip
Support rod
Release handle
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening,
slide the latch lever to the right, and lift
up the hood.
Lever
6–23
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Closing the Hood
1. Check under the hood area to make
certain all ¿ller caps are in place and all
loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers,
etc.) have been removed.
2. Lift the hood, grasp the padded area on
the support rod, and secure the support
rod in the clip. Verify that the support
rod is secured in the clip before closing
the hood.
Clip
Clip
Clip
3. Lower the hood slowly to a height of
about 20 cm (7.9 in) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
CAUTION
When closing the hood, do not push
it excessively such as by applying your
weight. Otherwise, the hood could be
deformed.
6–24
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Compartment Overview
Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Cooling system cap
Battery
Fuse block
Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil-filler cap
6–25
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Oil
NOTE
Changing the engine oil should be
performed by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for
owner's responsibility in protecting your
investment.
Recommended Oil
U.S.A. and CANADA
Use SAE 0W-20 engine oil.
Mazda Genuine Oil is used in your
Mazda vehicle. Mazda Genuine 0W-20
Oil is required to achieve optimum fuel
economy.
Only use SAE 0W-20 oil “Certi¿ed For
Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricant
Standardization and Approval Committee
(ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
–40 –30 –20 –10
–40 –20
0
20
0
10
40
20
60
30
40
80 100
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (U.S.A. only).
(ILSAC)
6–26
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Except U.S.A. and CANADA
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
Oil container labels provide important
information.
A chief contribution this type of oil makes
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of
fuel necessary to overcome engine friction.
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (Mexico only).
(Mexico)
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil. If SAE 5W-30
engine oil is not available, use SAE 5W-20
engine oil.
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC
must be on the label.
–40 –30 –20 –10
–40 –20
0
20
0
10
40
20
60
30
40
80 100
(ILSAC)
6–27
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Vehicle Engine Control Unit Reset Procedure
After replacing the engine oil, it is recommended to have a repair shop such as an
Authorized Mazda Dealer perform the initialization (engine oil data resetting) of the
recorded value. If the value recorded by the computer is not initialized, the wrench indicator
light may not turn off or it may turn on earlier than normal.
Refer to Maintenance Monitor on page 6-18.
6–28
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspecting Engine Oil Level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
surface.
2. Warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
Engine Coolant
Inspecting Coolant Level
WARNING
Do not use a match or live flame in the
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become very
hot. You could be burned. Carefully
inspect the engine coolant in the
coolant reservoir, but do not open it.
MAX
OK
MIN
5. Pull it out again and examine the level.
The level is normal if it is between the
MIN and MAX marks.
If it is near or below MIN, add enough
oil to bring the level to MAX.
CAUTION
Pull over to a safe location, then
switch the ignition off and make sure
the fan is not running before attempting
to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if
the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You
could be hit by the fan and seriously
injured.
Do not overfill the engine oil. This may
cause engine damage.
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is
positioned properly before reinserting
the dipstick.
7. Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Do not remove either cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are hot,
scalding coolant and steam may shoot
out under pressure and cause serious
injury.
6–29
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Changing the coolant should be done by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Inspect the antifreeze protection and
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year—at the beginning of the
winter season—and before traveling where
temperatures may drop below freezing.
Inspect the condition and connections of
all cooling system and heater hoses.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the F and L marks
on the coolant reservoir when the engine
is cool.
CAUTION
¾Radiator coolant will damage paint.
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.
¾Use only soft (demineralized) water in
the coolant mixture. Water that contains
minerals will cut down on the coolant's
effectiveness.
¾Do not add only water. Always add a
proper coolant mixture.
¾The engine has aluminum parts and
must be protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion and
freezing.
¾DO NOT USE coolants Containing
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or Silicate.
These coolants could damage the
cooling system.
¾DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol with
the coolant. This could damage the
cooling system.
¾Do not use a solution that contains more
than 60% antifreeze.
This would reduce effectiveness.
¾If the “FL22” mark is shown on or near
the cooling system cap, use of FL-22 is
recommended when replacing engine
coolant. Using engine coolant other
than FL-22 may cause serious damage to
the engine and cooling system.
If it is at or near L, add enough coolant to
the coolant reservoir to provide freezing
and corrosion protection and to bring the
level to F.
Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tank
cap after adding coolant.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new
coolant is required frequently, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6–30
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid
Level
WARNING
If the brake/clutch fluid level is low, have
the brakes inspected:
A low brake/clutch fluid level is
dangerous.
A low level could indicate brake lining
wear or a brake system leak which
could cause the brakes to fail and lead
to an accident.
The brakes and clutch draw Àuid from the
same reservoir.
Inspect the Àuid level in the reservoir
regularly. It should be kept between the
MAX and MIN lines.
The level normally drops with
accumulated distance, a condition
associated with wear of brake and clutch
linings. If it is excessively low, have
the brake/clutch system inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Washer Fluid
Inspecting Washer Fluid Level
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the windshield,
affect your visibility, and could result in
an accident.
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze
Protection in Cold Weather:
Operating your vehicle in temperatures
below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F)
using washer fluid without anti-freeze
protection is dangerous as it could
cause impaired windshield vision and
result in an accident. In cold weather,
always use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
NOTE
State or local regulations may restrict the
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
which are commonly used as anti-freeze
agents in washer Àuid. A washer Àuid with
limited VOC content should be used only
if it provides adequate freeze resistance
for all regions and climates in which the
vehicle will be operated.
6–31
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect Àuid level in the washer Àuid
reservoir; add Àuid if necessary.
Body Lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door and hood hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
locks during cold weather.
Make sure the hood's secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
L
Use plain water if washer Àuid is
unavailable.
But use only washer Àuid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.
6–32
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Wiper Blades
CAUTION
¾Hot waxes applied by automatic car
washers have been known to affect the
wiper's ability to clean windows.
¾To prevent damage to the wiper blades,
do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or near
them.
¾When the wiper lever is in the AUTO
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched.
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is wiped with a cloth.
¾If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object.
¾If the rain sensor is struck with a hand
or other object from inside the vehicle.
Be careful not to pinch hands or fingers
as it may cause injury, or damage the
wipers. When washing or servicing the
vehicle, make sure the wiper lever is in
the OFF position.
Replacing Windshield Wiper
Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, do not try to
sweep the wiper arm by hand.
NOTE
When raising both windshield wiper arms,
raise the driver's side wiper arm ¿rst.
When lowering the wiper arms, slowly
lower the wiper arm from the passenger's
side ¿rst while supporting it with your
hand. Forcefully lowering the wiper arms
could damage the wiper arm and blade,
and may scratch or crack the windshield.
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Open the clip and slide the blade
assembly in the direction of the arrow.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the blades with foreign matter can reduce
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes.
If the blades are not wiping properly,
clean the window and blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if
necessary.
6–33
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove it
from the arm.
CAUTION
¾Do not bend or discard the stiffeners. You
need to use them again.
¾If the metal stiffeners are switched,
the blade's wiping efficiency could be
reduced.
So do not use the driver's side metal
stiffeners on the passenger's side, or vice
versa.
¾Be sure to reinstall the metal stiffeners in
the new blade rubber so that the curve
is the same as it was in the old blade
rubber.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the windshield
let the wiper arm down easily, do not
let it slap down on the windshield.
6. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of blade holder.
5. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
6–34
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery
WARNING
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting
to ensure safe and correct handling:
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in eyes,
or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause serious
injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal
tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when working
near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle body:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.
6–35
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
NOTE
Before performing battery maintenance, remove the battery cover.
6–36
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery Maintenance
Inspect the electrolyte level at least once
a week. If it is low, remove the caps and
add enough distilled water to bring the
level between the upper and lower level
(illustration).
Do not over¿ll.
Examine the speci¿c gravity of the
electrolyte with a hydrometer, especially
during cold weather. If it is low, recharge
the battery.
Battery Recharging
To get the best service from a battery:
y
Keep
it securely mounted.
the top clean and dry.
y
Keep terminals and connections clean,
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or
terminal grease.
y
Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately
with a solution of water and baking
soda.
y
If the vehicle will not be used for an
extended time, disconnect the battery
cables and charge the battery every six
weeks.
y
Keep
Inspecting Electrolyte Level
A low level of electrolyte Àuid will cause
the battery to discharge quickly.
NOTE
yBefore performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
yTo disconnect the battery, remove the
negative cable ¿rst. Install it last when
connecting the battery.
yBe sure to remove the caps before
recharging the battery.
y
If
the battery quickly discharges
because, for example, the lights were
left on too long with the engine off,
slow-charge it as required by battery
size and charger capacity.
y
If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it as
required by battery size and charger
capacity.
Battery Replacement
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for a
battery replacement purchase.
Upper level
Lower level
6–37
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Key Battery Replacement
If the buttons on the transmitter are
inoperable and the operation indicator
light does not Àash, the battery may be
dead.
Replace with a new battery before the
transmitter becomes unusable.
CAUTION
¾Make sure the battery is installed
correctly. Battery leakage could occur if it
is not installed correctly.
¾When replacing the battery, be careful
not to touch any of the internal circuitry
and electrical terminals, bend the
electrical terminals, or get dirt in the
transmitter as the transmitter could be
damaged.
¾There is the danger of explosion if the
battery is not correctly replaced.
¾Dispose of used batteries according to
the following instructions.
¾Insulate the plus and minus terminals
The following conditions indicate that the
battery power is low:
y
The
KEY indicator light (green) Àashes
in the instrument cluster for about 30
seconds after the engine is turned off
(for vehicles with a type A instrument
cluster (page 4-32), messages are
displayed in the instrument cluster).
y
The system does not operate and
the operation indicator light on the
transmitter does not Àash when the
buttons are pressed.
y
The system's operational range is
reduced.
Replacing the battery at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent
damage to the key. If replacing the battery
by yourself, follow the instruction.
Replacing the key battery
1. Press the knob and pull out the
auxiliary key.
Knob
of the battery using cellophane or
equivalent tape.
¾Never disassemble.
¾Never throw the battery into fire or
water.
¾Never deform or crush.
¾Replace only with the same type battery
(CR2025 or equivalent).
6–38
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
2. Twist a tape-wrapped Àathead
screwdriver in the direction of the
arrow and open the cover slightly.
5. Remove the battery cap, then remove
the battery.
Cover
3. Insert the tape-wrapped Àathead
screwdriver into the gap and slide it in
the direction of the arrow.
Cover
6. Insert a new battery with the positive
pole facing up, and then cover the
battery with the battery cap.
Gap
4. Twist the Àathead screwdriver in the
direction of the arrow and remove the
cover.
7. Close the cover.
Cover
8. Reinsert the auxiliary key.
6–39
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
¾Be careful not to allow the rubber ring
shown in the figure to be scratched or
damaged.
¾If the rubber ring detaches, reattach it
before inserting a new battery.
Rubber ring
Tires
For reasons of proper performance, safety,
and better fuel economy, always maintain
recommended tire inÀation pressures and
stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
WARNING
Using Different Tire Types:
Driving your vehicle with different
types of tires is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor braking;
leading to loss of control.
Except for the limited use of the
temporary spare tire, use only the
same type tires (radial, bias-belted,
bias-type) on all four wheels.
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
Using any other tire size than what is
specified for the vehicle (page 9-8)
is dangerous. It could seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance,
tire clearance, and speedometer
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tires that
are the correct size specified for the
vehicle.
6–40
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Tire InÀation Pressure
WARNING
Always inflate the tires to the correct
pressure:
Overinflation or underinflation of tires
is dangerous. Adverse handling or
unexpected tire failure could result in a
serious accident.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
Use only a Mazda-genuine tire valve
cap:
Use of a non-genuine part is
dangerous as the correct tire air
pressure cannot be maintained if the
tire valve becomes damaged. If the
vehicle is driven under this condition,
the tire air pressure will decrease which
could result in a serious accident. Do
not use any part for the tire valve cap
that is not a Mazda-genuine part.
Inspect all tire pressures monthly
(including the spare) when the tires are
cold. Maintain recommended pressures for
the best ride, handling, and minimum tire
wear.
Refer to the speci¿cation charts (page
9-8).
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-162.
NOTE
yAlways check tire pressure when tires
are cold.
yWarm tires normally exceed
recommended pressures. Do not release
air from warm tires to adjust the
pressure.
yUnderinÀation can cause reduced fuel
economy, uneven and accelerated tire
wear, and poor sealing of the tire bead,
which will deform the wheel and cause
separation of tire from rim.
yOverinÀation can produce a harsh ride,
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a
greater possibility of damage from road
hazards.
Keep your tire pressure at the correct
levels. If one frequently needs inÀating,
have it inspected.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
Rotate tires periodically:
Irregular tire wear is dangerous. To
equalize tread wear for maintaining
good performance in handling and
braking, rotate the tires every 12,000
km (7,500 miles). However Mazda
recommends to rotate every 8,000 km
(5,000 miles) to help increase tire life
and distribute wear more evenly.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
6–41
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
During rotation, inspect them for correct
balance.
Replacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good
condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
Forward
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:
y
Incorrect
tire pressure
y
Improper wheel alignment
y
Out-of-balance wheel
y
Severe braking
After rotation, inÀate all tire pressures to
speci¿cation (page 9-8) and inspect the
lug nuts for tightness.
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-162.
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial
tires that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to rear,
not from side to side. Tire performance
will be reduced if rotated from side to
side.
Replace all four tires at the same time:
Replacing just one tire is dangerous. It
could cause poor handling and poor
braking resulting in loss of vehicle
control. Mazda strongly recommends
that you replace all four tires at the
same time.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will
appear as a solid band across the tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
Tread wear indicator
New tread
Worn tread
You should replace the tire before the band
crosses the entire tread.
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-162.
6–42
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used on the road. It
is recommended that tires generally be
replaced when they are 6 years or older.
Heat caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate
the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road
tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The
period in which the tire was manufactured
(both week and year) is indicated by a
4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-25.
CAUTION
¾Do not use your temporary spare tire
rim with a snow tire or a conventional
tire. Neither will properly fit and could
damage both tire and rim.
¾The temporary spare tire has a tread life
of less than 5,000 km (3,000 miles). The
tread life may be shorter depending on
driving conditions.
¾The temporary spare tire is for limited
use, however, if the tread wear solidband indicator appears, replace the tire
with the same type of temporary spare
(page 6-42).
Temporary Spare Tire
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least
monthly to make sure it is properly
inÀated and stored.
NOTE
The temporary spare tire condition
gradually deteriorates even if it has not
been used.
The temporary spare tire is easier to
handle because of its construction which
is lighter and smaller than a conventional
tire. This tire should be used only for an
emergency and only for a short distance.
Use the temporary spare tire only until the
conventional tire is repaired, which should
be as soon as possible.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used on the road. It
is recommended that tires generally be
replaced when they are 6 years or older.
Heat caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate
the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road
tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The
period in which the tire was manufactured
(both week and year) is indicated by a
4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-25.
Replacing a Wheel
WARNING
Always use wheels of the correct size on
your vehicle:
Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be affected, leading to loss of
control and an accident.
6–43
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
A wrong-sized wheel may adversely
affect:
¾Tire fit
¾Wheel and bearing life
¾Ground clearance
¾Snow-chain clearance
¾Speedometer calibration
¾Headlight aim
¾Bumper height
¾Tire Pressure Monitoring System
NOTE
yWhen replacing a wheel, make sure
the new one is the same as the original
factory wheel in diameter, rim width,
and offset (inset/outset).
yFor details, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Proper tire balancing provides the best
riding comfort and helps reduce tread
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause
vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and Àat spots.
6–44
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Light Bulbs
With LED Headlights
Courtesy lights
Side turn signal lights
Rear map lights
Trunk light
High-mount
brake light
Overhead lights/
Front map lights
Vanity mirror
lights
Front turn signal lights/
Front side-marker lights
Daytime running lights/
Parking lights
Headlights (Low beam)
Fog lights
Headlights (High beam)
Signature wing illumination
Rear side-marker lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Brake lights
Taillights
Rear turn signal lights
Reverse lights
Taillights (Trunk lid side)
License plate lights
With Halogen Headlights
Courtesy lights
Side turn signal lights
Overhead lights/
Front map lights
Vanity mirror
lights
Rear map lights
Trunk light
High-mount
brake light
Rear side-marker lights
Front turn signal lights/
Front side-marker lights
Parking lights
Headlights (Low beam)
Fog lights
Headlights (High beam)/
Daytime running lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Rear turn signal lights
Reverse lights
Taillights (Trunk lid side)
License plate lights
Some models.
6–45
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
WARNING
Never touch the glass portion of a
halogen bulb with your bare hands
and always wear eye protection when
handling or working around the bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will
explode and serious injuries could be
caused by the flying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when lit.
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the
reach of children:
Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb or
breaking it some other way.
CAUTION
When removing the lens or lamp unit
using a flathead screwdriver, make
sure that the flathead screwdriver does
not contact the interior terminal. If
the flathead screwdriver contacts the
terminal, a short circuit may occur.
Replacing Exterior Light Bulbs
Headlights (With LED headlights)
Low/High beam bulbs
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
Headlights (With halogen headlights)
Low-beam bulbs
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off engine.
If you are changing the left bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
Removal
Installation
NOTE
yTo replace the bulb, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yIf the halogen bulb is accidentally
touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
yUse the protective cover and carton for
the replacement bulb to dispose of the
old bulb promptly and out of the reach
of children.
6–46
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
5. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your ¿nger and pulling the
connector downward.
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the reÀector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
High-beam bulbs/Daytime running
lights
(Left side)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Remove the clip.
6–47
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Move the air cleaner cover and create a
space large enough to work in.
5. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your ¿nger and pulling the
connector downward.
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the reÀector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
(Right side)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Disconnect the clip.
Clip
6–48
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Remove the windshield washer Àuid
reservoir and bolts.
Bolt
Windshield washer
fluid reservoir
7. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the reÀector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
Guide
5. Remove the guide.
Guide
6. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your ¿nger and pulling the
connector downward.
8. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Daytime running lights/Parking lights
(With LED headlights), Signature wing
illumination*
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
6–49
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Front turn signal lights/Front sidemarker lights, Parking lights (With
halogen headlights)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off engine.
If you are changing the left bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
6. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Front turn signal lights/Front sidemarker lights
Removal
Parking lights (With halogen
headlights)
Installation
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Fog lights (With LED headlights)*
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6–50
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fog lights (With halogen headlights)*
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off engine.
If you are changing the left bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
5. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your ¿nger and pulling the
connector downward.
Removal
Installation
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the reÀector
by gently pulling it straight out of the
socket.
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
6–51
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Brake lights, Taillights, High-mount
brake light, Side-turn signal lights,
Rear side-marker lights (With LED
headlights)
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
3. (Left side)
Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers and the
pocket.
(Right side)
Remove the pocket.
(Left side)
Removal
Rear turn signal lights, Rear sidemarker lights (With halogen headlights)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the turn signal switch is off.
2. Lift the trunk mat.
Installation
(Right side)
6–52
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers and the trunk
end trim.
7. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal lights
Removal
Installation
Rear side-marker lights
5. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers and the trunk
side trim.
8. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
Taillights (Trunk lid side) (With LED
headlights)
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
6–53
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Taillights (Trunk lid side) (With halogen
headlights), Reverse lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers and the trunk
lid trim.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Taillights (Trunk lid side)
Removal
Installation
Reverse lights
3. (Reverse lights)
Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on the
connector with your ¿nger and pulling
the connector.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6–54
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
License plate lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Wrap a Àathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the lens,
and then remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with a
Àathead screwdriver.
3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
Overhead lights/Front map lights
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Replacing Interior Light Bulbs
Overhead lights/Front map lights (LED
type), Rear map lights (LED type)
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when the replacement is necessary.
Overhead lights/Front map lights (Bulb
type), Rear map lights (Bulb type),
Vanity mirror lights*, Courtesy lights
1. Wrap a small Àathead screwdriver
with a soft cloth to prevent damage to
the lens, and then remove the lens by
carefully prying on the edge of the lens
with the Àathead screwdriver.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
6–55
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Rear map lights
Courtesy lights
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Trunk light
1. Press both sides of the lens cap to
remove it.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
Vanity mirror lights*
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6–56
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuses
Your vehicle's electrical system is
protected by fuses.
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the
fuse puller provided on the fuse block
located in the engine compartment.
If any lights, accessories, or controls do
not work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
that system and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Fuse Replacement
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is
blown.
Replacing the fuses on the vehicle's left
side
If the electrical system does not work, ¿rst
inspect the fuses on the vehicle's left side.
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
Normal
Blown
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage
rating, and make sure it ¿ts tightly. If
it does not ¿t tightly, have an expert
install it. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the AUDIO or OUTLET circuit.
CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with a genuine
Mazda fuse or equivalent of the same
rating. Otherwise you may damage
the electric system.
6–57
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
Replacing the fuses under the hood
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the fuses
in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
WARNING
Do not replace the main fuse and
multiplex slow blow fuse by yourself.
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
perform the replacement:
Replacing these fuses by yourself is
dangerous because they are high
current fuses. Incorrect replacement
could cause an electrical shock or a
short circuit resulting in a fire.
4. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is
blown, replace it with a new one of the
same amperage rating.
Normal
Blown
6–58
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse Panel Description
Fuse block (Engine compartment)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
1
ADD FAN GE
30 A
Cooling fan
2
IG2
30 A
For protection of various circuits
3
INJECTOR
30 A
Engine control system
4
FAN DE
40 A
—
5
P.WINDOW1
30 A
—
6
—
—
—
7
ADD FAN DE
40 A
—
8
EVVT
SCR1
20 A
Engine control system
Rear window defogger
9
DEFOG
40 A
10
DCDC DE
40 A
11
FAN GE
30 A
—
Cooling fan
12
EPB L
20 A
Electric parking brake (LH)
13
AUDIO
40 A
Audio system
14
EPB R
20 A
Electric parking brake (RH)
15
ENG.MAIN
40 A
Engine control system
16
ABS/DSC M
50 A
ABS, Dynamic stability control system
50 A
For protection of various circuits
17
6–59
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
18
WIPER
20 A
Front window wiper and washer
19
HEATER
40 A
Air conditioner
20
DCDC REG
30 A
21
ENGINE.IG1
7.5 A
Engine control system
—
22
C/U IG1
15 A
For protection of various circuits
23
H/L LOW L
HID L
15 A
Headlight low beam (LH)
24
H/L LOW R
15 A
Headlight low beam (RH)
25
ENGINE3
15 A
Engine control system
26
ENGINE2
15 A
Engine control system
27
ENGINE1
15 A
Engine control system
28
AT
15 A
Transaxle control system*, Ignition switch
29
H/CLEAN
20 A
30
A/C
7.5 A
31
AT PUMP
15 A
32
STOP
10 A
—
Air conditioner
—
Brake lights
33
R.WIPER
15 A
Theft-deterrent system*
34
H/L HI
20 A
Headlight high beam
35
HID R
ST.HEATER
15 A
Heated steering wheel*
36
FOG
15 A
Fog lights*
7.5 A
Engine control system
38
AUDIO2
7.5 A
Audio system
39
GLOW SIG
5A
40
METER2
7.5 A
41
METER1
10 A
Instrument cluster
42
SRS1
7.5 A
Air bag
43
BOSE
25 A
Bose® Sound System-equipped model*
37
—
—
44
AUDIO1
15 A
Audio system
45
ABS/DSC S
30 A
ABS, Dynamic stability control system
46
FUEL PUMP
15 A
Fuel system
47
FUEL WARM
25 A
48
TAIL
15 A
49
FUEL PUMP2
SCR2
25 A
50
HAZARD
25 A
Hazard warning Àashers, Turn signal lights/Front side-marker
lights, Parking lights
51
DRL
15 A
Daytime running lights*
52
R.OUTLET2
15 A
Accessory sockets
6–60
—
Taillights, License plate lights
—
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
53
HORN
15 A
Horn
54
ROOM
15 A
Overhead light
6–61
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse block (Left side)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
1
P.SEAT D
30 A
Power seat*
2
P.WINDOW3
30 A
Power windows
3
R.OUTLET3
15 A
4
P.WINDOW2
25 A
5
SRS2/ESCL
15 A
6
D.LOCK
25 A
—
Power windows
—
Power door locks
7
SEAT WARM
20 A
Seat warmer*
8
SUNROOF
10 A
Moonroof*
9
F.OUTLET
15 A
Accessory sockets
10
MIRROR
7.5 A
Power control mirror
11
R.OUTLET1
15 A
—
12
—
—
—
13
—
—
—
14
—
—
—
15
—
—
—
16
—
—
17
M.DEF
7.5 A
Mirror defogger*
18
R.SEAT W
20 A
Seat warmer*
6–62
—
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
19
R.SHADE
7.5 A
20
AT IND
7.5 A
AT shift indicator*
—
21
P.SEAT P
30 A
Power seat*
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
6–63
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
The paintwork on your Mazda represents
the latest technical developments in
composition and methods of application.
Environmental hazards, however, can
harm the paint's protective properties, if
proper care is not taken.
Here are some examples of possible
damage, with tips on how to prevent them.
Etching Caused by Acid Rain or
Industrial Fallout
Damage Caused by Bird Dropping,
Insects, or Tree Sap
Occurrence
Bird droppings contain acids. If these
are not removed they can eat away the
clear and color base coat of the vehicle's
paintwork.
When insects stick to the paint surface and
decompose, corrosive compounds form.
These can erode the clear and color base
coat of the vehicle's paintwork if they are
not removed.
Occurrence
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew
to form acids. These acids can settle on a
vehicle's ¿nish. As the water evaporates,
the acid becomes concentrated and can
damage the ¿nish.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for
damage.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
permanently to the paint ¿nish. If you
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
vehicle paint could come off with it.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its ¿nish according to
the instructions in this section. These steps
should be taken immediately after you
suspect that acid rain has settled on your
vehicle's ¿nish.
Bird droppings can be removed with a soft
sponge and water. If you are traveling and
these are not available, a moistened tissue
may also take care of the problem. The
cleaned area should be waxed according to
the instructions in this section.
Insects and tree sap are best removed with
a soft sponge and water or a commercially
available chemical cleaner.
Prevention
It is necessary to have your Mazda washed
and waxed to preserve its ¿nish according
to the instructions in this section. This
should be done as soon as possible.
Another method is to cover the affected
area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.
6–64
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Water Marks
Paint Chipping
Occurrence
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can
contain harmful minerals such as salt and
lime. If moisture containing these minerals
settles on the vehicle and evaporates, the
minerals will concentrate and harden to
form white rings. The rings can damage
your vehicle's ¿nish.
Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits
your vehicle.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its ¿nish according to
the instructions in this section. These steps
should be taken immediately after you ¿nd
water marks on your vehicle's ¿nish.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances
of having your paint chipped by Àying
gravel.
NOTE
yThe paint chipping zone varies with the
speed of the vehicle. For example, when
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).
yIn low temperatures a vehicle's ¿nish
hardens. This increases the chance of
paint chipping.
yChipped paint can lead to rust forming
on your Mazda. Before this happens,
repair the damage by using Mazda
touch-up paint according to the
instructions in this section. Failure to
repair the affected area could lead to
serious rusting and expensive repairs.
Follow all label and container directions
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.
Read all warnings and cautions.
6–65
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Maintaining the Finish
Washing
CAUTION
¾When the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
¾If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with a
cloth.
¾If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object from either outside or
inside the vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of the
windshield when the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is
switched ON as fingers could be pinched
or the wipers and wiper blades damaged
when the wipers activate automatically.
If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off
completely (when it is most likely
that the engine is left running) this is
particularly important when clearing ice
and snow.
¾Do not spray water in the engine
compartment. Otherwise, it could result
in engine-starting problems or damage
to electrical parts.
¾When washing and waxing the vehicle,
be careful not to apply excessive force to
any single area of the vehicle roof or the
antenna. Otherwise, you could dent the
vehicle or damage the antenna.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the
paint surface could be scratched. Here are
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
Scratches occur on the paint surface when:
y
The
vehicle is washed without ¿rst
rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter.
y
The vehicle is washed with a rough, dry,
or dirty cloth.
y
The vehicle is washed at a car wash that
uses brushes that are dirty or too stiff.
y
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives
are used.
NOTE
yMazda is not responsible for scratches
caused by automatic car washes or
improper washing.
yScratches are more noticeable on
vehicles with darker paint ¿nishes.
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's
paint ¿nish:
y
Rinse
off any dirt or other foreign matter
using lukewarm or cold water before
washing.
y
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
and a soft cloth when washing the
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
y
Rub gently when washing or drying the
vehicle.
y
Take your vehicle only to a car wash
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
y
Do not use abrasive cleansers or wax
that contain abrasives.
To help protect the ¿nish from rust
and deterioration, wash your Mazda
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
6–66
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
CAUTION
¾Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners,
or strong detergents containing highly
alkaline or caustic agents on chromeplated or anodized aluminum parts. This
may damage the protective coating;
also, cleaners and detergents may
discolor or deteriorate the paint.
Pay special attention to removing salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign material from the
underside of the fenders, and make sure
the drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors and rocker panels are clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits
can damage the ¿nish if not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with
lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow
soap to dry on the ¿nish.
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from
forming.
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
When using an automatic car wash
y
Retract the door mirrors.
y
The automatic car wash brushes could
reduce the paint lustre or hasten paint
deterioration.
When using a high water pressure car
wash
High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of car wash
machine. If the car washer nozzle is
put too close to the vehicle, the force of
the spray could damage or deform the
molding, affect the sealability of parts,
and allow water to penetrate the interior.
Keep a suf¿cient space (30 cm (12 in) or
more) between the nozzle and the vehicle.
In addition, do not spend too much time
spraying the same area of the vehicle, and
be very careful when spraying between
gaps in doors and around windows.
Waxing
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when
water no longer beads on the ¿nish.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.
Waxes containing abrasive will remove
paint and could damage bright metal
parts.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colors.
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
6–67
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and
similar materials will usually also take off
the wax. Rewax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not need it.
Repairing Damage to the Finish
Deep scratches or chips on the ¿nish
should be repaired promptly. Exposed
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
repairs.
CAUTION
If your Mazda is damaged and needs
metal parts repaired or replaced,
make sure the body shop applies anticorrosion materials to all parts, both
repaired and new. This will prevent
them from rusting.
Bright-Metal Maintenance
y
Use
tar remover to remove road tar and
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool.
y
To prevent corrosion on brightmetal surfaces, apply wax or chrome
preservative and rub it to a high luster.
y
During cold weather or in coastal areas,
cover bright-metal parts with a coating
of wax or preservative heavier than
usual. It would also help to coat them
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or
some other protective compound.
CAUTION
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating
and cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
Underbody Maintenance
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and
snow removal and solvents used for dust
control may collect on the underbody. If
not removed, they will speed up rusting
and deterioration of such underbody parts
as fuel lines, frame, Àoor pan, and exhaust
system, even though these parts may be
coated with anti-corrosive material.
Thoroughly Àush the underbody and wheel
housings with lukewarm or cold water at
the end of each winter. Try also to do this
every month.
Pay special attention to these areas
because they easily hide mud and dirt.
It will do more harm than good to wet
down the road grime without removing
it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes that
should not be clogged. Water trapped there
will cause rusting.
6–68
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been affected.
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance
A protective coating is provided over the
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed
to protect this coating.
CAUTION
Do not use any detergent other than
mild detergent. Before using any
detergent, verify the ingredients.
Otherwise, the product could discolor
or stain the aluminum wheels.
NOTE
yDo not use a wire brush or any abrasive
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent
on aluminum wheels. They may damage
the coating.
yAlways use a sponge or soft cloth to
clean the wheels.
Rinse the wheels thoroughly with
lukewarm or cold water. Also, be sure
to clean the wheels after driving on
dusty or salted roads to help prevent
corrosion.
yAvoid washing your vehicle in an
automatic car wash that uses highspeed or hard brushes.
Plastic Part Maintenance
y
When
cleaning the plastic lenses of the
lights, do not use gasoline, kerosene,
recti¿ed spirit, paint, thinner, highly
acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline
detergents. Otherwise, these chemical
agents can discolor or damage the
surfaces resulting in a signi¿cant loss
in functionality. If plastic parts become
inadvertently exposed to any of these
chemical agents, Àush with water
immediately.
y
If plastic parts such as the bumpers
become inadvertently exposed to
chemical agents or Àuids such as
gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery
Àuid, it could cause discoloration,
staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any
such chemical agents or Àuids using a
soft cloth immediately.
y
High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of high pressure
car washer device. If the car washer
nozzle is put too close to the vehicle or
aimed at one area for an extended period
of time, it could deform plastic parts or
damage the paint.
y
Do not use wax containing compounds
(polish). Otherwise, it could result in
paint damage.
y
In addition, do not use an electrical or
air tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the
frictional heat generated could result
in deformation of plastic parts or paint
damage.
6–69
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Interior Care
WARNING
Do not spray water into the vehicle
cabin:
Spraying water into the vehicle cabin is
dangerous as electrical devices such as
the audio and switches could get wet
resulting in a malfunction or vehicle
fire.
NOTE
yDo not wipe the interior using alcohol,
chlorine bleach, or organic solvents
such as thinner, benzene, and gasoline.
Otherwise, it may cause discoloration
or stains.
yRubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth
may cause damage.
If the vehicle interior becomes soiled
by any of the following, wipe it off
immediately using a soft cloth.
Leaving it uncleaned could cause
discoloration, stains, cracks, or peeling
of the coating, and it will make it hard to
wipe off later.
y
Beverage
y
Grease
or fragrance
or oil
y
Soiling
Seat Belt Maintenance
1. Clean the soiled area by lightly dabbing
it with a soft cloth soaked in a mild
detergent (approx. 5%) diluted with
water.
2. Wipe off the remaining detergent using
a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
3. Before retracting seat belts which have
been pulled out for cleaning, dry them
off thoroughly and make sure there is
no remaining moisture on them.
WARNING
If a seat belt appears frayed or has
abrasions, have it replaced by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer:
If a seat belts is used under such a
condition, it cannot function at its full
capacity which could result in serious
injury or death.
Use a mild detergent to remove soiling
from a seat belt:
If organic solvents are used for
cleaning the seat belts or they
become stained or bleached, there
is the possibility of them becoming
weakened and as a result, they may
not function at their full capacity
which could cause serious injury or
death.
NOTE
Clean seat belts diligently if they get
dirty. Leaving them uncleaned will make
it dif¿cult to clean them later, and it may
affect the smooth retracting of the seat
belt.
6–70
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Vinyl Upholstery Maintenance
Remove dust and dirt from the vinyl
upholstery using a brush or vacuum.
Remove soiling from vinyl upholstery
using a leather and vinyl upholstery
cleaner.
Upholstery Maintenance
1. Clean the soiled area by lightly dabbing
it with a soft cloth soaked in a mild
detergent (approx. 5%) diluted with
water.
2. Wipe off the remaining detergent using
a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
Leather Upholstery Maintenance*
1. Remove dust and sand using a vacuum
cleaner.
2. Wipe off the soiled area with a soft
cloth and a suitable, special cleaner or
a soft cloth soaked in a mild detergent
(about 5%) diluted with water.
3. Wipe off the remaining detergent using
a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
4. Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth
and allow the leather to further dry in
a well-ventilated, shaded area. If the
leather gets wet such as from rain,
remove the moisture and dry it as soon
as possible.
NOTE
yBecause genuine leather is a natural
material, its surface is not uniform and
it may have natural scars, scratches,
and wrinkles.
yTo maintain the quality for as long as
possible, periodical maintenance, about
twice a year, is recommended.
yIf the leather upholstery comes into
contact with any of the following, clean
it immediately.
Leaving it uncleaned could cause
premature wear, mold, or stains.
ySand
or dirt
or oil, such as hand cream
yAlcohol, such as in cosmetic or hair
dressing items
yGrease
yIf
the leather upholstery gets wet,
promptly remove moisture with a dry
cloth. Remaining moisture on the
surface may cause deterioration such as
hardening and shrinkage.
yExposure to direct sunlight for long
periods may cause deterioration and
shrinkage. When parking the car under
direct sunlight for long periods, shade
the interior using sunshades.
yDo not leave vinyl products on the
leather upholstery for long periods.
They may affect the leather quality
and coloring. If the cabin temperature
becomes hot, the vinyl may deteriorate
and adhere to the genuine leather.
Plastic Part Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not use polishing agents.
Depending on the product ingredients,
they could cause discoloration, stains,
cracks or peeling of the coating.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
6–71
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Instrument Panel Top (Soft pad)
Maintenance
Extremely soft material is used for the
soft pad surface. If the soft pad surface is
rubbed harshly with a dry cloth, it could
result in the surface being damaged and
leaving white scratch marks.
1. Wipe the soiled area with a soft cloth
soaked in a mild detergent (approx.
5%) diluted with water.
2. Wipe off the remaining detergent using
a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
Active Driving Display
Maintenance*
The combiner and mirror surface have
a special coating. When cleaning it, do
not use a hard cloth, a cloth with a rough
surface, or cleaning detergent. Use a ¿netextured, soft cloth.
If a chemical solvent gets on the combiner
or mirror surface, wipe it off immediately.
Otherwise, they could be damaged and the
surface coating could be scratched.
Panel Maintenance
If a panel becomes soiled, wipe it off with
a soft cloth soaked in clean water and
thoroughly wrung out.
If some areas require further cleaning, use
the following procedure:
1. Wipe the soiled area with a soft cloth
soaked in a mild detergent (approx. 5
%) diluted with water.
2. Wipe off the remaining detergent using
a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
NOTE
Be particularly careful when cleaning
shiny surface panels and metallic parts
such as plating as they can be scratched
easily.
Cleaning the Window Interiors
If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy ¿lm, clean them with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the
container.
CAUTION
¾Do not scrape or scratch the inside of
the window glass. It could damage the
thermal filaments and the antenna lines.
¾When washing the inside of the window
glass, use a soft cloth dampened in
lukewarm water, gently wiping the
thermal filaments and the antenna lines.
Use of glass cleaning products could
damage the thermal filaments and the
antenna lines.
6–72
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Floor Mats
Rubber Àoor mats should be cleaned with
mild soap and water only.
WARNING
Do not use rubber cleaners, such as tire
cleaner or tire shine, when cleaning
rubber floor mats:
Cleaning the rubber floor mats with
rubber cleaning products makes the
floor mats slippery.
This may cause an accident when
depressing the accelerator, brake, or
clutch (Manual transaxle) pedal or
when getting in or out of the vehicle.
After removing the Àoor mats for cleaning,
always reinstall them securely (page
3-45).
6–73
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
MEMO
6–74
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
7
If Trouble Arises
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
Parking in an Emergency .................................................................. 7-2
Parking in an Emergency .............................................................. 7-2
Flat Tire............................................................................................... 7-3
Spare Tire and Tool Storage .......................................................... 7-3
Changing a Flat Tire...................................................................... 7-6
Battery Runs Out ............................................................................. 7-13
Jump-Starting .............................................................................. 7-13
Emergency Starting ......................................................................... 7-16
Starting a Flooded Engine ........................................................... 7-16
Push-Starting ............................................................................... 7-16
Overheating ...................................................................................... 7-17
Overheating ................................................................................. 7-17
Emergency Towing ........................................................................... 7-19
Towing Description ..................................................................... 7-19
Tiedown Hooks* .......................................................................... 7-20
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds........................... 7-22
If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes...................................... 7-22
Message Indicated on Display .................................................... 7-33
Message Indicated in Multi-information Display* ...................... 7-35
Warning Sound is Activated ........................................................ 7-36
When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened.............................................. 7-40
When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened ........................................... 7-40
Active Driving Display Does Not Operate ..................................... 7-41
If the Active Driving Display does not operate .......................... 7-41
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
7–1
If Trouble Arises
Parking in an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traf¿c hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning Àasher and
all the turn signals will Àash. The hazard
warning indicator lights in the instrument
cluster Àash simultaneously.
NOTE
yThe turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
yCheck local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle
is being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
7–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Spare Tire and Tool Storage
Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
Type A
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Jack lever
Tiedown eyelet
(Short type)
Lug wrench
Tiedown eyelet
(Long type)
Jack
Flat tire belt
Spare tire
Type B
Tiedown eyelet
(Long type)
Tiedown eyelet
(Short type)
Lug wrench
Jack lever
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Jack
Spare tire
Some models.
7–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Jack
To remove the jack
1. Lift the trunk mat.
To secure the jack
1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with
the jack screw pointing to the front
and turn the wing bolt clockwise to
temporarily tighten it.
2. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the ¿gure.
Trunk mat
Wing bolt
Jack screw
2. Remove the pocket.
3. Turn the wing bolt completely to secure
the jack.
NOTE
If the jack is not completely secured, it
could rattle while driving. Make sure the
jack screw is suf¿ciently tightened.
Maintenance
y
Always keep the jack clean.
y
Make sure the moving parts are kept
free from dirt or rust.
y
Make sure the screw thread is
adequately lubricated.
3. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw
counterclockwise.
Wing bolt
Jack screw
Spare Tire
Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.
The temporary spare tire is lighter and
smaller than a conventional tire, and is
designed only for emergency use and
should be used only for VERY short
periods. Temporary spare tires should
NEVER be used for long drives or
extended periods.
7–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
WARNING
Do not install the temporary spare tire
on the front wheels (driving wheels):
Driving with the temporary spare tire
on one of the front driving wheels is
dangerous. Handling will be affected.
You could lose control of the vehicle,
especially on ice or snow bound roads,
and have an accident. Move a regular
tire to the front wheel and install the
temporary spare tire to the rear.
To remove the spare tire
1. Lift the trunk mat.
Trunk mat
CAUTION
¾When using the temporary spare tire,
driving stability may decrease compared
to when using only the conventional tire.
Drive carefully.
¾To avoid damage to the temporary
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe the
following precautions:
2. Turn the spare tire hold-down bolt
counterclockwise.
Spare tire hold-down bolt
¾Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
¾Avoid driving over obstacles. Also, do
not drive through an automatic car
wash. This tire's diameter is smaller
than a conventional tire, so the
ground clearance is reduced.
¾Do not use a tire chain on this tire
because it will not fit properly.
¾Do not use your temporary spare
tire on any other vehicle, it has been
designed only for your Mazda.
¾Use only one temporary spare tire on
your vehicle at the same time.
To secure the spare tire
Store the spare tire in the reverse order
of removal. After storing, verify that the
spare tire is stored securely.
7–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Changing a Flat Tire
NOTE
If the following occurs while driving, it
could indicate a Àat tire.
ySteering
becomes dif¿cult.
vehicle begins to vibrate
excessively.
yThe vehicle pulls in one direction.
yThe
If you have a Àat tire, drive slowly to a
level spot that is well off the road and out
of the way of traf¿c to change the tire.
Stopping in traf¿c or on the shoulder of a
busy road is dangerous.
1. Park on a hard, level surface off the
right-of-way and ¿rmly set the parking
brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in Park (P), a manual
transaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turn
off the engine.
3. Turn on the hazard warning Àasher.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
and away from the vehicle and traf¿c.
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire
(page 7-3).
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the Àat tire. When blocking a wheel,
place a tire block both in front and
behind the tire.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tire:
Changing a tire is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure someone.
No person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle
supported by a jack:
Allowing someone to remain in
a vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury.
NOTE
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood
blocks of suf¿cient size if possible to hold
the tire in place.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated
before using it.
7–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Removing a Flat Tire
1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
4. Place the jack under the jack-up
position closest to the tire being
changed with the jack head squarely
under the jack-up point.
Jacking position
2. Place the jack on the ground.
3. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the ¿gure and adjust the jack
head so that it is close to the jack-up
position.
5. Continue raising the jack head
gradually by rotating the screw with
your hand until the jack head is inserted
into the jack-up position.
Tire blocks
Jack head
Jacking position
7–7
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
WARNING
6. Insert the jack lever and attach the lug
wrench to tire jack.
Use only the front and rear jacking
positions recommended in this manual:
Attempting to jack the vehicle
in positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even kill
someone. Use only the front and rear
jacking positions recommended in this
manual.
Do not jack up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or place any objects on or
under the jack:
Jacking up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or placing objects on or
under the jack is dangerous as it could
deform the vehicle body or the vehicle
could fall off the jack resulting in an
accident.
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise and
raise the vehicle high enough so that
the spare tire can be installed. Before
removing the lug nuts, make sure your
Mazda is ¿rmly in position and that it
cannot slip or move.
Use only the jack provided with your
Mazda:
Using a jack that is not designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
injure someone.
Never place objects under the jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle.
7–8
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
WARNING
Do not jack up the vehicle higher than is
necessary:
Jacking up the vehicle higher than
is necessary is dangerous as it could
destabilize the vehicle resulting in an
accident.
Do not start the engine or shake the
vehicle while it is jacked up:
Starting the engine or shaking
the vehicle while it is jacked up is
dangerous as it could cause the vehicle
to fall off the jack resulting in an
accident.
Never go under the vehicle while it is
jacked up:
Going under the vehicle while it is
jacked up is dangerous as it could
result in death or serious injury if the
vehicle were to fall off the jack.
Locking Lug Nuts
If your vehicle has Mazda optional
antitheft wheel lug nuts, one on each
wheel will lock the tires and you must
use a special key to unlock them. This
key will attach to the lug wrench.
Register them with the lock manufacturer
by ¿lling out the card provided in the
glove compartment and mailing it in the
accompanying envelope. If you lose this
key, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
or use the lock manufacturer's order form,
which is with the registration card.
Accessory wheel locks cannot be used on
steel wheels. This includes situations when
the spare tire is installed. If the spare tire
is installed, one of the original lug nuts
(which should still be in the vehicle) must
be installed in place of the wheel lock.
Antitheft lug nut
Special key
8. Remove the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise; then remove the
wheel and center cap.
To remove an antitheft lug nut
1. Obtain the special key for the antitheft
lug nut.
2. Place the special key on top of the
antitheft lug nut, and be sure to hold
the key square to it. If you hold the key
at an angle, you may damage both key
and nut. Do not use a power impact
wrench.
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
7–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
To install the antitheft lug nut
1. Place the special key on top of the nut,
and be sure to hold the key square to
it. If you hold the key at an angle, you
may damage both key and nut. Do not
use a power impact wrench.
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the
special key, apply pressure, and turn it
clockwise.
2. Mount the spare tire.
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled
edge inward; tighten them by hand.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
108—147 (12—14, 80—108)
Mounting the Spare Tire
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.
WARNING
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts
and bolts and do not tighten the
lug nuts beyond the recommended
tightening torque:
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts could
loosen while driving and cause the tire
to come off, resulting in an accident.
In addition, lug nuts and bolts could
be damaged if tightened more than
necessary.
WARNING
Make sure the mounting surfaces of
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean
before changing or replacing tires:
When changing or replacing a tire,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug
nuts could loosen while driving and
cause the tire to come off, resulting in
an accident.
7–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order
shown.
5. (Without Àat tire belt)
Store the damaged tire in the trunk.
(With Àat tire belt)
Open the trunk mat.
6. Remove the belt for securing the Àat
tire.
7. Put the Àat tire into the trunk on the left
and toward the back.
If you are unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
108—147 (12—14, 80—108)
WARNING
8. Fold the seat back forward on the right
side of the rear seat.
9. Thread the belt through the rear seat as
shown in the ¿gure.
Always securely and correctly tighten
the lug nuts:
Improperly or loosely tightened lug
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
wobble or come off. This could result
in loss of vehicle control and cause a
serious accident.
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you
removed or replace them with metric
nuts of the same configuration:
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts
on your Mazda have metric threads,
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.
On a metric stud, it would not secure
the wheel and would damage the stud,
which could cause the wheel to slip off
and cause an accident.
7–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
10.Thread the buckle through the wheel as
shown in the ¿gure and secure it so that
the buckle does not contact the wheel.
11. Thread the belt through the buckle,
then pull the belt end to secure the Àat
tire.
WARNING
Do not drive with any tires that have
incorrect air pressure:
Driving on tires with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tires with
incorrect pressure could affect
handling and result in an accident.
When you check the regular tires' air
pressure, check the spare tire, too.
NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling,
store them properly.
12.Return the seat back on the right side of
the rear seat to its original position.
13.Remove the tire blocks and store the
tools and jack.
14.Check the inÀation pressure. Refer to
Tires on page 9-8.
15.Have the Àat tire repaired or replaced
as soon as possible.
NOTE
Do not press the tire pressure monitoring
system set switch after installing the spare
tire. The switch is only to be pressed after
installing the repaired Àat tire or installing
a replacement tire (page 4-32).
7–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
Jump-Starting
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service
technician do the work.
WARNING
Follow These Precautions Carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that
could cause sparks:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a battery, do
not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery.
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may rupture
or explode, causing serious injury.
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the
discharged battery is dangerous.
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous. The
cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.
7–13
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in series or a
24 V motor generator set).
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Jumper cables
Discharged battery
Booster battery
7–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Make sure the booster battery is 12
V and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
3. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow both vehicles
to touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and
all unnecessary electrical loads in both
vehicles.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence as in the illustration.
Connect one end of a cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged
battery (1).
y Attach the other end to the positive
terminal on the booster battery (2).
y Connect one end of the other cable to
the negative terminal of the booster
battery (3).
y Connect the other end to the ground
point indicated in the illustration
away from the discharged battery (4).
y
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
6. (With i-ELOOP system)
“i-ELOOP Charging Please don't
Drive” is displayed in the multi-display
of the instrument cluster after the
engine is started. The message is no
longer displayed when the engine is
running and the charging is completed.
The vehicle may be driven after the
message is no longer displayed.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven while the message
is displayed, a beep sound is heard.
If you turn the steering wheel while the
message is displayed, it will feel heavier
than normal, but this does not indicate
an abnormality. The steering operation
will return to normal after the message
is no longer displayed. Do not remove
the jumper cables while the message is
displayed.
7. When ¿nished, carefully disconnect the
cables in the reverse order described in
the illustration.
8. If the battery cover has been removed,
install it in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE
Verify that the covers are securely
installed.
7–15
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Starting
Starting a Flooded Engine
If the engine fails to start, it may be
Àooded (excessive fuel in the engine).
Follow this procedure:
1. If the engine does not start within
¿ve seconds on the ¿rst try, wait ten
seconds and try again.
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
3. Depress the accelerator all the way and
hold it there.
4. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal
(Automatic transaxle), then press the
push button start. If the engine starts,
release the accelerator immediately
because the engine will suddenly rev
up.
5. If the engine fails to start, crank it
without depressing the accelerator.
Push-Starting
Do not push-start your Mazda.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it:
Towing a vehicle to start it is
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be injured.
CAUTION
Do not push-start a vehicle that has a
manual transaxle. It can damage the
emission control system.
NOTE
You cannot start a vehicle with an
automatic transaxle by pushing it.
If the engine still does not start using the
previous procedure, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
7–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
Overheating
If the high engine coolant temperature
warning light turns on, the vehicle loses
power, or you hear a loud knocking or
pinging noise, the engine is probably too
hot.
WARNING
Pull over to a safe location, then
switch the ignition off and make sure
the fan is not running before attempting
to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if
the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You
could be hit by the fan and seriously
injured.
Do not remove either cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are hot,
scalding coolant and steam may shoot
out under pressure and cause serious
injury.
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no
longer escaping from the engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you.
If the high engine coolant temperature
warning light turns on:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in park (P), a manual
transaxle in neutral.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn off the air conditioner.
5. Check whether coolant or steam is
escaping from the engine compartment.
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment:
Do not go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine.
Wait until the steam dissipates, then
open the hood and start the engine.
If neither coolant nor steam is
escaping:
Open the hood and idle the engine until
it cools.
CAUTION
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the engine
temperature will increase. Stop the
engine and call an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,
then turn off the engine after the
temperature has decreased.
7. When cool, check the coolant level.
If it is low, look for coolant leaks from
the radiator and hoses.
7–17
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
If you ¿nd a leak or other damage, or if
coolant is still leaking:
Stop the engine and call an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir
Cooling fan
If you ¿nd no problems, the engine is
cool, and no leaks are obvious:
Carefully add coolant as required (page
6-29).
CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the cooling
system inspected. The engine could be
seriously damaged unless repairs are
made. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7–18
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
Towing Description
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Government and local laws must be
followed.
A towed vehicle usually should have its
drive wheels (front wheels) off the ground.
If excessive damage or other conditions
prevent this, use wheel dollies.
CAUTION
¾Do not tow the vehicle pointed
backward with driving wheels on the
ground. This may cause internal damage
to the transaxle.
¾Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage your vehicle. Use
wheel-lift or flatbed equipment.
Wheel dollies
When towing with the rear wheels on the
ground, release the parking brake.
7–19
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
Tiedown Hooks*
CAUTION
Do not use the front and rear tiedown
eyelets for towing the vehicle.
They have been designed only for
securing the vehicle to a transport
vessel during shipping.
Using the eyelets for any other purpose
could result in the vehicle being
damaged.
Tiedown Hooks
1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug
wrench from the luggage compartment
(page 7-3).
2. Wrap a Àathead screwdriver or similar
tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage
to a painted bumper, and open the cap
located on the front or rear bumper.
Front
Rear
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force as it may
damage the cap or scratch the painted
bumper surface.
NOTE
Remove the cap completely and store it so
as not to lose it.
7–20
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet
using the lug wrench.
Front
Lug wrench
Tiedown eyelet
(Long type)
Rear
Lug wrench
Tiedown eyelet
(Short type)
4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown
eyelet.
CAUTION
If the tiedown eyelet is not securely
tightened, it may loosen or disengage
from the bumper when tying the
vehicle. Make sure that the tiedown
eyelet is securely tightened to the
bumper.
7–21
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes
If any warning light turns on/Àashes, take appropriate action for each light. There is no
problem if the light turns off, however if the light does not turn off or turns on/Àashes again,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The warning contents can be veri¿ed on the center display.
1. If the warning light is turned on, select
icon on the home screen to display the
application screen.
2. Select “Vehicle Status Monitor” to display the current warnings.
3. Select “Warning Guidance” to display the current warnings.
4. Select the applicable warning to view the warning details.
Stop Vehicle in Safe Place Immediately
If any of the following warning lights turns on, the system may have a malfunction. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Signal
Warning
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning/Warning light inspection
The light illuminates when the electric parking brake is applied with the ignition
switched to START or ON. It turns off when the electric parking brake is released.
When the light turns on
If the brake system warning light remains turned on even though the electric parking
brake is released, the brake Àuid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake
system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Brake System Warning
Light
When the light is Àashing
The light Àashes if the electric parking brake has a malfunction.
If the light remains Àashing even if the electric parking brake switch is operated,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates
that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully
released, have the brakes inspected immediately.
CAUTION
In addition, the effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to
depress the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle.
7–22
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
If the electronic brake force distribution control unit determines that some components
are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning
light and the ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the
electronic brake force distribution system.
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution System
Warning
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated.
Have the vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes
inspected as soon as possible:
Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are
illuminated simultaneously is dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an
emergency stop than under normal circumstances.
If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the
alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Charging System
Warning Light
CAUTION
Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated
because the engine could stop unexpectedly.
This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive
engine damage.
If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving:
Engine Oil Warning
Light
1.Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground.
2.Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
3.Inspect the engine oil level 6-29. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine
oil while being careful not to over¿ll.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive
engine damage.
4.Start the engine and check the warning light.
If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil,
stop the engine immediately and have your vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7–23
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
The light Àashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and
illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further.
(Red)
High Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Indication/Warning
Light
Handling Procedure
Flashing light
Drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can ¿nd a safe place to stop the vehicle
and wait for the engine to cool down.
Illuminated light
This indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place
immediately and stop the engine.
Refer to Overheating 7-17.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light
illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.
The message is displayed if the electric power steering has a malfunction.
If the message is displayed, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the
steering wheel. There is no problem if the message in the display turns off after a while.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer if the message is displayed continuously.
NOTE
Power Steering
Malfunction Indication*
yIf the message is displayed, the power steering will not operate normally. In this
case, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy
compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning.
yRepeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If
this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return
to normal.
The light illuminates/Àashes if the electric power steering has a malfunction.
If the light illuminates/Àashes, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the
steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if the light illuminates/Àashes continuously.
NOTE
Power Steering
Malfunction Indicator
Light*
7–24
y
If the indicator light illuminates/Àashes, the power steering will not operate normally.
If this happens, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may
feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning.
yRepeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If
this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return
to normal.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer and Have Vehicle Inspected
If any of the following warning lights or the indicator light turns on/Àashes, the system may
have a malfunction. Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected.
Signal
Warning
If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, the ABS control unit has detected a
system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had
no ABS.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
ABS Warning Light yWhen the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does
not indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
yThe brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated.
Type A instrument cluster
Displays when noti¿cation of the system malfunctions is required.
Check the message indicated in the display and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication in display and master warning light in instrument cluster are illuminated at same
time.
This indicates a malfunction with the vehicle system. Check the message indicated in the
display and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
For details, refer to the explanations for the warning/indicator lights, in the warning/
indicator lights section, which match the symbol in the upper part of the display.
Master Warning
If a message is not indicated in the display, operate the INFO switch to display the
Indication/Warning “Warning” screen.
Light
Refer to Message Indicated in Multi-information Display and INFO Switch on page 4-21.
Type B instrument cluster
The light illuminates continuously if any one of the following occurs. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
yThere is a malfunction in the battery management system.
yThere is a malfunction in the brake switch.
Electric Parking
Brake Warning
Light
The warning light illuminates when the system has a malfunction. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to
note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The check engine light may illuminate in the following cases:
yThe fuel tank level being very low or approaching empty.
yThe engine's electrical system has a problem.
Check Engine Light y
The emission control system has a problem.
yThe fuel-¿ller cap is missing or not tightened securely.
If the check engine light remains on, or it Àashes continuously , do not drive at high speeds
and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
7–25
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
The indication/light illuminates when the transaxle has a problem.
Automatic
Transaxle Warning
Indication/Warning
Light
CAUTION
If the automatic transaxle warning indication/light illuminates, the transaxle has
an electrical problem. Continuing to drive your Mazda in this condition could cause
damage to your transaxle. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the brake assist system may have a malfunction and
(Illuminate)
they may not operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
TCS/DSC Indicator
Light
A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly Àashes, constantly
illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is switched ON. If any of these
occur, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate
in an accident.
Air Bag/Front Seat
Belt Pretensioner
System Warning
Light
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous. An air bag/pretensioner
could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death.
If the tire pressure monitoring system has a malfunction, the tire pressure warning
light Àashes for about 1 minute when the ignition is switched ON and then continues
illuminating. Have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire
pressure warning beep sound is heard, decrease vehicle speed immediately and avoid
sudden maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or flashes, or the tire
(Flashing)
pressure warning beep sound is heard, it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high
Tire Pressure
speeds, or perform sudden maneuvering or braking. Vehicle drivability could worsen
Monitoring System
and result in an accident.
Warning Light
To determine if you have a slow leak or a flat, pull over to a safe position where you can
check the visual condition of the tire and determine if you have enough air to proceed
to a place where air may be added and the system monitored again by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer or a tire repair station.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is dangerous, even if you know why it is illuminated.
Have the problem taken care of as soon as possible before it develops into a more
serious situation that could lead to tire failure and a dangerous accident.
7–26
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
“Keyless System Malfunction” is displayed
This message is displayed if the advanced keyless entry & push button start system has a
problem.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
(Amber)
KEY Warning
Indication*
If the message is indicated, or the push button start indicator light (amber) flashes, the
engine may not start. If the engine cannot be started, try starting it using the emergency
operation for starting the engine, and have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4-10.
“Ignition is On” is displayed
This message is displayed when the driver's door is opened without switching the ignition
off.
“Key Not Detected” is displayed
This message is displayed when any of the following operations is performed with the key
out of the operational range or placed in areas inside the cabin where it is dif¿cult for the
key to be detected.
yThe push button start is pressed with the ignition switched off
yThe ignition is switched on
yAll doors are closed without switching the ignition off
If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously.
CAUTION
(Red)
(Illuminate)
KEY Warning
Light*
If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light
(amber) flashes, the engine may not start. If the engine cannot be started, try starting it
using the emergency operation for starting the engine, and have the vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4-10.
The light remains turned on if there is a problem with the system. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(Amber)
NOTE
High Beam Control
If the windshield area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is fogged or
System (HBC)
obstructed, the light turns on temporarily. If the light remains turned on, there may be a
Warning Light*
problem with the system.
i-ELOOP Warning
Indication*
(Amber)
Mazda Radar
Cruise Control
(MRCC) Warning
Indication*
The Warning indication/Warning light turns on if there is any malfunction in the i-ELOOP
system. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The “Front Radar Sensor System Malfunction” is displayed if there is a malfunction in the
system while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is on. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
7–27
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
The message is displayed when the system has a malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The system does not operate when the warning message is displayed.
CAUTION
(Amber)
Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) &
Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) Warning
Indication*
¾Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size, and the same
manufacture, brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with significantly
different wear patterns on the same vehicle. If such improper tires are used, the system
may not operate normally.
¾When an emergency spare tire is used, the system may not operate normally.
NOTE
If the windshield area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is fogged or
obstructed, the light turns on temporarily. If the light remains turned on, there may be a
problem with the system.
A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions.
Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM)
OFF Indicator
Light*
LED Headlight
Warning Light
7–28
yThe light does not turn on when the ignition
yIt turns on while driving the vehicle.
is switched ON.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traf¿c and few vehicles that the radar sensors
can detect, the system may pause (The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light in
the instrument cluster illuminates). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.
This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Taking Action
Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.
Signal
Warning
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
Action to be taken
Inspect the tires and adjust to the speci¿ed
inÀation pressure (page 6-41).
NOTE
yPerform tire pressure adjustment when
the tires are cold. Tire pressure will
vary according to the tire temperature,
therefore let the vehicle stand for 1
If the tire pressure monitoring system
hour or only drive it 1.6 km (1 mile) or
warning light illuminates or flashes,
less before adjusting the tire pressures.
or the tire pressure warning beep
When pressure is adjusted on hot tires
sound is heard, decrease vehicle
to the cold inÀation pressure, the TPMS
speed immediately and avoid sudden
warning light/beep may turn on after
maneuvering and braking:
the tires cool and pressure drops below
If the tire pressure monitoring system
speci¿cation.
warning light illuminates or flashes,
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning
or the tire pressure warning beep
light, resulting from the tire air
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
pressure dropping due to cold ambient
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
temperature will remain illuminated
perform sudden maneuvering or
even if the ambient temperature rises.
braking. Vehicle drivability could
(Illuminate)
In this case, it will also be necessary to
worsen and result in an accident.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
adjust the tire air pressures. If the TPMS
To determine if you have a slow leak
System Warning Light
warning light illuminates due to a drop
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
in tire air pressure, make sure to check
where you can check the visual
and adjust the tire air pressures.
condition of the tire and determine
if you have enough air to proceed to yTires lose air naturally over time and
the TPMS cannot tell if the tires are
a place where air may be added and
getting too soft over time or you have
the system monitored again by an
a Àat. However, when you ¿nd one low
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
tire in a set of four-that is an indication
repair station.
of trouble; you should have someone
drive the vehicle slowly forward so you
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
can inspect any low tire for cuts and any
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
metal objects sticking through tread or
dangerous, even if you know why
sidewall. Put a few drops of water in the
it is illuminated. Have the problem
valve stem to see if it bubbles indicating
taken care of as soon as possible
before it develops into a more serious a bad valve. Leaks need to be addressed
by more than simply reinÀating the tire
situation that could lead to tire
as leaks are dangerous — take it to an
failure and a dangerous accident.
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
7–29
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Smart Brake Support/
Smart City Brake
Support (SBS/SCBS)
Warning Indication*
Warning
The light turns on if the windshield or
the radar sensor are dirty, or there is a
malfunction in the system.
The light turns on if the windshield is
(Amber)
dirty or there is a malfunction in the
Smart City Brake
system.
Support (SCBS) Warning
*
Light
Action to be taken
Verify the reason why the warning light is
illuminated on the center display.
If the reason why the warning light is
illuminated is due to a dirty windshield,
clean the windshield.
If the warning light is illuminated because
of a dirty radar sensor, clean the front
emblem.
For any other reasons, have the vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Verify the reason why the warning light is
illuminated on the center display.
If the reason why the warning light is
illuminated is due to a dirty windshield,
clean the windshield.
For any other reasons, have the vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The light turns on when the remaining
fuel is about 9.0 L (2.3 US gal, 1.9 Imp
gal).
NOTE
Low Fuel Warning
Indication/Warning Light The light illumination timing may
vary because fuel inside the fuel tank
moves around according to the driving
conditions and the vehicle posture.
Add fuel.
If the check fuel cap warning light
illuminates while driving, the fuel-¿ller
Check Fuel Cap Warning cap may not be installed properly.
*
Light
Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel-¿ller
cap.
Refer to Fuel-Filler Cap on page 3-29
7–30
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
Action to be taken
Except Mexico
The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver
or front passenger's seat is occupied and the seat
belt is not fastened with the ignition switched
ON.
If the driver or front passenger's seat belt is
unfastened (only when the front passenger's seat
is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed
faster than about 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning
light Àashes. After a short time, the warning
light stops Àashing, but remains illuminated.
NOTE
yThe warning light Àashes for about 6 seconds
if the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition is switched ON.
yTo allow the front passenger occupant
classi¿cation sensor to function properly, do
not place and sit on an additional seat cushion
on the front passenger's seat. The sensor may
not function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning light may not
operate.
Mexico
Fasten the seat belts.
The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver
or front passenger's seat is occupied and the seat
Seat Belt Warning Light belt is not fastened with the ignition switched
ON.
If the driver or front passenger's seat belt is
unfastened (only when the front passenger's seat
is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed
faster than about 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning
light Àashes. After a short time, the warning
light stops Àashing, but remains illuminated. If
a seat belt remains unfastened, the warning light
Àashes again for a given period of time.
NOTE
yPlacing heavy items on the front passenger's
seat may cause the front passenger's seat belt
warning function to operate depending on the
weight of the item.
yTo allow the front passenger seat weight
sensor to function properly, do not place and
sit on an additional seat cushion on the front
passenger's seat. The sensor may not function
properly because the additional seat cushion
could cause sensor interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning light may not
operate.
7–31
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal
Warning
This warning light indicates that little
Low Washer Fluid Level washer Àuid remains.
Warning Indication/
Warning Light*
The light turns on if any door/trunk lid is
not closed securely.
Door-Ajar/Trunk lidAjar Warning Indication/
Warning Light
Action to be taken
Add washer Àuid (page 6-31).
Close the door/trunk lid securely.
KEY Warning Light*
Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.
Signal
Cause
The key battery is dead.
Action to be taken
Replace the key battery (page 6-38).
The key is not within the operation range.
The key is placed in areas inside the
cabin where it is dif¿cult for the key to be
detected.
(Red)
(Flashing)
A key from another manufacturer similar to
the key is in the operation range.
Bring the key into the operation range
(page 3-8).
Take the key from another manufacturer
similar to the key out of the operation
range.
Without the ignition switched off, the key is
taken out of the cabin, and then all the doors Bring the key back into the cabin.
are closed.
7–32
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Message Indicated on Display
If a message is displayed in the center display, take appropriate action (in a calm manner)
according to the displayed message.
(Display example)
Stop Vehicle in Safe Place Immediately
If the following messages are displayed in the center display , a vehicle system may be
malfunctioning. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Display
Indicated Condition
Displays if the engine coolant temperature has increased
excessively.
Displays if the charging system has a malfunction.
7–33
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Verify Display Content
Displays in the following cases:
Display
Indicated Condition/Action to be taken
The following message is displayed when the
temperature around the center display is high.
Lowering the temperature in the cabin or the
temperature around the center display by avoiding
direct sunlight is recommended.
7–34
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Message Indicated in Multi-information Display*
If there is a noti¿cation from the vehicle, a message is displayed in the multi-information
display. Check the information and take the necessary action.
(Display example)
If the warning light turns on/Àashes simultaneously or a symbol is indicated in the display,
check the information regarding the warning light or symbol. (page 4-32)
Display
Content
Action to be taken
Indicated when the push button start is
pressed while the shift lever is not in the
P position.
Shift the shift lever to the P position.
Indicated when the push button start is
pressed without depressing the brake
pedal.
Depress the brake pedal and press the
push button start.
Indicated when the push button start is
pressed without depressing the clutch
pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal and press the
push button start.
Indicated while the steering wheel is
locked.
Release the steering lock.
Indicated when the electric parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and operate the
switch is operated without depressing the
electric parking brake switch.
brake pedal.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
7–35
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Warning Sound is
Activated
Lights-On Reminder
The lights-on reminder is operable when
the time setting*1 of the auto headlight off
function is off.
If lights are on and the ignition is switched
to ACC or off, a continuous beep sound
will be heard when the driver's door is
opened.
*1 If the light switch is left on, the auto
headlight off function automatically
turns off the lights about 30 seconds
after switching the ignition off. The
time setting can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
NOTE
yWhen the ignition is switched to ACC,
the “Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep” (page 7-37) overrides
the lights-on reminder.
yA personalized function is available to
change the sound volume for the lightson reminder.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner
System Warning Beep
If there is a problem with the air bag/seat
belt pretensioner systems and the warning
light illumination, a warning beep sound
will be heard for about 5 seconds every
minute.
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner
system warning beep sound will continue
to be heard for approximately 35
minutes. Have your vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the air
bag/seat belt pretensioner system
warning beep sounding:
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/
seat belt pretensioner system warning
beep sounding is dangerous. In a
collision, the air bags and the seat belt
pretensioner system will not deploy
and this could result in death or serious
injury. Contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer to have the vehicle inspected as
soon as possible.
Seat Belt Warning Beep
Except Mexico
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition is switched ON, a beep
sound will be heard for about 6 seconds. If
the driver or the front passenger's seat belt
is not fastened and the vehicle is driven
at a speed faster than about 20 km/h (12
mph), a beep sound will be heard again for
a speci¿ed period of time.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given
period of time has elapsed, the beep sound
will not stop even if the vehicle speed falls
below 20 km/h (12 mph).
7–36
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
NOTE
yTo allow the front passenger occupant
classi¿cation sensor to function
properly, do not place and sit on an
additional seat cushion on the front
passenger's seat. The sensor may not
function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor
interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning beep may
not operate.
Mexico
If the vehicle speed exceeds about 20
km/h (12 mph) with the driver or front
passenger's seat belt unfastened, a warning
beep sounds continuously. If the seat belt
remains unfastened, the beep sound stops
once and then continues for about 90
seconds. The beep stops after the driver or
front passenger's seat belt is fastened.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given
period of time has elapsed, the beep sound
will not stop even if the vehicle speed falls
below 20 km/h (12 mph).
NOTE
yPlacing heavy items on the front
passenger's seat may cause the front
passenger's seat belt warning function
to operate depending on the weight of
the item.
yTo allow the front passenger seat weight
sensor to function properly, do not place
and sit on an additional seat cushion on
the front passenger's seat. The sensor
may not function properly because the
additional seat cushion could cause
sensor interference.
yIf a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning beep may
not operate.
Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep
If the driver's door is opened with the
ignition switched to ACC, a beep will
be heard continuously in the cabin to
notify the driver that the ignition has not
been switched OFF (STOP). Under this
condition, the keyless entry system will
not operate, the vehicle cannot be locked,
and the battery voltage will be depleted.
Key Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep
Vehicles with advanced keyless function
If the key is taken out of the vehicle while
the ignition is not switched OFF and
all the doors are closed, the beep which
sounds outside of the vehicle will be heard
6 times, the beep which sounds inside
the vehicle will be heard 6 times, and the
KEY warning light (red) in the instrument
cluster Àashes continuously to notify
the driver that the ignition has not been
switched OFF.
Vehicles without advanced keyless
function
If the key is taken out of the vehicle while
the ignition is not switched OFF and all
the doors are closed, a beep will be heard
in the cabin 6 times and the KEY warning
light (red) in the instrument cluster turns
on continuously to notify the driver that
the ignition has not been switched OFF.
NOTE
Because the key utilizes low-intensity
radio waves, the Key Removed From
Vehicle Warning may activate if the key is
carried together with a metal object or it
is placed in a poor signal reception area.
7–37
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Request Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function)
If the request switch is pressed with the
door open or ajar, or the ignition is not
switched OFF with a key being carried,
a beep will be heard outside for about 2
seconds to notify the driver that the door
or trunk lid cannot be locked.
Key Left-in-trunk Compartment
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function)
If the key is left in the trunk with all the
doors locked and the trunk lid closed, a
beep will be heard outside for about 10
seconds to notify the driver that the key is
in the trunk. In this case, take out the key
by pressing the electric trunk lid opener
and opening the trunk lid. The key taken
out of the trunk may not operate because
its functions have been temporarily
stopped. To restore the key's functions,
perform the applicable procedure (page
3-9).
Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
(With the advanced keyless
function)
If all the doors and trunk are locked using
another key while the key is left in the
cabin, the beep which sounds outside of
the vehicle will be heard for about 10
seconds to notify the driver that the key
is in the cabin. In this case, take out the
key by opening the door. A key taken
out of the vehicle using this method may
not operate because its functions have
been temporarily stopped. To restore the
key's functions, perform the applicable
procedure (page 3-9).
7–38
i-ELOOP Warning Beep*
If the vehicle is driven while “i-ELOOP
Charging Please don't Drive” is displayed,
a beep sound is heard. Make sure the
message is no longer displayed before
driving.
Tire InÀation Pressure Warning
Beep
The warning beep sound will be heard
for about 3 seconds when there is any
abnormality in tire inÀation pressures
(page 4-159).
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System Warning Beep*
Driving forward
The warning beep operates when the turn
signal lever is operated to the side where
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
light is illuminated.
NOTE
A personalized function is available to
change the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
warning beep sound volume.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Reversing
If a moving object such as a vehicle or
two-wheeled vehicle approaches on the
left or right from behind your vehicle, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
sound is activated.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) System Warnings*
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system warnings notify the driver of
system malfunctions and cautions on use
when required.
Check based on the beep sound.
Cautions
What to check
The beep sounds 1 time
while the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
is operating
The vehicle speed is
slower than 25 km/h (16
mph) and the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system has
been canceled.
The beep sounds
continuously while
driving
The distance between
your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is too
close. Verify the safety
of the surrounding area
and reduce vehicle
speed.
While the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
is operating, the beep
sounds and the multiinformation display
indicates a problem
with the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
system.
A malfunction in
the system may be
indicated. Have your
vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Lane Departure Warning Sound*
While the system is operating, if the
system determines that the vehicle may
depart from the lane, it sounds a warning
sound.
NOTE
yThe volume of the Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) warning sound
can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
yThe type of the Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) warning sound can be
changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-10.
Collision warning*
If there is a possibility of a collision
with a vehicle ahead, a warning sound is
activated at the same time as the warning
indications are displayed in the instrument
cluster or active driving display.
Power Steering Warning Buzzer
If the power steering system has
a malfunction, the power steering
malfunction light turns on or Àashes and
the buzzer operates at the same time.
Refer to Warning Indication/Warning
Lights on page 4-33.
Electric Parking Brake Warning
Beep
The warning buzzer is activated under the
following conditions:
y
The
vehicle is driven with the electric
parking brake applied.
y
The electric parking brake switch is
pulled while the vehicle is driven.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
7–39
If Trouble Arises
When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened
When Trunk Lid Cannot
be Opened
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a
malfunction in the electrical system and
the trunk lid cannot be opened, perform
the following procedure as an emergency
measure to open it:
3. Move the lever to the left to open the
trunk lid.
(Type A)
1. Open the cover.
2. Move the lever to the left to fold the
seatback.
Cover
(Type B)
Lever
After performing this emergency
measure, have the vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
7–40
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
If Trouble Arises
Active Driving Display Does Not Operate
If the Active Driving
Display does not operate
If the active driving display does not
operate, switch the ignition off and then
restart the engine. If the active driving
display does not operate even with
the engine restarted, have the vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
7–41
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
MEMO
7–42
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
8
Customer Information and Reporting
Safety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on
equipment.
Customer Assistance ........................... 8-2
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ....... 8-2
Customer Assistance (Canada) ...... 8-7
Customer Assistance
(Puerto Rico) ................................ 8-10
Customer Assistance (Mexico) .... 8-11
Mazda Importer/Distributors .......... 8-13
Importer/Distributor ..................... 8-13
Reporting Safety Defects .................. 8-14
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.) ........................................ 8-14
Reporting Safety Defects
(Canada) ....................................... 8-15
Warranty............................................ 8-16
Warranties for Your Mazda .......... 8-16
Outside the United States/
Canada.......................................... 8-17
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country (Except United States and
Canada) ........................................ 8-18
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories .................................. 8-19
Recording of Vehicle Data ................ 8-22
Recording of Vehicle Data ........... 8-22
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) ............................................ 8-23
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS)...................................... 8-23
Tire Information (U.S.A.) ................. 8-25
Tire Labeling ................................ 8-25
Location of the Tire Label
(Placard) ....................................... 8-30
Tire Maintenance ......................... 8-33
Vehicle Loading ........................... 8-36
Steps for Determining the Correct
Load Limit ................................... 8-42
Declaration of Conformity ............... 8-43
Declaration of Conformity ........... 8-43
Cell Phones ........................................ 8-20
Cell Phones Warning .................... 8-20
Event Data Recorder ........................ 8-21
Event Data Recorder (U.S.A. and
Canada) ........................................ 8-21
8–1
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in
top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modi¿ed to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certi¿ed physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For more
information, go to NHTSA website www.safercar.gov (VEHICLE SHOPPERS > Air Bags >
Air Bag FAQs > Air Bag Deactivation).
STEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
y
If
your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
y
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modi¿ed to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certi¿ed physician, go to STEP 2.
8–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management or it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the
supplementary restraint system modi¿ed to accommodate a person with certain medical
conditions in accordance with a certi¿ed physician, you can reach Mazda North American
Operations by one of the following ways.
Log on: at www.MazdaUSA.com
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
the U.S., can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of the
page at www.MazdaUSA.com
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
In order to serve you ef¿ciently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identi¿cation Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.
8–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
STEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may
not be possible. As a ¿nal step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered,
Mazda North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies
under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the extent
permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to BBB
AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon Law”. If
you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to ¿rst use BBB AUTO LINE.
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding
on you or Mazda unless you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB
website at www.bbb.org/autoline.
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!
8–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
California Customers
1. Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a mediation/
arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus [4200
Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business Bureaus.
BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certi¿ed by the Arbitration Certi¿cation
Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.
2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you to
bring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may ¿le a claim with BBB
AUTO LINE. Claims must be ¿led with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months after
the expiration of the warranty.
3. To ¿le a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for the
call.
4. In order to ¿le a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name and
address, the brand name and vehicle identi¿cation number (VIN) of your vehicle, and a
statement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:
the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage,
the approximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were ¿rst brought to the
attention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.
5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. If
mediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claims
within the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal hearing.
The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the time your
complaint is ¿led; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not ¿rst contact Mazda about
your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an inspection/report
by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by BBB AUTO LINE.
6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or
remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required to
use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
8–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative
is unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express
warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace or
repurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumption
that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000
miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs ¿rst, one or more of the following
occurs:
The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty that substantially
impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the nonconformity
has been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents AND the buyer or
lessee has directly noti¿ed Mazda of the need for the repair of the nonconformity; OR
y The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda
or its agents AND the buyer has noti¿ed Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
y The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its
agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the vehicle
to the buyer.
y
NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE
FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618
ATTN: Customer Mediation
8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursement
for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle
nonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation for
damages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.
9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multiple
damages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in California
Civil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).
10.You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject the
decision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision and any
¿ndings will be admissible in a court action.
11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and will
comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we receive
notice of your acceptance of the decision.
12.Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.
8–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Canada)
Satisfaction Review Process
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition.
In our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your dealer.
If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal dealership
procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
STEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General Manager.
STEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Of¿ce
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda
Canada Inc. Regional Of¿ce nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Of¿ce address
and phone numbers are shown (page 8-9).
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satis¿ed, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 2634680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identi¿cation Number (VIN). Refer to the Vehicle Identi¿cation Number on page
9-2 for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date
5. Present odometer reading
6. Your dealer's name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.
8–7
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer Satisfaction
Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still not resolved,
you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about how your
concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding
arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal.
There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and ¿nal as the award
is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a speci¿c item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,
Mazda, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to
use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan Of¿ce at:
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
8–8
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally:
Province/Territory
CAMVAP Number
British Columbia & Yukon Territories
1 (800) 207-0685
Alberta & Northwest Territories
1 (800) 207-0685
Saskatchewan
1 (800) 207-0685
Manitoba
1 (800) 207-0685
Ontario
1 (800) 207-0685
Atlantic Canada
1 (800) 207-0685
Quebec
1 (800) 207-0685
Regional Of¿ces
REGIONAL OFFICES
COVERING AREAS
MAZDA CANADA INC.
WESTERN REGION
5011 275 STREET
LANGLEY, BRITISH COLUMBIA
V4W 0A8
(778) 369-2100
1 (800) 663-0908
ALBERTA,
BRITISH COLUMBIA,
MANITOBA,
SASKATCHEWAN,
YUKON
MAZDA CANADA INC.
CENTRAL REGION
55 VOGELL ROAD,
RICHMOND HILL,
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5
1 (800) 263-4680
ONTARIO,
NEW BRUNSWICK,
NOVA SCOTIA,
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,
NEWFOUNDLAND
MAZDA CANADA INC.
QUEBEC REGION
6111 ROUTE TRANSCANADIENNE
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC
H9R 5A5
(514) 694-6390
QUEBEC
8–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized Mazda
Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
STEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
STEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your
area's Mazda representative.
Refer to Importer/Distributor on page 8-13.
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identi¿cation Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Mexico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in
top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
y
If
your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
y
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modi¿ed to accommodate a person with certain medical condition in
accordance with a certi¿ed physician you must contact your dealership in order to avoid
the potential loss of the warranty of your vehicle which may occur if some third party is
hired by the customer to make any modi¿cations to this system.
Log on: at www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
Mexico, can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.mazdamexico.com.mx
By phone at: 01 800 01 MAZDA (62932)
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Mario Pani #150, PB Col. Lomas de Santa Fe
Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300
Del. Cuajimalpa de Morelos
Tel: Customer Assistance
01 800 01 MAZDA(62932).
8–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
In order to serve you ef¿ciently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identi¿cation Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Importer/Distributor
U.S.A.
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)
CANADA
Mazda Canada Inc.
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)
SAIPAN
Paci¿c International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234-7524
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051
AMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American
Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699-9347
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island
International Automotive Distributor
Group, LLC. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)
P.O. Box 191850, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00919-1850
TEL: (787) 641-1777
MEXICO
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Mario Pani # 150, PB Col. Lomas de
Santa Fe Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300 Del.
Cuajimalpa
TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:
01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico
GUAM
Triple J Motors
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,
GUAM 96911 USA
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931
TEL: (671) 649-6555
8–13
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traf¿c Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda
Importer/Distributor).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it ¿nds that
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-3274236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC, 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
NOTE
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be
forwarded to:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, California 92618-2922
or
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
Customer Experience Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page
8-13) in this manual.
8–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm
8–15
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Warranties for Your Mazda
y
New
Vehicle Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty
y
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
y
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
y
Federal Emission Control Warranty/California Emission Control Warranty
y
Powertrain
y
y
Emission Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
y
Emission
Control Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
y
Tire Warranty
y
Replacement
NOTE
Warranty information varies depending on the country. Refer to the Warranty Booklet for
detailed warranty information.
8–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside the United States/Canada
Government regulations in the United States/Canada require that automobiles meet speci¿c
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United
States/Canada may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it dif¿cult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside the United States/Canada.
United States
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently, Mazda vehicles built
for use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with speci¿c vehicle
modi¿cations to comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
Canada
However, in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda vehicles
built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the United States with speci¿c
vehicle modi¿cations to comply with the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers
on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United
States/Canada:
y
Recommended
fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
y
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
8–17
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country
(Except United States and Canada)
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country may be problematic depending on whether it
meets the speci¿c emission and safety standards of the country in which the vehicle will be
driven. Consequently, your vehicle may require modi¿cations at personal expense in order
to meet the regulations.
In addition, you should be aware of the following issues:
Satisfactory vehicle servicing may be dif¿cult or impossible in another country.
The fuel speci¿ed for your vehicle may be unavailable.
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your
vehicle.
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.
8–18
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.
These may ¿t your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle's
performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you install
any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories:
Improperly designed parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance
or safety systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of
injuries in an accident.
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as mobile
telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an improper
installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, airbag (SRS) activation, ABS/TCS/DSC inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
8–19
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Cell Phones
Cell Phones Warning
WARNING
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication
equipment in vehicles in your country:
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing
a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these
devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a
passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use.
If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least
leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices
while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
8–20
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Event Data Recorder
Event Data Recorder (U.S.A. and Canada)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
y
How
various systems in your vehicle were operating;
or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
y
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
y
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
y
Whether
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near crash-like situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Mazda will not disclose any of the data recorded in an EDR to a third party unless:
y
A written
agreement from the vehicle owner or the lessee is obtained
requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities
y
Used as a defense for Mazda in a law suit, claim, or arbitration
y
Ordered by a judge or court
y
Of¿cially
However, if necessary Mazda will:
y
Use
the data for research on Mazda vehicle performance, including safety.
the data or the summarized data to a third party for research purposes without
disclosing vehicle or owner identi¿cation information.
y
Disclose
8–21
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Recording of Vehicle Data
Recording of Vehicle Data
This vehicle is equipped with a computer which records the following main vehicle data
related to vehicle controls, operation, and other driving conditions.
Recorded data
y
Vehicle conditions such as engine speed and vehicle speed
y
Driving operation conditions such as accelerator and brake pedals, and information related
to the environmental circumstances while the vehicle is driven
y
Malfunction diagnosis information from each on-vehicle computer
y
Information related to controls of other on-vehicle computers
NOTE
The recorded data may vary depending on the vehicle grade and optional equipment. Voice
and images are not recorded.
Data handling
Mazda and its subcontracting parties may obtain and use the recorded data for vehicle
malfunction diagnosis, research and development, and quality improvement.
Mazda will not disclose or provide any of the obtained data to a third party unless:
y
An
agreement from the vehicle owner (agreements from lessor and lessee for leased
vehicle) is obtained
y
Of¿cially requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities
y
For statistical processing by a research institution after processing the data so that
identi¿cation of the owner or the vehicle is impossible
8–22
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National Highway
Traf¿c Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and temperature
performance.
Tread Wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci¿ed government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart signi¿cantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction-AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci¿ed
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests
and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
8–23
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
Temperature-A, B, C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a speci¿ed indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:
Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary
with respect to grade.
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND TO
ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A
UTQGS MARK (example)
8–24
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Labeling
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires. This information identi¿es and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire
and also provides a tire identi¿cation number for safety standard certi¿cation and in case of
a recall.
Information on Passenger Vehicle Tires
Please refer to the sample below.
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identi¿cation number
2. Passenger car tire
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
5. Radial
6. Run-Àat tire
7. Rim diameter code
8. Load index & speed symbol
9. Severe snow conditions
10.Tire ply composition and materials used
11. Max. load rating
12.Tread wear, traction and temperature grades
13.Max. permissible inÀation pressure
14.SAFETY WARNING
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
8–25
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
NOTE
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing
Association).
215
“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
65
“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
R
“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.
15
“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
95
“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire
can support.
H
“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
*
Speed Rating
Q
99 mph
R
106 mph
S
112 mph
T
118 mph
U
124 mph
H
130 mph
V
149 mph
W
168* mph
Y
186* mph
For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8–26
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
M S or M/S: Mud and Snow
AT: All Terrain.
AS: All Season. The “M S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in mud
and snow.
U.S. DOT Tire Identi¿cation Number (TIN)
This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
In general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and other.
Maximum Load Rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the
tire.
Maximum Permissible InÀation Pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under
normal driving conditions.
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a speci¿ed government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on speci¿ed government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a speci¿ed indoor laboratory test wheel.
Snow Tires
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels. Make
sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other tires
on your vehicle.
8–27
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAFETY WARNING
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:
y
EXPLOSION
OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-MATCH
TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa) TO SEAT
BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT TIRES.
y
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGEFOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.
Information on Temporary Tires
Please refer to the sample below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Temporary tires
Nominal width of tire in millimeters
Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
Diagonal
Rim diameter code
Load index & speed symbol
T115/70D16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
8–28
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
115
“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the width
in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
70
“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
D
“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.
16
“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
90
“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire
can support.
M
“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
M
81 mph
8–29
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)
You will ¿nd the tire label containing tire inÀation pressure by tire size and other important
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.
SAMPLE
Recommended Tire InÀation Pressure
On the tire label you will ¿nd the recommended tire inÀation pressure in both kPa and
psi for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the
inÀation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inÀation pressure is
maintained.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
NOTE
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the
recommended cold tire inÀation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up,
increasing the tire pressure.
8–30
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
WARNING
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the
information in this owner's manual:
Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may result
in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and
rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It results in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at
them.
Checking Tire Pressure
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold —meaning they are not hot
from driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.
5. If you over¿ll the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve.
Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
6. Replace the valve cap.
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.
NOTE
Some spare tires require higher inÀation pressure.
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other
irregularities.
8–31
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Glossary of Terms
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inÀation pressure, and the
maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identi¿cation Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of manufacture.
InÀation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and
cargo.
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's
mounted on the vehicle.
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity
is described on the tire label.
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
8–32
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Maintenance
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are
some important maintenance points:
Tire InÀation Pressure
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the
pressures speci¿ed on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.
Tire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) at the latest or sooner
if irregular wear develops. Mazda recommends to rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) to
help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly.
Forward
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a
combination of the following:
y
Incorrect
tire pressure
wheel alignment
y
Out-of-balance wheel
y
Severe braking
y
Improper
After rotation, inÀate all tire pressures to speci¿cation (page 9-8) and inspect the lug
nuts for tightness.
After adjusting the tire pressure, initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is
necessary to make the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-162.
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern or
studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be weakened if
rotated from side to side.
8–33
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Replacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could result
in an accident.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
Tread wear indicator
New tread
Worn tread
You should replace the tire before the band crosses the entire tread.
After adjusting the tire pressure, initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is
necessary to make the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-162.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The period
in which the tire was manufactured (both week and year) is indicated by a 4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-25.
8–34
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Safety Practices
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate good
driving habits for your own bene¿t.
y
Observe
posted speed limits and drive at speeds that are safe for the existing weather
conditions
y
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
y
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
y
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking
CAUTION
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire
or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until
you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire is underinflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with your spare tire.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest vehicle or tire dealer to
have the vehicle inspected.
8–35
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Vehicle Loading
WARNING
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to tow a
trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle damage.
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will provide
maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize
yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's Safety Certi¿cation Label and Tire and Load Information Label:
WARNING
Overloaded Vehicle:
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's suspension
system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure, handling or steering
problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the distance
required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail completely,
particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a combination of the size of
the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation pressure.
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the
vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.
8–36
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed
to carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load
Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for “THE COMBINATION
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg or
XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer installed
equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted
from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be accurate.
8–37
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
CARGO
8–38
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment.
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from
the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire
label.
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg (849
lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) - 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg
(699 lbs)
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) - (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2) lbs)
= 249 kg (549 lbs)
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance
Certi¿cation Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW
8–39
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight
cargo
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is
shown on the Safety Compliance Certi¿cation Label located on the driver's door frame
or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
SAMPLE
WARNING
Never Exceed Axle Weight Rating Limits:
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and could
result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling, performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, or loss of
control.
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.
8–40
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
GCW
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW).
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the
vehicle - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
WARNING
Never Exceed GVWR or GAWR Specifications:
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or
damage to the vehicle.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
8–41
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting ¿gure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be ¿ve 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
8–42
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer System
8–43
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
8–44
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
NOTE
During printing time of this user manual the approvals listed above are granted.
WARNING
Change or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the use's authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink Wireless Control System
CAUTION
HomeLink has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the device.
8–45
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
NOTE
FCC ID: NZLMOBHL4
CANADA:4112A-MOBHL4
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1- This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Type A
U.S.A. and Canada
FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC09 IC:279B-MBLUEC09
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term “IC: ” before the radio certi¿cation number only signi¿es that Industry Canada
technical speci¿cations were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with
installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
compliance.
8–46
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Mazda Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer Service
y
U.S.A.
Phone:
800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
y
Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
Web:
Mexico
y
Brief
description: Bluetooth module for Hands-free telephone and streaming audio
and address of the importer: Refer to "MEXICO" (page 8-13) in Importer/
Distributor section.
y
Brand name of the product: Johnson Controls Inc.
y
Model name of the product: MAZ
y
Names and addresses of where the warranty can be served: Refer to "MEXICO" (page
8-13) in Importer/Distributor section.
y
Names and addresses of where to acquire spare parts, consumables and accessories: Refer
to "MEXICO" (page 8-13) in Importer/Distributor section.
y
Warranty period, items covered by the warranty and its possible limitations or exceptions:
Refer to the Warranty Booklet for detailed warranty information.
y
Warranty procedure:
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
y
Electrical speci¿cations:
Voltage: 9-16V, Frequency: 2.4Ghz, Current: 270mA(Typ)
y
Name
8–47
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Type B
U.S.A. and Canada
8–48
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Mexico
8–49
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Smart Brake Support (SBS)/Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)/Distance
Recognition Support System (DRSS)
8–50
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
9
Speci¿cations
Technical information about your Mazda.
Identi¿cation Numbers ...................................................................... 9-2
Vehicle Information Labels ........................................................... 9-2
Speci¿cations ...................................................................................... 9-4
Speci¿cations ................................................................................ 9-4
Personalization Features ................................................................. 9-10
Personalization Features ............................................................. 9-10
9–1
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Identi¿cation Numbers
Vehicle Information Labels
Vehicle Identi¿cation Number
Chassis Number
Open the cover shown in the ¿gure to
check the chassis number.
The vehicle identi¿cation number legally
identi¿es your vehicle. The number is on a
plate attached to the cowl panel located on
the left corner of the dashboard. This plate
can easily be seen through the windshield.
Vehicle Emission Control
Information Label (U.S.A. and
Canada)
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
Label (U.S.A. and Canada)
Tire Pressure Label
9–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Identi¿cation Numbers
Engine Number
Forward
9–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Speci¿cations
Speci¿cations
Engine
Item
Speci¿cation
Type
DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder
Bore × Stroke
89.0 × 100 mm (3.50 × 3.94 in)
Displacement
2,488.5 ml (2,488.5 cc)
Compression ratio
13.0
Electrical System
Item
Classi¿cation
Q-85*1
Battery
12V-60Ah/20HR*2 or 12V-65Ah/20HR*2
Spark-plug number
PE5R-18-110 or PE5S-18-110
Mazda Genuine spark plug*3
*1 Q-85 is designed for i-ELOOP system. Only Q-85 should be used to ensure correct operation of i-ELOOP
system. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
*2 Not for i-ELOOP system.
*3 This spark plug provides the SKYACTIV-G engine with optimum performance. Contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details.
CAUTION
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on
the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.
Lubricant Quality
Lubricant
Classi¿cation
Engine oil
Refer to Recommended Oil on page 6-26.
Coolant
Manual transaxle oil
Automatic transaxle Àuid
Brake/Clutch Àuid
FL-22 type
API Service
GL-4
SAE
75W-80
Mazda Genuine ATF FZ
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
NOTE
Refer to Introduction on (page 6-2) for owner's responsibility in protecting your
investment.
9–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Speci¿cations
Capacities
(Approximate Quantities)
Item
Engine oil
Coolant
With oil ¿lter replacement
Capacity
4.5 L (4.8 US qt, 4.0 Imp qt)
Without oil ¿lter replacement
4.3 L (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)
Manual transaxle
6.9 L (7.3 US qt, 6.1 Imp qt)
Automatic transaxle
Manual transaxle oil
7.2 L (7.6 US qt, 6.3 Imp qt)
1.65 L (1.74 US qt, 1.45 Imp qt)
Automatic transaxle Àuid
Fuel tank
7.8 L (8.2 US qt, 6.9 Imp qt)
62.0 L (16.4 US gal, 13.6 Imp gal)
Check oil and Àuid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.
Dimensions
Item
Overall length
4,865 mm (191.5 in)
With license plate holder
4,895 mm (192.7 in)
Overall width
1,840 mm (72.4 in)
Overall height
Front tread
Rear tread
Vehicle speci¿cation
Without license plate holder
1,450 mm (57.1 in)
17 inch wheel vehicle
1,585 mm (62.4 in)
19 inch wheel vehicle
1,595 mm (62.8 in)
17 inch wheel vehicle
1,575 mm (62.0 in)
19 inch wheel vehicle
Wheelbase
1,585 mm (62.4 in)
2,830 mm (111.4 in)
9–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Speci¿cations
Weights
U.S.A. and Canada
Weight
Item
Manual transaxle
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Automatic transaxle
1,932 kg (4,259 lbs)
1,976 kg (4,356 lbs)
Front
1,006 kg (2,218 lbs)
1,049 kg (2,313 lbs)
Rear
931 kg (2,052 lbs)
932 kg (2,055 lbs)
Mexico
Item
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Weight
Total
1,988 kg (4,383 lbs)
Front
1,018 kg (2,244 lbs)
Rear
970 kg (2,138 lbs)
Air Conditioner
The type of refrigerant used is indicated on a label attached to the inside of the engine
compartment. Check the label before recharging the refrigerant. Refer to Climate Control
System on page 5-2.
Item
Refrigerant Type
Classi¿cation
HFC134a (R-134a)
9–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Speci¿cations
Light Bulbs
Exterior light
Category
Light bulb
Halogen
Headlights
LED
Wattage
UNECE*1 (SAE)
High beam
60
HB3 (9005)
Low beam
55
H11 (H11)
High beam
LED*2
— (—)
Low beam
LED*2
— (—)
60
HB3 (9005)
LED*2
— (—)
With halogen
bulb headlights
Daytime running lights
With LED
headlights
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights (Front sidemarker lights)
With halogen
bulb headlights
27/8
— (#7444NA)
Front turn signal lights/Front side-marker lights
With LED
headlights
27/8
— (#7444NA)
55
H11 (H11)
Fog lights
With halogen
bulb headlights
*
With LED
headlights
LED*2
— (—)
Signature wing illumination
*2
LED
— (—)
Side turn signal lights
LED*2
— (—)
High-mount brake light
LED*2
— (—)
Rear turn signal lights
21
WY21W (7443NA)
5
W5W (—)
LED*2
— (—)
LED*2
— (—)
5
W5W (—)
LED*2
— (—)
Reverse lights
21
W21W (7440)
License plate lights
5
W5W (—)
*
Rear side-marker lights
With halogen
bulb headlights
With LED
headlights
Brake lights/Taillights
Taillights
With halogen
bulb headlights
With LED
headlights
*1 UNECE stands for United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
*2 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
9–7
Speci¿cations
Speci¿cations
Interior light
Category
Light bulb
Wattage
Trunk light
Overhead light (Front)/Map lights
Rear map lights
UNECE*1
3
—
Bulb type
8
—
LED type
LED*2
—
Bulb type
8
—
LED type
LED*2
—
Courtesy lights
5
—
Vanity mirror lights*
2
—
*1 UNECE stands for United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
*2 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.
Tires
NOTE
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.
When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally
¿tted to your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inÀation pressure.
Refer to Tire InÀation Pressure on page 6-41.
After adjusting the tire pressure, initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is
necessary to make the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-162.
Standard tire
(U.S.A. and Canada)
InÀation pressure
Tire size
Front
Rear
P225/55R17 95V
250 kPa (36 psi)
250 kPa (36 psi)
P225/45R19 92W
240 kPa (35 psi)
240 kPa (35 psi)
(Mexico)
InÀation pressure
Tire size
225/55R17 97V
225/45R19 92W
Front
Up to 3 persons
—Full load
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)
250 kPa (2.5 bar, 36 psi)
Rear
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)
320 kPa (3.2 bar, 46 psi)
Front
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)
250 kPa (2.5 bar, 36 psi)
Rear
230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi)
320 kPa (3.2 bar, 46 psi)
1 person's weight: About 75 kg
9–8
*Some models.
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Speci¿cations
Temporary spare tire
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Tire size
T125/70R17 98M
InÀation pressure
420 kPa (60 psi)
(Mexico)
Tire size
185/55R16 87M
InÀation pressure
320 kPa (3.2 bar, 46 psi)
Lug nut tightening torque
When installing a tire, tighten the lug nut to the following torque.
108—147 N·m (12—14 kgf·m, 80—108 ft·lbf)
Fuses
Refer to Fuses on page 6-57.
9–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Personalization Features
Personalization Features
The following personalization features can be set or changed by the customer or an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
Additionally, some of the personalization features can be changed by the customer
depending on the feature.
Personalization features and settings which can be changed differ depending on the market
and speci¿cation.
Settings Change Method
Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen.
A: Refer to Settings on page 5-39.
B: Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page 4-83.
C: Refer to Active Driving Display on page 4-29.
Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches.
D: Refer to Auto Lock/Unlock Function on page 3-17.
E: Refer to Transmitter on page 3-5.
F: Refer to Locking, Unlocking with Request Switch (With the advanced keyless function)
on page 3-14.
Settings can be changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Settings
Change
Method
Factory
Setting
Available
Settings
The system can be changed so that Smart
City Brake Support (SCBS)/Smart Brake
Support (SBS) does not operate.*1
On
On/Off
A —
The distance at which the collision warning
activates can be changed.
Mid
Near/Mid/Far
A —
The volume of the collision warning can
be changed.
High
High/Low/Off
A —
Item
Feature
Safety
Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS)
(page 4-138)
Smart Brake
Support (SBS) (page
4-143)
9–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Personalization Features
Item
Available
Settings
On
On/Off
A —
High
High/Low
A —
On
On/Off
A —
Before
At/Before
A —
Rare
High/Rare
A —
Vibration
Vibration/Beep/
Rumble
A —
Vibration
Low
High/Low
A —
Rumble
Low
High/Mid/Low
A —
Beep
Low
High/Low
A —
Feature
The system can be changed so that the
steering wheel assist does not operate.
The cancel sensitivity
of the steering
assistance for the
Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane
When the steering Departure Warning
wheel operation
System (LDWS) can
assistance is
be changed.
turned on
The system can be
changed so that the
Lane Departure
Warning does not
activate.
Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) &
Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) (page
4-125)
The warning timing
in which the Lanekeep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning
System (LDWS)
system determines that
When the steering the vehicle may be
wheel operation
deviating from its lane
assistance is
can be changed.
turned off
The sensitivity of
the warning for the
Lane-keep Assist
System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning
System (LDWS) can
be changed.
The type of Lane-keep Assist System
(LAS) & Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) warning can be changed.
The warning
intensity/volume
of the Lane-keep
Assist System
(LAS) & Lane
Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) system
can be changed.
Settings
Change
Method
Factory
Setting
9–11
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Personalization Features
Feature
Available
Settings
The system can be changed so that Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) does not operate.*1
On
On/Off
A —
High
High/
Low/
Off
A —
On
On/Off
A —
Near
Far/Medium/
Near
A —
On
On/Off
A —
Item
Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM)
(page 4-94)
Distance
Recognition Support
System (DRSS)
(page 4-107)
Warning beep volume*2
The system can be changed so that
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) does not operate.*1
The distance at which the vehicle ahead
and your vehicle indicated in the display
Àashes in white can be changed.
The Traf¿c Sign Recognition System
(TSR) can be set to inoperable.*1
Traf¿c Sign
Recognition System
(TSR)*3 (page
4-100)
Settings
Change
Method
Factory
Setting
The warning pattern of the excessive speed
warning can be changed.
The activation timing for the excessive
speed warning can be changed.
Off
0
Off/
Warning display
only/
A —
Warning display
warning
sound
0/ 5/ 10
A —
Vehicle
Door locks (page
3-17)
Keyless entry
system (page
3-3)
Lock:
Driving,
Unlock: IGN
Off
Off/
Lock When
Driving/
Lock: Driving,
Unlock: IGN
Off/
Lock When
Shifting Out
Of P/
Lock: Shift
From P,
Unlock: In P/
Lock: Driving,
Unlock: In P
A
D
Method for unlocking door using
transmitter
Once:
Driver's,
Twice: All
Doors
Touch Once:
All Doors/
Once: Driver's,
Twice: All
Doors
A
E
Time for locking door automatically
60 seconds
90 seconds/
60 seconds/
30 seconds
Operation condition of auto lock/unlock
function
A —
9–12
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Personalization Features
Available
Settings
Method for unlocking door using request
switch/transmitter
Once:
Driver's,
Twice: All
Doors
Touch Once:
All Doors/
Once: Driver's,
Twice: All
Doors
Time for locking door automatically
60 seconds
90 seconds/
60 seconds/
30 seconds
A —
Off
On/Off
A —
Beep volume when locking/unlocking
Medium
High/
Medium/
Low/
Off
Time until interior lights turn off after
closing door
15 seconds
60 seconds/
30 seconds/
15 seconds/
7.5 seconds
A —
Time until interior lights turn off
automatically when any door is not closed
completely
30 minutes
60 minutes/
30 minutes/
10 minutes
A —
Item
Advanced keyless
entry system (page
3-10)
Illuminated entry
system (page
5-87)
Settings
Change
Method
Factory
Setting
Feature
Auto-lock function operation/nonoperational
A
A
E,
F
E,
F
Auto-wiper control
(page 4-60)
Operational/non-operational
On
On/Off*4
A —
Daytime running
lights (page 4-58)
Operational/non-operational
On
On/Off
— —
30 seconds
120 seconds/
90 seconds/
60 seconds/
30 seconds/
Off*6
A —
Medium
Light/
Medium Light/
Medium/
Medium Dark/
Dark
A —
High Beam Control
System (HBC) (page Operational/non-operational*1
4-91)
On
On/Off
A —
Adaptive Front
Lighting System
(AFS) (page 4-90)
On
On/Off
A —
Off
High/Low/Off
A —
Auto headlight off*5
(page 4-53)
Auto-light control
(page 4-53)
Time until headlights turn off
Timing by which lights turn on
Operational/non-operational*1
Lights-on reminder*7
Warning beep volume
(page 7-36)
9–13
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Personalization Features
Item
Feature
Settings
Change
Method
Factory
Setting
Available
Settings
A —
Coming home light
(page 4-57)
Time until headlights turn off
30 seconds
120 seconds/
90 seconds/
60 seconds/
30 seconds/
Off
Leaving home light
(page 4-57)
Operational/non-operational
On
On/Off
A —
High
High/Low
A —
On
On/Off
A —
15 minutes
15 minutes/
Continuous*8
— —
Turn signal indicator
Beep volume
(page 4-59)
Three-Àash turn
signal (page 4-59)
Operational/non-operational
Rear window
defogger (page
4-63)
The operation time for the rear window
defogger can be changed.
Ambient lights
(page 5-85)
Ambient lights brightness*9
Medium
Bright/
Medium/
Dark/
Off*10
A —
Language
Language indicated in display
English
Depends on
market*11
A —
Temperature
Temperature unit indicated in display
°F or °C
°F/°C
A —
Distance
Distance unit indicated in display
mi or km
mi/km
A —
System
Fuel Economy Monitor (page 4-83)
Ending display
Display/non-display
Off
On/Off
B —
Fuel economy
resetting procedure
Linkage/non-linkage with fuel economy
reset and trip meter A reset
Off
On/Off
B —
9–14
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Speci¿cations
Personalization Features
Settings
Change
Method
Factory
Setting
Available
Settings
On
On/Off
C —
0
13 steps up/
down from
initial setting
(total: 27 steps)
C —
The method for adjusting the display
brightness (automatically/manually) can
be changed.
AUTO
AUTO/
MANUAL
C —
The standard brightness while automatic
adjustment is selected can be changed
using the brightness adjustment.
0
2 steps up/down
from initial
C —
setting (total: 5
steps)
The standard brightness while manual
adjustment is selected can be changed
using the brightness adjustment.
0
20 steps up/
down from
initial setting
(total: 41 steps)
C —
Lane
Guidance &
Turn by Turn
At Maneuver/
Lane Guidance
& Turn by
Turn/
Street Name &
Turn by Turn/
OFF
C —
Item
Feature
Active Driving Display (page 4-29)
Setting can be changed so that the Active
Driving Display is not displayed.
The display height (up/down position) can
be changed.
Display
Navigation guidance The display information can be changed.
*1 Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and Mazda
recommends that these systems remain On.
*2 Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The
volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed.
*3 This system functions only when the navigation system is functioning.
*4 If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever
position is set to intermittent operation.
*5 If the setting is changed to Off, the following operation is performed according to the headlight switch position:
y
y
At
position: Headlights turn off immediately after the ignition is switched off.
At any position other than
: Headlights on/off conditions vary according to the headlight switch
position. Refer to Headlights on page 4-53.
*6 When set to Off, the lights-on reminder is operable.
*7 The lights-on reminder settings can be changed at anytime, however, the lights-on reminder only operates when
the auto headlight function is set to Off. Refer to Lights-On Reminder on page 7-36.
*8 The operation may stop in 15 minutes due to the effect of the outside temperature even if the operation time of
the rear window defogger has been changed to Continuous.
*9 Change the ambient light illumination level with the parking lights or headlights turned on.
*10 When set to OFF, the ambient lights remain turned off regardless of whether of not the parking lights or
headlights are on or off. However, they will turn on or off in conjunction with the illuminated entry system.
*11 Available only in display from the center display.
9–15
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
MEMO
9–16
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
10
Index
10–1
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
A
B
Accessory Socket ................................ 5-88
Active Driving Display ....................... 4-29
Active driving display ......................... 4-29
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS)................................................... 4-90
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories ......................................... 8-19
Advanced Key
Advanced keyless entry system .... 3-10
Operational range .......................... 3-11
Advanced Keyless Entry System ........ 3-10
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System
Warning Beep...................................... 7-36
Air Bag Systems ................................. 2-40
Ambient Temperature Display ...4-18, 4-25
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............ 4-76
Audio Control Switch
Adjusting the Volume .................... 5-41
Seek switch.................................... 5-42
Audio System ...................................... 5-13
Antenna ......................................... 5-13
Audio Control Switch ................... 5-41
Audio Set....................................... 5-21
AUX/USB mode ........................... 5-43
Operating Tips for Audio System ... 5-13
Satellite radio ................................ 5-32
Automatic Transaxle ........................... 4-42
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ........ 4-45
Automatic transaxle controls......... 4-42
Direct mode ................................... 4-51
Driving tips.................................... 4-52
Manual shift mode......................... 4-45
Shift-lock system........................... 4-43
Transaxle ranges ............................ 4-44
Battery ................................................. 6-35
Inspecting electrolyte level ........... 6-37
Maintenance .................................. 6-37
Recharging .................................... 6-37
Replacement .................................. 6-37
Speci¿cations .................................. 9-4
Battery Runs Out................................. 7-13
Jump-starting ................................. 7-13
Beep Sounds
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
warning.......................................... 7-38
Electric parking brake warning ..... 7-39
i-ELOOP........................................ 7-38
Ignition not switched off (STOP)
warning.......................................... 7-37
Key left-in-trunk compartment
warning.......................................... 7-38
Key left-in-vehicle warning .......... 7-38
Key removed from vehicle
warning.......................................... 7-37
Lane departure warning................. 7-39
Lights-on reminder ........................ 7-36
Request switch inoperable
warning.......................................... 7-38
Seat belt warning ........................... 7-36
Tire inÀation pressure warning ..... 7-38
Beep sounds
Power steering warning buzzer ..... 7-39
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ............ 4-94
Canceling operation of Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) ........................ 4-99
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning
Beep .................................................... 7-38
Bluetooth® ........................................... 5-51
Bluetooth® audio ........................... 5-69
Bluetooth® Hands-Free.................. 5-60
Troubleshooting ............................ 5-81
Body Lubrication ................................ 6-32
10–2
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
Bottle Holder....................................... 5-90
Brakes
Brake assist.................................... 4-73
Electric parking brake ................... 4-71
Foot brake...................................... 4-70
Pad wear indicator ......................... 4-73
Parking brake ................................ 4-71
Warning light ................................. 4-73
Break-In Period ................................... 3-44
C
Capacities .............................................. 9-5
Cell Phones ......................................... 8-20
Center Console .................................... 5-92
Child-Restraint
Child-restraint precautions ............ 2-23
Child Restraint
Child-restraint system installation ... 2-28
Child-Restraint
Installing child-restraint systems... 2-29
Child Restraint
LATCH child-restraint systems ..... 2-36
Climate Control System ........................ 5-2
Fully Automatic Type ...................... 5-9
Gas speci¿cations ............................ 9-6
Manual Type.................................... 5-5
Operating Tips ................................. 5-2
Vent Operation ................................ 5-3
Collision warning ................................ 7-39
Coming Home Light ........................... 4-57
Control Status Display ........................ 4-85
Courtesy Lights ................................... 5-85
Cruise Control ................................... 4-155
Cruise control switch................... 4-155
Cruise main indication (white)/cruise
set indication (green) ................... 4-156
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display ................................................ 4-19
Cup Holder .......................................... 5-89
Customer Assistance ............................. 8-2
D
Dashboard Illumination ...................... 4-17
Daytime Running Lights ..................... 4-58
Defogger ............................................. 4-63
Mirror ............................................ 4-64
Rear window ................................. 4-63
Dimensions ........................................... 9-5
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) .............................................. 4-107
Indication on display ................... 4-108
Door Locks.......................................... 3-12
Drive Selection.................................... 4-86
Driving In Flooded Area ..................... 3-48
Driving Tips ........................................ 3-44
Automatic transaxle ...................... 4-52
Break-in period.............................. 3-44
Driving in Àooded area.................. 3-48
Driving on uneven road................. 3-49
Floor mat ....................................... 3-45
Hazardous driving ......................... 3-45
Overloading ................................... 3-48
Rocking the vehicle ....................... 3-46
Saving fuel and protection of the
environment................................... 3-44
Winter driving ............................... 3-46
Driving on Uneven Road .................... 3-49
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)....... 4-78
DSC OFF indicator light ............... 4-79
DSC OFF switch ........................... 4-79
TCS/DSC indicator light ............... 4-78
E
Electric Parking Brake Warning Beep ... 7-39
Electric parking brake ......................... 4-71
Emergency Starting
Push-starting.................................. 7-16
Starting a Àooded engine............... 7-16
Emergency Towing
Tiedown hooks .............................. 7-20
Towing description ........................ 7-19
Emission Control System.................... 3-26
10–3
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
Ending Screen Display........................ 4-85
Engine
Coolant .......................................... 6-29
Engine compartment overview ..... 6-25
Exhaust gas.................................... 3-27
Hood release .................................. 6-23
Oil.................................................. 6-26
Starting ............................................ 4-5
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge .........................................4-16, 4-24
Essential Information ............................ 6-2
Event Data Recorder ........................... 8-21
Exterior Care ....................................... 6-64
Aluminum wheel maintenance...... 6-69
Bright-metal maintenance ............. 6-68
Maintaining the ¿nish ................... 6-66
Plastic part maintenance................ 6-69
Fuel Economy Monitor ....................... 4-83
Control Status Display .................. 4-85
Control status display .................... 4-85
Ending Screen Display .................. 4-85
Ending screen display ................... 4-85
Fuel Consumption Display............ 4-84
Fuel consumption display ............. 4-84
Fuses ................................................... 6-57
Panel description ........................... 6-59
Replacement .................................. 6-57
F
Hazard Warning Flasher...................... 4-65
Hazardous Driving .............................. 3-45
Head Restraint..................................... 2-13
Headlights
Coming home light........................ 4-57
Control........................................... 4-53
Flashing ......................................... 4-56
Headlight Àashing ......................... 4-56
High-low beam .............................. 4-56
Leaving home light ....................... 4-57
Leveling......................................... 4-58
High Beam Control System (HBC) .... 4-91
High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (green).................... 4-93
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ................... 4-74
HomeLink Wireless Control System ... 4-66
Hood Release ...................................... 6-23
Horn .................................................... 4-65
Flasher
Hazard warning ............................. 4-65
Headlights ..................................... 4-53
Flat Tire ................................................. 7-3
Mounting the spare tire ................. 7-10
Removing a Àat tire ......................... 7-7
Floor Mat ............................................ 3-45
Fluid
Brake/Clutch ................................. 6-31
Washer ........................................... 6-31
Fluids
Classi¿cation ................................... 9-4
Fog Lights ........................................... 4-58
Foot Brake........................................... 4-70
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) ....... 4-146
Fuel
Filler lid and cap............................ 3-28
Gauge ...................................4-16, 4-24
Requirements................................. 3-25
Tank capacity .................................. 9-5
Fuel Consumption Display ................. 4-84
G
Gauges................................................. 4-12
Glove Compartment ............................ 5-92
H
10–4
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
I
i-ACTIVSENSE.................................. 4-88
Active safety technology ............... 4-88
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) ............................................. 4-90
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ...... 4-94
Camera and sensors ....................... 4-89
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) ........................................ 4-107
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) ... 4-146
High Beam Control System
(HBC) ............................................ 4-91
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) ....................................... 4-125
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC)....................................... 4-115
Pre-crash safety technology .......... 4-88
Radar sensor (front)..................... 4-150
Radar sensors (rear)..................... 4-153
Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) ... 4-111
Smart Brake Support (SBS) ........ 4-143
Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) ........................................ 4-138
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System
(TSR) ........................................... 4-100
i-ELOOP ............................................. 4-80
Control status display .................... 4-82
Display .......................................... 4-80
i-ELOOP Warning Beep ................ 7-38
i-ELOOP indicator light ................ 4-82
i-ELOOP warning beep ....................... 7-38
If a Warning Light Turns On or
Flashes................................................. 7-22
If the Active Driving Display does not
operate ................................................. 7-41
Ignition
Switch.............................................. 4-4
Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep...................................... 7-37
Illuminated Entry System ................... 5-87
Immobilizer System ............................ 3-40
Indication/Indicator Lights.................. 4-36
Indicator Lights
Low engine coolant temperature ... 4-38
Wrench .......................................... 4-38
Inside Trunk Release Lever ................ 3-23
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level... 6-31
Inspecting Coolant Level .................... 6-29
Inspecting Engine Oil Level ............... 6-29
Inspecting Washer Fluid Level............ 6-31
Instrument Cluster............................... 4-12
Interior Care ........................................ 6-70
Active driving display
maintenance................................... 6-72
Cleaning the Àoor mats ................. 6-73
Cleaning the window interiors ...... 6-72
Instrument panel top (Soft pad)
maintenance................................... 6-72
Leather upholstery maintenance ... 6-71
Panel maintenance......................... 6-72
Plastic part maintenance................ 6-71
Seat belt maintenance.................... 6-70
Upholstery maintenance ................ 6-71
Vinyl upholstery maintenance ....... 6-71
Interior Lights ..................................... 5-85
Courtesy lights .............................. 5-85
Map lights...................................... 5-85
Overhead lights ............................. 5-85
J
Jack ....................................................... 7-4
Jump-Starting ...................................... 7-13
10–5
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
K
M
Key Left-in-trunk Warning Beep (With the
advanced keyless function) ................. 7-38
Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep (With
the advanced keyless function) ........... 7-38
Key Removed from Vehicle Warning
Beep .................................................... 7-37
Key Suspend Function .......................... 3-9
Keyless Entry System ........................... 3-3
Keys ...................................................... 3-2
Key suspend function ...................... 3-9
Transmitter ...................................... 3-5
Maintenance
Information...................................... 6-2
Scheduled ........................................ 6-4
Maintenance Monitor .......................... 6-18
Map Lights .......................................... 5-85
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) ............................................ 4-115
Close proximity warning ............. 4-118
Cruise control function................ 4-123
Display indication ....................... 4-117
Setting the system ....................... 4-118
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
System warnings ................................. 7-39
Message Indicated in Multi-information
Display ................................................ 7-35
Message Indicated on Display ............ 7-33
Meters and Gauges .............................. 4-12
Mirror Defogger .................................. 4-64
Mirrors
Outside mirrors.............................. 3-31
Rearview mirror ............................ 3-32
Moonroof ............................................ 3-37
L
Label Information ................................. 9-2
Lane-Change Signals .......................... 4-59
Lane Departure Warning sound .......... 7-39
Lane-change Signals ........................... 4-59
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) & Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)... 4-125
Leaving Home Light ........................... 4-57
Light Bulbs
Replacement .................................. 6-45
Speci¿cations .................................. 9-7
Lighting Control.................................. 4-53
Lights-on Reminder ............................ 7-36
Lubricant Quality .................................. 9-4
10–6
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
Multi-information Display .................. 4-21
Average fuel economy................... 4-26
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
Display .......................................... 4-27
Compass Display........................... 4-27
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display .......................................... 4-27
Current fuel economy.................... 4-26
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) Display............................. 4-27
Distance-to-empty ......................... 4-25
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge ............................................ 4-24
Fuel Gauge .................................... 4-24
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) &
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Display ........................... 4-27
Maintenance Monitor .................... 4-26
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Display .......................................... 4-27
Odometer and Trip Meter .............. 4-23
Outside Temperature Display ........ 4-25
Warning (Display Indication) ........ 4-28
O
Odometer and Trip Meter...........4-23, 4-24
Outside Mirrors ................................... 3-31
Outside Temperature Display.....4-18, 4-25
Overhead Console ............................... 5-91
Overhead Lights .................................. 5-85
Overheating ......................................... 7-17
Overloading......................................... 3-48
Owner Maintenance
Closing the hood ........................... 6-24
Engine compartment overview ..... 6-25
Key battery replacement ............... 6-38
Opening the hood .......................... 6-23
Owner maintenance precautions ... 6-20
P
Parking Brake...................................... 4-71
Personalization Features ..................... 9-10
Power Steering .................................... 4-87
Power Steering Warning Buzzer ......... 7-39
Power Windows .................................. 3-34
R
Radar Sensor (Front) ......................... 4-150
Radar Sensors (Rear) ........................ 4-153
Rear Coat Hooks ................................. 5-92
Rear Cross Traf¿c Alert (RCTA) ...... 4-111
Rear Door Child Safety Locks ............ 3-20
Rear Seat ............................................. 2-11
Rear View Monitor............................ 4-163
Displayable range on the screen... 4-165
Picture quality adjustment ........... 4-170
Rear view monitor operation....... 4-166
Rear view parking camera
location ........................................ 4-164
Switching to the rear view monitor
display ......................................... 4-164
Variance between actual road
conditions and displayed image ... 4-169
Viewing the display ..................... 4-166
Rear Window Defogger ...................... 4-63
Rearview Mirror.................................. 3-32
Rear window
Rear Window Defogger................. 4-63
Recommended Oil .............................. 6-26
Recording of Vehicle Data .................. 8-22
Recreational Towing ........................... 3-50
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country ............................................... 8-18
Replacement
Fuse ............................................... 6-57
Key battery .................................... 6-38
Light bulbs .................................... 6-45
Tires ............................................... 6-42
Wheel ............................................ 6-43
Wiper ............................................. 6-33
10–7
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep
(With the advanced keyless function) ... 7-38
Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 3-46
S
Safety Defects, Reporting ................... 8-14
Saving Fuel and Protection of the
Environment........................................ 3-44
Scheduled Maintenance ........................ 6-4
Seat
Seat position memory...................... 2-8
Seat Belt System
3-point type ................................... 2-18
Automatic locking ......................... 2-17
Emergency locking........................ 2-17
Extender ........................................ 2-21
Pregnant women ............................ 2-17
Seat belt precautions ..................... 2-15
Seat Belt Warning Beep ...................... 7-36
Seats
Front seat ......................................... 2-5
Head restraint ................................ 2-13
Rear seat ........................................ 2-11
Seat warmer..................................... 2-7
Security System
Immobilizer system ....................... 3-40
Theft-deterrent system .................. 3-42
Smart Brake Support (SBS) .............. 4-143
Collision warning ........................ 4-145
Stopping the Smart Brake Support
(SBS) system operation ............... 4-145
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) ... 4-138
Collision warning ........................ 4-141
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
Indicator Light (Red)................... 4-141
Stopping the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) System Operation........... 4-142
Spare Tire .............................................. 7-4
Speci¿cations ........................................ 9-4
Speedometer........................................ 4-14
SRS Air Bags
Front passenger occupant classi¿cation
system............................................ 2-56
How the SRS air bags work .......... 2-49
Limitations to SRS air bag ............ 2-54
Monitoring..................................... 2-61
SRS air bag deployment criteria ... 2-53
Supplemental restraint system
components ................................... 2-47
Starting the Engine................................ 4-5
Steering Wheel .................................... 3-30
Horn............................................... 4-65
Storage Compartments ........................ 5-91
Center console ............................... 5-92
Glove compartment ....................... 5-92
Overhead console .......................... 5-91
Rear coat hooks ............................. 5-92
Storage pocket ............................... 5-91
Storage Pocket .................................... 5-91
Sunshade ............................................. 3-39
Sunvisors ............................................. 5-84
T
Tachometer .......................................... 4-15
Theft-Deterrent System ....................... 3-42
Three-Àash Turn Signal....................... 4-59
Tiedown
Hook .............................................. 7-20
Tire InÀation Pressure Warning Beep ... 7-38
Tire Information .................................. 8-25
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..... 4-159
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization ...................................... 4-162
10–8
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
Tires .................................................... 6-40
Flat tire ............................................ 7-3
Replacing a tire ............................. 6-42
Replacing a wheel ......................... 6-43
Snow tires ...................................... 3-47
Speci¿cations .................................. 9-8
Temporary spare tire ..................... 6-43
Tire chains ..................................... 3-47
Tire inÀation pressure.................... 6-41
Tire rotation ................................... 6-41
Uniform tire quality grading system
(UTQGS) ....................................... 8-23
Towing
Recreational towing ...................... 3-50
Trailer towing ................................ 3-50
Towing Description ............................. 7-19
Traction Control System (TCS) .......... 4-77
TCS/DSC indicator light ............... 4-77
Traf¿c Sign Recognition System
(TSR)................................................. 4-100
Trip Computer ..................................... 4-19
Trip Meter ..................................4-14, 4-23
Trouble
Battery runs out ............................. 7-13
Emergency starting........................ 7-16
Emergency towing ........................ 7-19
Flat tire ............................................ 7-3
Overheating ................................... 7-17
Parking in an emergency ................. 7-2
Warning/indicator lights and warning
sounds............................................ 7-22
When trunk lid cannot be opened... 7-40
Trunk Lid ............................................ 3-20
Inside trunk release lever .............. 3-23
Luggage compartment................... 3-22
When trunk lid cannot be opened... 7-40
Turn Signals ........................................ 4-59
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........... 4-59
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................... 5-84
Vehicle Information Labels ................... 9-2
W
Warning/Buzzer .................................. 7-22
Warning Indication/Warning Lights.... 4-33
Warning Sound is Activated................ 7-36
Air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
warning beep ................................. 7-36
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
beep ............................................... 7-38
Collision warning .......................... 7-39
Electric Parking Brake Warning
Beep............................................... 7-39
i-ELOOP warning beep ................. 7-38
Ignition not switched off (STOP)
warning beep ................................. 7-37
Key left-in-trunk warning beep (With
the advanced keyless function) ..... 7-38
Key left-in-vehicle warning beep (With
the advanced keyless function) ..... 7-38
Key removed from vehicle warning
beep ............................................... 7-37
Lane Departure Warning sound..... 7-39
Lights-on reminder ........................ 7-36
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
System warnings ........................... 7-39
Power steering warning buzzer ..... 7-39
Request switch inoperable warning
beep (With the advanced keyless
function) ........................................ 7-38
Seat belt warning beep .................. 7-36
Tire inÀation pressure warning
beep ............................................... 7-38
Warranty .............................................. 8-16
Weights.................................................. 9-6
Windows
Power windows ............................. 3-34
10–9
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Index
Windshield Washer ............................. 4-63
Windshield Wipers .............................. 4-60
Winter Driving .................................... 3-46
Wiper
Replacing windshield wiper
blades............................................. 6-33
10–10
/C\FCA(*'#(A'FKVKQPKPFD
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising